Agenda packet — San Carlos City Council, November 10, 2025 (part 9 of 10)

Page 1 of 10 ends

(Rev. 02/2025)
L125R_SS_v5.4
In a continuing effort to offer the best product possible, we reserve the right to change, without notice, specifications or materials that in our opinion will not alter the function of the product. Specification sheets found at www.selux.us are the most recent versions and supercede all other printed or electronic versions.

Type: Qty:

Date: Customer:

M125
LED Recessed
Order Code: - - - - - - - - - -
Nominal
Fixture
Length
02 2 ft.
04 4 ft.
03 3 ft.

XX3
Runs are available in 2’, 3’, or 4’ nominal increments.

Round up to the nearest foot and replace the “xx”
with the # (i.e. 16=16’ nominal).

Finish WH
White
BK
Black
SV
Silver
Voltage
* Custom colors are available, please
consult factory. SP
Specify
Premium Color
UNV
120V through 277V
50/60hz capable
Light Engine
CCT
Shielding
Mounting
Emergency
Options
EC7
Emergency
Circuit Wiring
7 See page 8 for details.
8 Available with DIM driver only.
9 Minimum -20°C.
10 Not available with Cxx or Dxx optics.

FS
Single Fusing
Fixture
Options
5 See page 8 for details.
6 Fixture not rated for use as a raceway. TR
Tamper
Resistant
Driver DE14
Lutron 1%
EcoSystem
4 DIM See page 7 for details. 4
0-10V 1%
(Linear)

LED WARRANTY
5 YEAR ARRA
Compliant
347
347V
(consult factory)
EMR
Remote Micro
Inverter
(consult factory)
BL
Semi-Matte
Black
3 See page 2 for details.

SS5
Separate
Switching
NF
Suitable for
Natatorium
Environment
EFC (consult factory)
End Feed Left
(for conduit)
EFR
End Feed Right
(for conduit)
EFB6
End Feed Both
Ends (for conduit
daisy chain)
DED4
eldoLED 1%
ECOdrive DALI-2
(Logarithmic)
DIL4
eldoLED 1%
ECOdrive 0-10V
(Logarithmic)
*Values calculated from a 4’
fixture at 4000K, 90+ CRI using
LI shielding and DIM driver. For
additional information please see
page 2.
1C35
888lm/9.3W
per foot
1C30
758lm/7.8W
per foot
1C25
680lm/6.9W
per foot
1C20
513lm/5.1W
per foot
1C45
1116lm/11.9W
per foot
1C40
1009lm/10.6W
per foot
2C35
1610lm/18.3W
per foot
2C30
1376lm/15.3W
per foot
2C25
1233lm/13.5W
per foot
2C20
930lm/10.1W
per foot
2C45
2025lm/23.5W
per foot
2C40
1830lm/20.9W
per foot
BUY

AMERICAN
CEM7,8,9,10
Cold-Weather
Integral EM
Battery Pack
CS
Custom
Switching
(consult factory)
DC3
Lutron 1%
3-Wire
(consult factory)
LI2
Clear Glass
with LED
Optimized
Inlay
1 IK10 Rated.
2 IK08 Rated. MI2 Clear Lens
with
Microprismatic
Inlay
PC1
Prismatic
Lens
SD1
Satine Lens
CNB2 ClearLens
LMO
Symmetric
CA22 Clear Lens
LMO
Asymmetric
20º Wall
Washer
CA52 Clear Lens
LMO
Asymmetric
5º Wall
Grazer CBW2 Clear Lens
LMO
Batwing
DNB1
Diffuse Lens
LMO
Symmetric
DA21
Diffuse Lens
LMO
Asymmetric
20º Wall
Washer
DA51
Diffuse Lens
LMO
Asymmetric
5º Wall
Grazer
DBW1
Diffuse Lens
LMO
Batwing
930
3000K
90+ CRI
935
3500K
90+ CRI
940
4000K
90+ CRI
927
2700K
90+ CRI
830
3000K
80+ CRI
827
2700K
80+ CRI
835
3500K
80+ CRI
840
4000K
80+ CRI
Series L125
For Concrete Pour Only
L125R1
L125 Recessed Flanged
L125R2
Recessed Flanged with
Flush Endcaps
SH
Suspension
Bracket
TS
1” Studs
(factory
installed)
RC
Rotating
Crossbar
PM
Perimeter
Mount
* For mixed mountings consult factory.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1553
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 3 of 20 ends

Page 2 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
LED Recessed
Construction:

Housing - Continuous, 6063-T6 extruded
aluminum profile up to 4 feet long. Die cast
aluminum endcaps made from low copper,
marine-grade aluminum alloy.

Geartray - Formed aluminum.

Shielding - Choice of tempered Clear Glass with
LED Optimized Inlay or Microprismatic Inlay;
4mm Satine or Clear Polycarbonate Prismatic
lenses available. See page 1 for IK Rating
per lens.
“LMO” refers to the Selux proprietary LED optical
system - Light modulation optics. These lenses
are offered in M125 behind a Clear (C) or Diffuse
(D) Lens for even illumination and comfortable
lit appearance.
-”LMO” Symmetric (NB)
-“LMO” Asymmetric 20° Wall Washer (A2)
-“LMO” Asymmetric 5° Wall Grazer (A5)
-“LMO” Batwing (BW)
Gasket: One-piece silicone gasket fully seals
(IP65) for weather-proofing, dust, and insect
control.

Fixture Door – Secure, completely sealed at all
points of entry from water, insects, and dust.

Two captive stainless steel screws allow access
to LED light engine. Door remains captive when
servicing with corrosion protected steel safety
cable on both ends.

Mounting(s) - Suspension Bracket (SH), 1” Studs
– factory installed (TS), Rotating Crossbar (RC),
Perimeter Mount (PM), Metal Concrete Pour
(MTB). Not to be used as Vertical Wall Mount.
- Suspension Bracket (SH): Bolted onto fixture
located nominally every 4’ (support wires or rod
supplied and installed by others).
- Ø1/4” Threaded Rod (TS): ¼”-20 stud only. Couplers and Rod by others. - Rotating Crossbar (RC): For inaccessible ceilings, adjustable for ceiling thicknesses from ¼” to 2”. Supplied, 2 per fixture.

Runs – 2x 3/8” IP nipple connector for water-tight
connection between luminaires in a Run. Two
connections are required per connection.

Weight – 5 lb. per foot.

Electrical/Performance:

LED Light Engine - Brand-name mid-power
LEDs create a high efficiency LED light engine
able to provide a lumen maintenance of 96% at
25,000 hours and 93% at 60,000 hours for 1C
and 2C light engines at 25ºC per TM-21 reports.

Reported L70 greater than 60,000 hours.

Photometrics - Consult website or factory
for IES Files. Independent photometric lumen
measurement complies with IES LM-79-08 testing procedures. Due to the LED manufacturer’s tolerances, the listed output has a ±5% tolerance. For outputs based on different optics or CCT, please see pages 9-10 for details.

CCT - Available in 2700K, 3000K, 3500K, and
4000K, tolerance within a 3-step MacAdam
ellipse.

CRI - 80+CRI, 90+ CRI.

All Drivers - High efficiency, constant current,
soft start, Electronic Class 2 with a PFC>0.90.

For more detailed information on the available
drivers, please see page 7.

Thermal Performance:

Ambient Operating Temperature - Luminaires
suitable for maximum ambient temperature
of 25°C (77°F) for DE1 at 1C40 and 1C45 light
engines; 35°C (95°F) for all others.

Luminaires are suitable for minimum ambient
temperatures of -40ºC (-40ºF) for DIM, DIL,
and DED, D01, and DL01 drivers; 0ºC (32ºF) for
DE1 drivers.

Luminaire Finish:

Powder Coat - All Selux luminaires are finished
in high quality polyester powder coating in our
Tiger Drylac certified facility and are tested in
accordance with test specifications for coatings
from ASTM and PCI.

All products undergo a five stage intensive
pretreatment process where product is thoroughly cleaned, phosphate, and sealed. Selux powder coated products provide excellent salt
and humidity resistance as well as ultra violet
resistance for color retention.

Standard interior colors are White (WH), Black
(BK), Semi-Matte Black (BL), and Silver (SV).

Selux premium colors (SP) are available, please
specify from your Selux color selection guide.

Warranty:
5 Year Limited LED Luminaire Warranty -
Selux offers a 5 Year Limited Warranty to the
original purchaser that the M125 LED luminaire
shall be free from defects in material and
workmanship for up to five (5) years from date
of shipment. This limited warranty covers the
LED driver and LED light engine when installed
according to Selux instructions and operated
within the Ambient Temperature. For additional
details and exclusions, see “Selux Terms and
Condition of Sale.”
Certifications and Compliance:

NRTL – For Dry and Wet Locations
(i.e. cULus; cCSAus)
ARRA Compliant
RoHS Compliant
IP65 Rated
IK10 Rated (see page 1 for details)
IK08 Rated (see page 1 for details)
L125R1-1Cxx-xx-TS-xxx-xx-xx
3 1/2”
(90mm)
4 15/16”
(125mm)
5 7
/8”
(149mm)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1554
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 4 of 20 ends

Page 3 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
LED Recessed
L125 FIXTURE LENGTH
ANGLE

CONCRETE HOUSING
Concrete Pour Mounting Details
Mounting hardware and outlet box by others. 3’ fixture shown as reference.

METAL BOX CONCRETE POUR (MTB) MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
1Cxx or 2Cxx
“A” Metal Box
O.A.L. “B” Flange Length “C” Fixture
2 Foot Individual 3’ (915mm) 2’-9” (838mm) 2’ - 2 13/16” (680mm) 3 Foot Individual 4’ (1219mm) 3’-9” (1143mm) 3’ - 2 13/16” (985mm) 4 Foot Individual 5’ (1524mm) 4’-9” (1448mm) 4’ - 2 13/16” (1290mm) Side
View
Bottom
View
1 1/2"
(38mm)
L125 Fixture Length
Removable Cover Plate
(for wiring access)
L125 - Concrete Pour Metal Box Detail
1 1/4”
(32mm)
1”
(25mm)
1 1/2”
(38mm)
(angle)
(2x) Ø 1 1/16” (Ø27mm)
Conduit Entry Holes
(conduit by others)
1 1/4”
(32mm)
1”
(25mm)
3 11/16”
(93mm)
5 1/4”
(133mm)
Concrete Housing
Angle
Feed
(see crossection)
1 1/2"
(38mm)
L125-xxxx-xx-xx-MTB-003-xx-xx L125 - Metal Box
Concrete Pour (MTB)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1555
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 5 of 20 ends

Page 4 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
LED Recessed
Suspension Brackets (SH) and Threaded Stud (TS) Mounts
5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
Top
View
Side
View
Bottom
View
5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
Top
View
Bottom
View
Suspension
Fixture housing
Side
View
Suspension Bracket (SH) and Threaded Stud (TS) Mounting Dimensions 1Cxx or 2Cxx
“A” O.A.L. w/ Flange (L125R1 Only) “B” Housing Length “C” Suspension 2’ Individual 2’ - 3 3/4” (705mm) 2’ - 2 13/16” (680mm) 1’ - 3 5/8” (396mm) 3’ Individual 3’ - 3 3/4” (1009mm) 3’- 2 13/16” (985mm) 2’ - 3 5/8” (701mm) 4’ Individual 4’ - 3 3/4” (1314mm) 4’ - 2 13/16” (1290mm) 2’ - 3 5/8” (1006mm) L125R1 - Suspension Bracket (SH) Mount
L125R2 1/4”-20 Threaded Rod (TS) Mount
11/16” Feed
L125R1-xxxx-xx-xx-SH-004-xx-xx
L125R2-xxxx-xx-xx-TS-004-xx-xx
Suspension
Including Flange
Fixture housing
11/16” Feed

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1556
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 6 of 20 ends

Page 5 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
LED Recessed

FIXTURE HOUSING

INCLUDING FLANGE
SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION
4 FOOT 4 FOOT 4 FOOT

FIXTURE HOUSING

INCLUDING FLANGE
SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION
4 FOOT 4 FOOT

FIXTURE HOUSING

INCLUDING FLANGE
SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION
3 FOOT 4 FOOT 3 FOOT

FIXTURE HOUSING

INCLUDING FLANGE
SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION
3 FOOT 3 FOOT 3 FOOT

FIXTURE HOUSING

INCLUDING FLANGE
SUSPENSION 11 1/4" SUSPENSION
3 FOOT 3 FOOT
Recessed Linear Run Mounting Details
Nipple Connectors (NC) provide waterproof wiring between fixtures, connected in the field. Mounting hardware by others.

For custom configurations and lengths please consult factory.

L125R1-xxxx-xx-xx-TS-012-xx-xx
Including Flange
Fixture housing
11/16” Feed
Including Flange
Fixture housing
Suspension Suspension 5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
Suspension Suspension 5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
Including Flange
Fixture housing
11/16” Feed
Suspension Suspension 5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
Including Flange
Fixture housing
11/16” Feed
Suspension Suspension 5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
Including Flange
Fixture housing
11/16” Feed
Suspension Suspension 5 9/16"
(142mm)
5 9/16"
(142mm)
11/16” Feed
Suspension
Suspension
Suspension
Bottom
View
Side
View
Bottom
View
Side
View
Bottom
View
Side
View
Bottom
View
Side
View
Bottom
View
Side
View
L125R1-2Bxx-xx-SH-xxx-xx-xx L125R1-1Bxx-xx-RC-xxx-xx-xx L125R1-1Bxx-xx-PM-xxx-xx-xx
Suspension Bracket (SH) and Threaded Stud (TS) Perimeter Mount (PM) and Rotating Crossbar (RC) Mounting Dimensions 1Cxx or 2Cxx
“A” O.A.L. w/ Flange (L125R1 Only) “B” Housing Length “C” Suspension “D” Suspension 6’ Run 6’ -6 9/16” (1996mm) 6’ -5 5/8” (1972mm) 2’ - 3 5/8” (701mm) N/A 8’ Run 8’ - 6 9/16” (2606mm) 8’ - 5 5/8” (2582mm) N/A 3’ - 3 5/8” (1006mm) 9’ Run 9’ - 9 7/16” (2982mm) 9’ - 8 7/16” (2958mm) 2’ - 3 5/8” (701mm) N/A 10’ Run 10’ - 9 7/16” (3287mm) 10’ - 8 1/2” (3263mm) 2’ - 3 5/8” (701mm) 3’ - 3 5/8” (1006mm) 12’ Run 12’ - 9 7/16” (3897mm) 12’ - 8 1/2” (3873mm) N/A 3’ - 3 5/8” (1006mm) L125R1-xxxx-xx-xx-TS-006-xx-xx
L125R1-xxxx-xx-xx-TS-008-xx-xx
L125R1-xxxx-xx-xx-TS-009-xx-xx
L125R1-xxxx-xx-xx-TS-010-xx-xx

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1557
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 7 of 20 ends

Page 6 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
LED Recessed
Mounting Details
Nipple Connectors
Water-tight Nipple Connectors supplied for all run configurations. (2x) Rubber washer
(Each end cap)
(2x) Square Hex Nut
(Each end cap)
(2x) Rubber washer
(Each end cap)
Water-tight Silicone Gasket
1/16" (2mm) thick
(2x) Nipple Connector
(2x) Square Hex Nut
(Each end cap)
1/16"
(2mm)
Side View
Bottom View

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1558
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 8 of 20 ends

Page 7 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
Wiring Diagrams
Drivers:

LED Recessed
Driver Quantity
Light Engine 2 ft. 3 ft. 4 ft. RUN
1Cxx DIM, DIL, and DED drivers 1 1 1 Approximately 1 driver per 4 ft.

DE1 drivers 1 1 1 Consult Factory
2Cxx DIM, DIL, and DED drivers 2 2 2 Approximately 2 drivers per 4 ft.

DE1 drivers 2 2 2 Consult Factory
*For inrush and control current, please refer to the driver manufacturers’ spec sheets. 0-10V linear dimming (DIM)
Luminaires supplied with drivers offering the capability of either normal switched operation or 0-10V dimming for linear dimming curve. Fixtures ship wired for dimming. For on/off functionality, simply cap the dimming leads. Minimum dimming level preset at factory to 1%.
0-10V logarithmic dimming (DIL)
Luminaires supplied with drivers for logarithmic dimming curve. Minimum dimming level preset at factory to 1%. For “dim to dark” (down to 0.1%), please consult factory.
eldoLED ECOdrive DALI-2 dimming (DED)
Luminaires supplied with ECOdrive DALI-2 dimming driver for logarithmic dimming curve. Minimum dimming level preset at factory to 1%. For “dim to dark” (down to 0.1%), please consult factory.

LUTRON Ecosystem dimming (DE1)
Luminaires supplied with Hi-Lume EcoSystem (4 wire, digital link) dimming driver programmed for Constant Current Reduction (CCR).

Minimum dimming level down to 1% withi SoftOn/FadeToBlack. * For control recommendation, please contact driver manufacturer. - The following wire(s) are in addition to the standard above - DE1
0-10V linear (DIM)
0-10V logarithmic eldoLED ECOdrive (DIL)
DALI-2 logarithmic eldoLED ECOdrive (DED)
0-10V linear eldoLED SOLOdrive (D01)
0-10V logarithmic eldoLED SOLOdrive (DL01)
DIM, DIL, DED, D01, DL01
Standard Wiring
supplied for all drivers
Green = Ground
White = Neutral (120V/277V/347V) or L2 (240V)
Black = Hot /L1 (120V-347V)
Pink = (-) DALI-2 or 0-10V Dimming Control
Purple = (+) DALI-2 or 0-10V Dimming Control
Violet = “E1” Digital Link Dimming Control
Violet/White = “E2” Digital Link Dimming Control
Driver Feed
Green
White
Black
Pink (-)
Purple(+)
Lutron EcoSystem (DE1)
Driver
Green
White
Black
Violet
Violet /White
Feed

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1559
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 9 of 20 ends

Page 8 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us M125
LED Recessed
Fuse (FS) - Fusing, luminaires supplied with a in-line fuse located on the hot wire for each feed. (supplied with an 8A slow burn fuse).

Separate Switching (SS) - Luminaires available with separately switched 4’ (nominal) sections starting at 7’ and up. Luminaire is intended to be wired to the same panel/breaker (not intended for Emergency use).
* All separately switched (non-EM) circuits within an individual luminaire, linear run, or configuration must be connected to the same branch circuit on-site.
* To specify this option, the number of separately switched sections and locations of these sections must be provided at time of order. * For Separate Switching with external sensors (by others), please consult factory.

Cold Weather Emergency Battery (CEM) - Luminaries with integral cold-weather emergency battery option are provided with factory installed emergency battery and test switch button located on plate separate from fixture. For Runs, please indicate which 4’ section is intended for emergency use, test switch will always be located on a separate plate requires feed location.

In the event of an emergency, CEM will illuminate a 4’ fixture at 10W (constant) for 90 minutes at -200C. Recharge time of 24 hours. Available with DIM driver only, for use with UNV.

If a different configuration is needed, please consult factory.

Emergency Circuit (EC) - EC luminaires are intended to be wired to separate panels/breakers for emergency use.

For 2’ to 6’ nominal luminaires, the entire fixture is wired for operation on emergency circuit.

For 7’ and up nominal luminaires, the first 4’ nominal length is wired for operation by a separate EM circuit by default to meet the required “Life Safety Code” (NFPA 101).
*If a different configuration is needed please consult the factory. *For EC with external sensors (by others), please consult factory.

Custom Switching (CS) - For project-specific switching requirements, please consult factory.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1560
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 10 of 20 ends

Page 9 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us Photometry
M125
LED Recessed
Below photometric values are based on 4’ fixtures at 4000K, using DIM driver. For other light engines or CCTs, please use multipliers.

Complete Photometrics can be found online.

LI - Clear Lens with Optimized LED Inlay
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3552 888 9.3 95
2C35 6440 1610 18.3 88
MI - Clear Lens with Microprism Inlay
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3444 861 9.3 93
2C35 6244 1561 18.3 85
PC - Prismatic Lens
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3704 926 9.3 100
2C35 6716 1679 18.3 92
SD - Satine Lens
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3672 918 9.3 99
2C35 6656 1664 18.3 91
CNB - Clear Lens SMO Symmetric
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3472 868 9.3 93
2C35 6292 1573 18.3 86
CA2 - Clear Lens LMO Asymmetric 200 Wall Washer
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3408 852 9.3 92
2C35 6184 1546 18.3 84
CA5 - Clear Lens LMO Asymmetric 50 Wall Grazer
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3460 865 9.3 93
2C35 6272 1568 18.3 86
CBW - Clear Lens LMO Batwing
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3292 823 9.3 88
2C35 5972 1493 18.3 82

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1561
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 11 of 20 ends

Page 10 of 10 ends

Selux Corporation © 2025, T 845-834-1400, 800-735-8927, F 845-834-1401, www.selux.us Photometry
M125
LED Recessed
DA2 - Diffuse Lens LMO Asymmetric 200 Wall Grazer
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3072 768 9.3 83
2C35 5572 1393 18.3 76
DA5 - Diffuse Lens LMO Asymmetric 50 Wall Grazer
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3076 769 9.3 83
2C35 5580 1395 18.3 76
DBW - Diffuse Lens LMO Batwing
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 2960 740 9.3 80
2C35 5372 1343 18.3 73
CCT multiplier applies to the photometry,
IES files, and per foot values listed on
pages 1, 9, and 10 (light engine).

Light engine multiplier supplied for per foot values
listed on pages 1, 9, and 10 (light engine).

DNB - Diffuse Lens LMO Symmetric
Light Engine Lumens per 4 foot Lumens per foot Input watts per foot lm/W 1C35 3292 823 9.3 88
2C35 5972 1493 18.3 82
L125 CCT Multiplier
4000K 1.000
3500K 0.972
3000K 0.963
2700K 0.931
L125 Light Engine Muliplier
1B35 to
1C45 1.304
1C40 1.167
1C35 1.000
1C30 0.877
1C25 0.730
1C20 0.587
2C35 to
2C45 1.275
2C40 1.152
2C35 1.000
2C30 0.876
2C25 0.743
2C20 0.597

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1562
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 12 of 20 ends

ORDERING EXAMPLE: 76R - 4 - L52/840 - OPTIONS - CONTROL/DIM - UNV SERIES LENGTH [1] LUMENS [2] CRI CCT OPTIONS [3]
76R 4 4′
8 8 [4]
4′
L30 3,000lm
L52 5,200lm
L72 7,200lm
L94 9,400lm [5]
8′
L60 6,000lm
L104 10,400lm
L144 14,400lm
L188 18,800lm [6]
8 80
9 90
27 2700K
30 3000K
35 3500K
40 4000K
50 5000K
See page 3 for SPECIAL REFLECTOR OPTIONS. See page 3 for FINISH OPTIONS.

EM/10W 10-watt emergency battery [7]
(L__) Additional lower lumen packages available [8]
Example: 8,000 nominal lumens =
76R-8-L104/835-(L80)
HA High ambient operating temperature, 50°C [9]
WG-76R11 11-gauge white powder coat wireguard
WG-76R14 14-gauge white powder coat wireguard
SS-12 Single stem and canopy, 12″ [10]
SWS-12 Swivel stem and canopy, 12″ [11]
GAT GAT fastener (T-bar clip)
VBY (2) Y-hangers
VBY-2 (2) Y-hangers with 2′ chains
SMH-76R Surface mount hanger
SHS-76R Surface mount hanger for grid ceilings
QC__ Quick-connect wiring harness [12]
GEN Approved for UL 924 emergency generator
circuit through-feed wiring [13]
AIRCRAFT CABLES (EXAMPLE: ACFL/D48) [14]
Prefix Type Length
ACFL/ Feeder
ACJL/ Joiner
D 1″ grid & hardpan
N 9/16″ grid
S Slot grid
24 24″
48 48″
96 96″
CONTROL [15] DRIVER VOLTAGE
See page 5 for ADDITIONAL CONTROL OPTIONS.
– None
AVI-LVFA Avi-on wireless fixture control [16]
AVI-LVFA-PIR-ELB Avi-on wireless fixture control with PIR motion and daylight sensor, end mount[17]
AWNR Lutron Athena wireless node integral
fixture control, RF only [18]
See page 6 for ADDITIONAL
DRIVER OPTIONS.

DIM Driver with external 0-10V
dimming wires
DRV Driver without external
dimming wires
DA Driver with 12V auxiliary
power, without external
dimming wires [19]
DSR Sensor-ready driver without
external dimming wires
(D4i DALI-2) [20]
120 120V
277 277V
UNV 120-277V
480 480V with stepdown
transformer [21]

FEATURES
■ Diffuse acrylic lens enhances uniformity
and minimizes glare ■ 40ºC max ambient operating temperature ■ Diverse selection of mounting accessories for surface and suspended applications ■ Channel connector furnished for continuous row applications (included
with 8′ units only) ■ Special reflectors are available for precise light distribution ■ Optional wireguard provides added
protection ■ Wireless in-fixture control solutions
available ■ Made Right Here® in the USA

SPECIFICATIONS
■ HOUSING – 22-gauge die-formed C.R.S. ■ FINISH – 92% minimum average reflective white polyester powder coat bonded to
phosphate-free, multi-stage pretreated
metal. All parts painted after fabrication to
facilitate installation, increase efficiency,
and inhibit corrosion. ■ SHIELDING – Linear ribbed diffuse acrylic ■ ELECTRICAL – High-quality mid-power LED boards. L70 at 60,000 hours.
40°C maximum ambient operating
temperature. 50°C maximum ambient
operating temperature with HA Option,
lumen restrictions apply. 50/60 Hz
constant current driver. ■ MOUNTING – Surface (ceiling or wall) or suspended (hanging hardware required). ■ LISTINGS – ■ cETLus conforms to UL STD 1598. Certified to CAN/CSA STD C22.2 No. 250.0.

Suitable for damp locations.
■ UL 924 available, see Options.
■ DesignLights Consortium qualified
product. Not all versions of this product
may be DLC qualified, see the DLC
Qualified Products List at
designlights.org/QPL
■ Build America, Buy America (BABA)
and Buy American Act (BAA) compliant.

Request certification at
hew.com/buy-american
■ WARRANTY – 5-year limited warranty, see
hew.com/warranty
NOTES
1 For actual length, see page 2 for FIXTURE DETAILS. 2 Lumen output based on 80 CRI/4000K CCT. Actual performance may vary +/-5%, see page 2 for FIXTURE PERFORMANCE
DATA. 3 See page 3 for MOUNTING DETAILS. 4 Ships with (2) 4′ lenses. 5 30°C maximum ambient operating temperature. 6 30°C maximum ambient operating temperature. 7 30° maximum ambient operating temperature. 8 Specify in increments of 100 nominal lumens. Option must be specified with next higher lumen package. 9 L72 max for 4′, L144 max for 8′. Not available with EM batteries. 10 Two stem sets required. One additional stem set required for each row mounted fixture.
11 Two stem sets required. One additional stem set required for each row mounted fixture. 12 See page 2 for QUICK-CONNECT OPTIONS. 13 Maximum mounting height is 26.2′ (8.0 m). Minimum lumen output is 400 lm/ft. See hew.com/UL924 for details. 1 4 VBY hanger(s) included. Units specified with aircraft cable require cord. See page 3 for MOUNTING DETAILS. 15 See page 3 for SENSOR & NODE PLACEMENT DETAILS.

See page 4 for AVI-ON BLUETOOTH WIRELESS CONTROL
DETAILS. 1 6 DA Driver only. 17 DA Driver only. 18 DA and DSR Drivers only. 19 Avi-on and Lutron Athena Controls only. 2 0 Lutron Vive and Athena Controls only. 21 Not available with EM batteries, DA, or DSR driver.

CATALOG #: �� TYPE: �� 4-3/4″ PROJECT: �� 3-13/16″
H.E. Williams, Inc. Carthage, Missouri www.hew.com 417-358-4065 Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Strips
REV.03/03/25.JL Page 1 of 6
76R LED Round Lens Strip

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1563
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 13 of 20 ends

FIXTURE PERFORMANCE DATA
LED PACKAGE DELIVERED LUMENS WATTAGE EFFICACY (lm/W)
4′
L30 3067 20.3 151
L52 5261 35.8 147
L72 7212 50.2 144
L94 9418 68.6 137
8′
L60 6134 39.8 154
L104 10523 69.5 151
L144 14425 100.5 144
L188 18836 137.1 137
■ Photometrics tested in accordance with IESNA LM-79. Results based on 80 CRI/4000K CCT, average wattage for 120V through 277V input, and 25°C ambient temperature. Actual performance may vary +/-5% ■ To calculate lumen output in emergency mode, multiply the battery wattage by the efficacy. ■ Use multiplier table to calculate additional options.

MULTIPLIER TABLE

COLOR TEMPERATURE

CCT CONVERSION FACTOR
80 CRI
2700K 0.94
3000K 0.96
3500K 0.97
4000K 1.00
5000K 1.03
90 CRI
2700K 0.77
3000K 0.79
3500K 0.80
4000K 0.83
5000K 0.86

PHOTOMETRY
76R-4-L94/840 Total Luminaire Output: 9418 lumens; 68.6 Watts | Efficacy: 137.3 lm/W | 80 CRI; 4000K CCT 0° 90°
100°
120°
180° 160° 140°
0° 20° 40°
60°
80°
90°
CANDLEPOWER DISTRIBUTION VERTICAL ANGLE HORIZONTAL ANGLE ZONAL LUMENS 0º 45º 90º 0 3041 3041 3041
5 3067 3019 3010 288
15 2910 2905 2926 821
25 2599 2674 2746 1231
35 2171 2340 2469 1458
45 1676 1928 2113 1478
55 1177 1490 1706 1311
65 715 1046 1284 1023
75 358 701 908 711
85 71 445 633 446
90 0 347 516
95 0 274 442 273
105 0 166 305 168
115 0 105 210 102
125 0 65 141 58
135 0 41 90 31
145 0 8 50 13
155 0 0 37 6
165 0 0 12 1
175 0 0 0 0
180 0 0 0

LUMEN SUMMARY
ZONE LUMENS % FIXTURE
0 - 30 2339 25
0 - 40 3798 40
0 - 60 6586 70
0 - 90 8766 93
90 - 120 543 6
90 - 150 645 7
90 - 180 652 7
0 - 180 9418 100

FIXTURE DETAILS

BACKVIEW
ø2″ KO (4) ø7/8″ KOs
3-1/4″
1-1/8″
5″
48″ or 96″
1-5/8″
1-1/4″
(4) ø1/4″ KOs
2″
4-1/4″

QUICK-CONNECT OPTIONS
Note: Quick-connect wiring required for row mounting. All QC harnesses contain (5) 16ga conductors plus ground.

DESIGNATION NUMBER OF 16GA WIRES FACTORY

CONNECTED (EXCLUDING GROUND) WIRE COLOR/POWER SUPPLY FACTORY CONNECTIONS TYPICAL USE QCBW 2 Black, White On/off switching (DRV) or line voltage dimming (DIM LINE) QCRW 2 Red, White Alternating circuits on/off switching (DRV) or line voltage dimming (DIM LINE) QCBRW 3 Black, Red, White On/off switching (DRV) or line voltage dimming when equipped with EM battery packs QCBW/PK 4 Black, White, Purple, Pink Single circuit with 0-10V low voltage dimming (DIM) QCRW/PK 4 Red, White, Purple, Pink Alternating circuits on/off switching with 0-10V low voltage dimming (DIM) QCBRW/PK 5 Black, Red, White, Purple, Pink On/off switching when equipped with EM battery packs and 0-10V dimming (DIM) QCBW/RPK 5 Black, White, Red, Purple, Pink On/off switching with 0-10v dimming and 0-10v tunable using shared common QCUU N/A N/A QC harness passes through fi xture, but is not connected to it H.E. Williams, Inc. Carthage, Missouri www.hew.com 417-358-4065 Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Strips
REV.03/03/25.JL Page 2 of 6
76R LED Round Lens Strip

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1564
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 14 of 20 ends

MOUNTING DETAILS
STANDARD HARDWARE FOR SUSPENDED PRODUCT (Grid and Hardpan) CORD FOR SUSPENDED PRODUCT Feeder/Stand-Alone Joiner
Notes:
■ Fixtures are provided with adjustable
length aircraft cables, (2) VBY hangers
and mounting hardware, must specify.
■ Electrical supply is brought into the
feeder fi xture, either as part of a row
or as a stand-alone unit. Joiner fi xtures
complete the row.
■ The feeder kits are standard with a 5″
canopy to cover the junction box and
a 2″ canopy at the non-feed point. No
J-box is required at non-feed points.

Units specified with aircraft cable require cord. Please specify cord type using ordering information below. Long fixture rows may require multiple feed points based on 18ga conductor size.

EXAMPLE: S2438D/W
CORD TYPE LENGTH # OF COND. [1] WIRE SIZE COLOR
S 24 24″48 48″
96 96″
3 4
5 6
8D 18ga /W White
/B Black
1 Includes (2) 22ga purple & pink dimming conductors
SS-12 SWS-12 GAT VBY OR VBY 2 SMH-76R SHS-76
Up to 45°
swivel
3-1/4″ 2-1/4″

SPECIAL REFLECTOR OPTIONS
R1015 R1172 R1240 R1324 R1684
Clear polycarbonate reflector aligners for
continuous row applications are supplied
with reflectors.

Only R1172 and R1240 can be used with
wireguard accessories.

FINISH OPTIONS
WHITE BLACK BRONZE NICKEL SILVER ALUM For custom color, please specify RAL code or a manufacturer code
with description. All custom colors
other than RAL require two sample
swatches, minimum 1″ square.

SENSOR & NODE PLACEMENT DETAILS
SEE NEXT PAGE FOR CONTROL DETAILS.

H.E. Williams, Inc. Carthage, Missouri www.hew.com 417-358-4065 Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Strips
REV.03/03/25.JL Page 3 of 6
76R LED Round Lens Strip

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1565
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 15 of 20 ends

AVI-ON BLUETOOTH WIRELESS CONTROL DETAILS

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Remote Access Bridge
Wall Stations
Mobile Apps
Remote Management
& Monitoring
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Avi-on is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Ceiling Sensors

FEATURES
Simple
■ Gateway-free distributed control ■ Contractor friendly installation ■ Occupancy/vacancy/daylight sensing Scalable
■ Virtually unlimited network size ■ Spans small areas to large garages ■ Flexible control strategies Secure
■ Optional cloud connectivity ■ UL IoT platinum security rating ■ DLC 5.0 compliant

COMMISSIONING & INSTALLATION TOOLS
Avi-on mobile apps provide intuitive, quick installation and commissioning. Pro tools are available to qualified installers.

Live commissioning training and on-site or remote support by Avi-on must be ordered separately through Avi-on.

Commissioning
Mobile App Zone Scanner Web App
Commissioning
Pro App

ACCESSORIES

WALL STATIONS NETWORK
AVI-B-2401AC-1 Scene controller - buttons numbered 1-4 and up/down/off, 120-277VAC AVI-B-2402BAT-1 Scene controller - buttons numbered 1-4 and up/down/off, battery powered AVI-B-2401AC-2 Dimmer with presets - buttons with percentages and up/down/off, 120-277VAC AVI-B-2402BAT-2 Dimmer with presets - buttons with percentages and up/down/off, battery powered AVI-B-2401AC-3 Two button control on/off or hold to dim up/down, 120-277VAC AVI-B-2402BAT-3 Two button control on/off or hold to dim up/down, battery powered AVI-RAB-LTE Remote access bridge
AVI-NTM Network time manager with battery backup

CEILING MOUNT SENSORS
AVI-KIT-SEN-DUCM PIR motion and ultrasonic sensor kit
AVI-KIT-SEN-ICM PIR motion and photocell sensor kit
For load controllers and additional accessory info, see hew.com/avi-on AVI-LVFA-PIR-ELB Avi-on wireless fixture control with PIR motion and daylight sensor, end mount. DA Driver only.

SPECIFICATIONS SENSOR COVERAGE PATTERNS SENSOR DETAIL
TYPE PIR Motion + Daylight Large motion
40′ height: ø68′ coverage
5′ 0′ 5′
40′
30′
35′ 30′ 25′ 25′ 30′ 35′
0′
20′
10′
20′ 15′ 10′ 10′ 15′ 20′
0′
40′
30′
40′
30′
20′
10′
20′
10′
68′
Small motion
15′ height: ø28′ coverage
15′ 10′ 5′ 0′ 5′ 10′ 15′
15′
0′
10′
5′
0′
15′
15′
10′
10′
5′
5′
28′
MOUNTING HEIGHT 8′ – 45′
LENS Single lens detects
high and low bay motion.

DETECTION ANGLE 360°

TEMPERATURE
RANGE -30° to 70°C
RELATIVE HUMIDITY 90 to 95% at 30°C
COMMISSIONING App (iOS or Android)
SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS Avi-On wireless fi xture controls plus desktop and mobile apps MANUFACTURER Avi-On
H.E. Williams, Inc. Carthage, Missouri www.hew.com 417-358-4065 Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Strips
REV.03/03/25.JL Page 4 of 6
76R LED Round Lens Strip

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1566
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 16 of 20 ends

ADDITIONAL CONTROL OPTIONS
VDO Lutron Vive integral fixture control, RF with daylight and occupancy sensor (DFCSJ-OEM-OCC). DSR or LDE Drivers only. LDE drivers require driver interface

SPECIFICATIONS SENSOR COVERAGE PATTERNS SENSOR DETAIL
TYPE PIR Motion + Daylight 9′ height: ø12′ coverage
3′ 0′ 3′ 6′
9′
0′
6′
Motion Sensor Coverage

CEILING

HEIGHT COVERAGE AREA (SQ FT)
8′ 114
9′ 144
10′ 178
12′ 256
Dimensions: 2-11/16″ x 1″
MOUNTING HEIGHT 8′ – 12′
DETECTION ANGLE 360°

TEMPERATURE
RANGE 0° to 55°C
RELATIVE HUMIDITY 0 to 90%, non-condensing
COMMISSIONING App (iOS or Android)
MANUFACTURER Lutron

VIVE CONTROL OPTIONS

CATALOG NUMBER DESCRIPTION
VRF Lutron Vive integral fi xture control, RF only (DFCSJ-OEM-RF), for use with sensor-ready driver VDO Lutron Vive integral fi xture control, RF with daylight and occupancy sensor (DFCSJ-OEM-OCC), for use with sensor-ready driver VRF/DBI Lutron Vive integral fi xture control, RF only (DFCSJ-OEM-RF) and digital link interface, for use with Lutron Hi-lume 1% EcoSystem dimming LED driver VDO/DBI Lutron Vive integral fi xture control, RF with daylight and occupancy sensor (DFCSJ-OEM-OCC) and digital link interface, for use with Lutron Hi-lume 1% EcoSystem dimming LED driver
OCCWS-FSP-311B-L_-120/277 Wattstopper PIR motion and daylight sensor, 120/277V. Must specify lens: L2, L3, or L7

SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE PIR Motion + Daylight
MOUNTING HEIGHT 8′ – 40′
DETECTION ANGLE 360°

TEMPERATURE
RANGE -40° to 75°C
COMMISSIONING App (iOS or Android)

SENSOR COVERAGE PATTERNS SENSOR DETAIL
L2 8′ height: ø48′ coverage
0′
8′
24′ 11′ 7′ 3′0′3′ 7′ 11′ 24′ 0′
20′
20′
10′
10′
20′ 10′ 0′ 10′ 20′
60′
L3 20′ height: ø40′ coverage
9′ 0′ 3′
10′
20′
0′
15′
5′
20′ 15′ 3′ 9′ 15′ 20′
0′
20′
20′
10′
10′
20′ 10′ 0′ 10′ 20′
40′
L7 40′ height: ø100′ coverage
27′
40′
15′
0′
50′ 30′ 10′ 0′ 10′ 30′ 50′
0′
50′
50′
25′
25′
50′ 25′ 0′ 25′ 50′
100′
OCCLV-OSFHU-ITW-120-347 Leviton PIR motion sensor, 120-347V.

SPECIFICATIONS SENSOR COVERAGE PATTERNS SENSOR DETAIL
TYPE PIR Motion High bay
40′ height: ø60′ coverage
0′
40′
30′
0′
27′
15′
20′ 10′ 10′ 20′ 30′
15′
30′
15′
30′
30′ 15′ 0′ 15′ 30′
0′ 60′
Low bay
25′ height: ø60′ coverage
0′
25′
0′
20′
8′
30′ 15′ 15′ 30′
15′
30′
15′
30′
30′ 15′ 0′ 15′ 30′
0′ 60′
MOUNTING HEIGHT 8′ – 40′
LENS Interchangeable high bay, low bay or
aisle mask
DETECTION ANGLE 360°

TEMPERATURE
RANGE -10° to 71°C
RELATIVE HUMIDITY 20% to 90% non-condensing
H.E. Williams, Inc. Carthage, Missouri www.hew.com 417-358-4065 Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Strips
REV.03/03/25.JL Page 5 of 6
76R LED Round Lens Strip

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1567
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 17 of 20 ends

OCCSS LSXR-10-120-277 Sensor Switch PIR motion sensor, 120-277V OCCSS LSXR-10-347/480 Sensor Switch PIR motion sensor, 347/480V

SPECIFICATIONS SENSOR COVERAGE PATTERNS SENSOR DETAIL
TYPE PIR Motion 9′ height: ø56′ coverage
28′ 0′
0′
21′ 7′ 7′ 21′
9′
14′ 14′ 28′
14′
14′
0′
28′
28′
56′
MOUNTING HEIGHT 7′ – 15′
DETECTION ANGLE 360°

TEMPERATURE
RANGE -10° to 60°C
RELATIVE HUMIDITY Up to 90% non-condensing

ADDITIONAL DRIVER OPTIONS
Note: Lumen restrictions apply, consult product builder at hew.com/product-builder

CATALOG NUMBER DESCRIPTION
DRV Driver without external dimming wires prewired for non-dimming applications DIM Driver with external dimming wires prewired for 0-10V low voltage applications DIM1 1% driver with external dimming wires prewired for 0-10V low voltage applications DIM LINE Line voltage dimming driver (TRIAC and ELV compatible, 120V only) DIM TRC Line voltage dimming driver (TRIAC compatible, 120V only) DA Driver with 12V auxiliary power, without external dimming wires DSR Sensor-ready driver without external dimming wires (D4i DALI-2) SD40 40% step-dimming driver
SD50 50% step-dimming driver
DALI DALI dimming driver
LDE1 Lutron Hi-lume 1% EcoSystem dimming driver
H.E. Williams, Inc. Carthage, Missouri www.hew.com 417-358-4065 Designed and Manufactured in the USA Information contained herein is subject to change without notice.

Strips
REV.03/03/25.JL Page 6 of 6
76R LED Round Lens Strip

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1568
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 18 of 20 ends

ZXL16-WM2/ZXL16i-WM2
LED Wall Mount . ZX16 Series
Ordering Guide EXAMPLE: ZXL16-WM2 - NF - A - GSL - 12 - 10 - 27 - 20 - BK - LVR - CM5 ZXL16i-WM2 - F - B - GSL - UNV - 10 - 27 - 20 - BK - LVR - CM5 Project Name
Fixture Type
• Up/Down wall sconce with mounting canopy.
• ETL outdoor wet location listed. IP65 standard.
• Machined from solid billet 6061- T6 corrosion
resistant aluminum.
• Swivel stem insert allows for precision
adjustment during installation.
• Unique weep hole design in hood of the
up-light with minimum light leak.
• Modular components - field changeable LED
module & beam spread reflectors.
• Available in turtle friendly amber model.

Product Features
HK Lighting 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 TEL 805 480 4881 FAX 805 480 4811 [email protected] Product Drawings
Specification
Finish: Polyester powder coat on all aluminum materials with RoHS compliant procedures. Anodized finish is available. Stainless steel and brass models are provided with brushed surface.

Optical Accessories: Accepts up to 3 accessories (hexcel louver, optical lenses, dichroic color filters, etc.). Secured in place with metal snap ring.

Mounting Accessory: Utilizes 2x 8-32 UNC machine screws (provided) to attach to a standard octagon recessed back box (provided by others).

Light Source: CRI 83. Available in CRI95 upon request. The chromaticity range is within a 3-step McAdam Ellipse.

Standard CCT options are 2700K, 3000K, 4000K.

Lamp Base/Socket: Innovative cone-shaped lamp base and
receptacle socket maximize the surface contact area to
dissipate heat more effectively. See ‘‘Resources’’ for details.

Dimmability:
12V -- MLV or ELV depending on the transformer used.

Line voltage -- 0-10V dimming, phase dimming@120V.

Materials: Machined from billet 6061-T6 corrosion resistant aluminum with 304 stainless steel hardware. Available in 304/316 stainless steel or 360 brass upon request.

Hood and Glare Shield: 3 available hood options to suit any application. 3 optional glare shields (short, long, angled) to complement each hood choice. See page 3 for details.

Wattage: 5W x2, 7W x2, 10W x2 HK LED. 10W x2 Amber LED.

Voltage: 12V AC or line voltage. 12V model requires remote transformer. Line voltage models come with integral
transformer.

ZXL16i-WM2
IP65
NOTE: Specification and dimensions subject to change without notice.

ZXL16-WM2
5 5W x2
7 7W x2
10 10W x2
AMB10W(x2)
27 2700K
30 3000K
40 4000K
AMBER
LVR Hexcel Louver
OSL Overall Spread Lens
LSL Linear Spread Lens
SOL Solite Soft Focus
DF Dichroic Filter
GSL
GSA
GSS
CGSL
CGSA
CGSS

SERIES VOLTAGE WATTAGE CCT OPTICS FINISH OPTIC ACCESSORIES MOUNTING ACCESSORIES See page 3 for quick reference, or ‘‘Accessories’’ link for detailed specification.
20 20º
33 33º
44 44º
57 57º
Optional Optional, Select Up To 3 Optional
Standard
BK Black Powder Coat
BZ Bronze Powder Coat
WT White Powder Coat
Premium
ABK Anodized Black
ACL Anodized Clear
CC Custom Powder Coat
ZXL16-WM2
ZXL16i-WM2

GLARE SHIELD
12 12V
UNV
(120~277V)
FINS
F With Fins
NF No Fins
*Line Volatge

MATERIAL
BLANK Aluminum(Standard)
NBR Natural Brass
NSS Natural Stainless Steel
CU Natural Copper

A A-HOOD

B B-HOOD

C C-HOOD

HOOD DIMMING
PH Phase dimming
@120V only
010 0-10V dimming
@120~277V
2 X 8-32

COUNTERSUNK

CLEARANCE
HOLES

10.20"
(259mm)

2.75"

3.82" (70mm)
(97mm)
DIA 5.00"
(127mm)

2.25"
(57mm)

10.70"
(272mm)

2.75"
(70mm)

2.25"
(57mm)

4.00"
(102mm)
DIA. 5.00"
(57mm)
2 X 8-32

COUNTERSUNK

CLEARANCE
HOLES

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1569
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 19 of 20 ends

Photometry & Energy Data (Per Head)
HK Lighting 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 TEL 805 480 4881 FAX 805 480 4811 [email protected] ZXL16-WM2/ZXL16i-WM2
LED Wall Mount . ZX16 Series
MODEL ZXL16(i)-WM-10W-N
MODEL
MODEL
MODEL
Wattage Mutiplier Table CCT Multiplier Table
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 20.5°
Max. Candlepower 3507cd
Delivered Lumens 864lm
Efficacy 91lm/W
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 32.5°
Max. Candlepower 1842cd
Delivered Lumen 863lm
Efficacy 91lm/W
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 44.1°
Max. Candlepower 1332cd
Delivered Lumen 850lm
Efficacy 89lm/W
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 56.9°
Max. Candlepower 1019cd
Delivered Lumen 876lm
Efficacy 92lm/W
Wattage Multiplier
5Watt 0.53
7Watt 0.83
10Watt 1.00
AMBER 10W 0.73
Color Temp. Multiplier
2700K 0.97
3000K 1.00
4000K 1.05
ZXL16(i)-WM-10W-M
ZXL16(i)-WM-10W-W
ZXL16(i)-WM-10W-VW
Polar Graph - Intensity Cone of Light - Illuminance
Polar Graph - Intensity
Polar Graph - Intensity
Cone of Light - Illuminance
Cone of Light - Illuminance
Polar Graph - Intensity Cone of Light - Illuminance

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1570
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 20 of 20 ends

Product Options & Accessories
HK Lighting 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 TEL 805 480 4881 FAX 805 480 4811 [email protected] ZXL16-WM2/ZXL16i-WM2
LED Wall Mount . ZX16 Series
Hood Options
Mounting Accessories
Optional Glare Shield
Canopy Plate:

Surface Mount Box:

Tree Mount:

Fixture On CM5 CM2 CM1 CM3 CM5
Fixture On CB5.1 CB3.5 CB4.0 CB4.0-SQ CB5.1 CB5.5 CB5.5-K/O Flush hood with machined
threading on the outside for
attachment of C-style glare
shield, cleverly designed with
hidden drainage channnels.

C-HOOD
Similar to A hood but without
weep holes. Regressed lens
for glare control. Used in
an interior or down light
application.

B-HOOD
Versatile hood with 8 weep
holes for water drainage.

Regressed lens for glare
control. Suggested for general
use or when fixture is aimed
in an up position.

A-HOOD
For Use With A & B Hood
Fastened With Set Screw
For Use With C Hood
Fastened With Locking Ring
GSA
(angle)
GSL
(long)
GSS
(short)
CGSA
(angle)
CGSL
(long)
CGSS
(short)
Notes
Fixture On TS-SO-26 TS-SO

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1571
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

E1A

Page 21 of 20 ends

HK LIGHTING • 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 • TEL 805.480.4881 • [email protected] 1 • Versatile round low voltage, 12V LED Wall Mount light, perfect for modern architectural outdoor lighting environments.
• 5W, 7W, 10W integrated HK LED delivering 500 to 900 lumens. 2200-4000K CCT, including specialty Amber and RGB options.
• Wet Location Listed, IP65 Standard.
• Machined from solid aircraft grade (6061-T6), corrosion-resistant aluminum, then anodized and powder coated to create a highly durable, marine grade finish. Also available in solid brass or stainless steel.
• 360º rotation adjustment permits operation as an uplight or downlight. • Field changeable optical lensing available.
• Includes CM5 5" Round Canopy Plate. Long, Short, and Angled Glare Shields available. Additional surface and canopy mounting options also available. • Every fixture tested end of line for water tightness and light quality. • Readymade eligible configurations ship in 2 to 4 weeks, complete with selected accessories installed.

Materials
Machined from billet 6061-T6 corrosion
resistant aluminum with 304 stainless
steel hardware. Available in 304/316
stainless steel or 360 brass upon
request.

Finish
Aluminum materials are first anodized and
then powder coated for a robust, marine
grade finish. Stainless steel and brass
models are provided with brushed surface.

Hood and Glare Shield
Weeping and Non-weeping Hood Styles.

Set screw or threaded Angled, Short,
or Long Glare Shields. (See page 4
for details).

Voltage
12V AC/DC. Requires remote step down
transformer.

Wattage
5, 7 or 10W HK LED delivering 500 to
900 lumens.

Light Engine
Innovative HK LED Light module operates
like a lamp and can be easily changed
in the field. CRI 90 Standard. Available in
CRI 80 or CRI 95 upon request. Standard
CCT options are 2700K, 3000K, 3500K,
4000K. Specialty 2200K, 2400K, 2500K,
Amber, and RGB options available.

Consult factory for specialty LED
specification details.

Dimming
MLV or ELV Phase Control dimming.

Optics
Narrow (20º), Medium (33º), Wide (44º),
and Extra Wide (57º) beam spread
options available. Accepts up to 3 optical
accessories (hexcel louver, optical lenses,
dichroic color filters, etc.) Secured place
with metal snap ring.

Mounting
Includes CM5 Round Canopy Plate
and (2) 8-32 UNC machine screws for
finished mounting to standard 3O/3R
style Junction Boxes. (See page 4 for
more mounting options).

Listings
ETL Listed for Wet Location, IP65
Standard. RoHS Compliant.

Project Name
Fixture Type
ZWL16
(includes former ZXL16-WM model)
WALL MOUNT | ZW16 Series | 2.25"
5 - 10W ( 500 - 900lm ) | 12V | HK LED, RGB, Amber

FEATURES
Standard Low Voltage Wall Mount: ZWL16-0R1SB-ABL
FInned Low Voltage Wall Mount: ZWL16-0R1FB-ABR

SPECIFICATIONS

07.27.25 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1572
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

E1A

Page 22 of 20 ends

HK LIGHTING • 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 • TEL 805.480.4881 • [email protected] 2

ORDERING GUIDE
TRANSFORMERS (Go to Accessories for detailed specification) ORDERING GUIDE EXAMPLE: ZWL16-0R1SA-ABL-012V05W-27N-GSA-LVR-CM5-ABL ZWL16
Wall Mount • ZW16 Series
STYLE
S Standard
F Finned
ABL Aluminum Black
ABR Aluminum Bronze
AWH Aluminum White
AAC Aluminum
Anodized Clear1
NBR Natural Brass1
NCU Natural Copper1
NSS Natural
Stainless Steel1
CCC Custom Finish1
HOOD
A A Hood: Weeping
B B Hood: No Weep
Holes
TYPE
0R1 Low Voltage,
Round Single Light
ZWL16
ZW16 Series

2.25" Wall Mount Light
Integrated HK LED

MODEL POWER LIGHT
012V

VOLTAGE
012V 12V AC

WATTAGE PER LIGHT
05W 5 Watts (500lm)
07W 7 Watts (700lm)
10W 10 Watts (900lm)
SPW Specialty2
CCT
22 2200K
24 2400K
25 2500K
27 2700K
30 3000K
35 3500K
40 4000K
AM AMBER2
RG RGB2
OPTICS
N Narrow (20º)
M Medium (33º)
W Wide (44º)
E Extra Wide (57º)
CC Custom Optic

OPTIONAL INSTALLED ACCESSORIES

PHYSICAL OPTIONS MATERIAL / FINISH
Readymade eligible configurations ship in 2
to 4 weeks
1 For premium materials, please consult the
factory for current lead times and pricing. A
minimum order quantity of 10 units is required.
2 For Specialty AM (Amber LED) and RG (RGB
LED), select SPW (Specialty) for Wattage.

Consult factory for LED technical details
before Specification or Order.

GSA A/B Glare Shield Angled
GSL A/B Glare Shield Long
GSS A/B Glare Shield Short
LVR Hexcel Louver
OSL Overall Spread Lens
LSL Linear Spread Lens
SOL Solite Soft Focus
DCF Dichroic Filter

CANOPY MOUNT
CM5-XXX 5" Round Canopy Plate (Included)
CM1-XXX 3.75" Square Canopy Plate
CM3-XXX 4.75" Square Canopy Plate

SURFACE MOUNT
CMLJ-XXX 2.7" Round Surface Box
CB4.0-XXX 4" Round Surface Box
CB5.5-XXX 5.5" Round Surface Box
GLARE SHIELD OPTIC MOUNTING (Most common listed, see Page 4 for additional options) • Consult Accessory Spec Sheet for desired option code. • XXX represents color option.
• Readymade options available in ABL and ABR only unless noted by the part code above.

ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES (Not installed at time of order ) GSL-16-XXX A/B Glare Shield Long
GSA-16-XXX A/B Glare Shield Angled
GSS-16-XXX A/B Glare Shield Short

GLARE SHIELD ACCESSORIES
LVR-16 Hexcel Louver
OSL-16 Overall Spread Lens
LSL-16 Linear Spread Lens
SOL-16 Solite Soft Focus
DCF-16 Dichroic Filter
OPK-16 Optic Kit - Narrow, Medium, Wide, Extra Wide

OPTIC ACCESSORIES
OUTDOOR MAGNETIC TRANSFORMERS (120V input/12VAC Output) EXAMPLE: TXS-150-SS

WATTAGE (VA)
150 300
150 300 600
20 40 60 100
50 (120V Only) 100 300 600
60 MODEL
TXM Stainless steel, wet location outdoor magnetic transformer Multitap | 12-15VAC Output | MLV Dimming
TXS Stainless steel, wet location outdoor magnetic transformer Multitap | 12VAC Output | MLV Dimming
TXM Compact, damp location magnetic transformer
12VAC Output | MLV Dimming
IGT In ground outdoor magnetic transformer
12VAC Output | MLV Dimming
TXE In-fixture or near mounted electronic transformer
12VAC Output | ELV Dimming | Enclosure by others

PRIMARY VOLTAGE (VAC)
OTR-SS (120V Only)
SS (120V Only)
120
120 277
120 277

07.27.25 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1573
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

E1A

Page 23 of 20 ends

3.82"
(97mm)
DIA. 2.25"
(57mm)

2.75"
(70mm)

5.75"
(146mm)
Rotational
Locking Screw
(Hex Key 5/64")
2X 8-32
Countersunk
Clearance Holes
CM5
Canopy Plate
(Included)
Rotational
DIA. 5.00" Axis
(127mm)

3.82"
(97mm)
DIA. 2.25"
(57mm)

2.75"
(70mm)

5.75"
(146mm)
Rotational
Locking Screw
(Hex Key 5/64")
2X 8-32
Countersunk
Clearance Holes
CM5
Canopy Plate
(Included)
Rotational
DIA. 5.00" Axis
(127mm)
HK LIGHTING • 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 • TEL 805.480.4881 • [email protected] 3

PRODUCT DRAWINGS
ZWL16-0R1S
Standard with included CM5 Canopy Plate
ZWL16-0R1S
ZWL16-0R1F
ZWL16-0R1F
Finned with included CM5 Canopy Plate
ZWL16
Wall Mount • ZW16 Series

07.27.25 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1574
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

E1A

Page 24 of 20 ends

HK LIGHTING • 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 • TEL 805.480.4881 • [email protected] 4

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

HOOD OPTIONS OPTIONAL GLARE SHIELD
ZWL16
Wall Mount • ZW16 Series
Canopy
Mount:

Canopy
Mount:

Fixture On CM5
Fixture On CM3

INCLUDED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES

OPTIONAL MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
A HOOD
Versatile hood with 8 weep holes
for water drainage. Regressed
lens for glare control. Suggested
for general use or when fixture is
aimed in an up position.

B HOOD
Similar to A hood but without
weep holes. Regressed lens
for glare control. Suggested
for downlighting and interior
applications.

A
Surface
Mount Box:

Fixture On CB5.1
Readymade eligible configurations ship in 2 to 4 weeks.

CMLJ CB4.0 CB5.5 CB3.5 CB4.0-SQ CB5.1 CB5.5-K/O
Notes:

CM5
CM1 CM3 CM2
For use with A & B Hood,
fastened with Set Screw
(long) (short)

GSL GSS
(angle)
GSA
B

07.27.25 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1575
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

E1A

Page 25 of 20 ends

1/2 Beam Angle: 20.5º
Center Beam (fc) Beam Diameter Distance
877
219
97 55
35 0.7'

1.4'

2.2'

2.9'

3.6'

2.0'

4.0'

6.0'

8.0'

10.0'
90º
75º
60º
45º
30º
15º 0º
800
1600
2400
3200
4000 (cd)
1/2 Beam Angle: 32.5º
Center Beam (fc) Beam Diameter Distance
460
115
51 29
18 1.2'

2.3'

3.5'

4.6'

5.8'

2.0'

4.0'

6.0'

8.0'

10.0'
90º
75º
60º
45º
30º
15º 0º
400
800
1200
1600
2000 (cd)
1/2 Beam Angle: 44.1º
Center Beam (fc) Beam Diameter Distance
333
83 37
21 13

1.6'

3.2'

4.9'

6.5'

8.1'

2.0'

4.0'

6.0'

8.0'

10.0'
90º
75º
60º
45º
30º
15º 0º
300
600
900
1200
1500 (cd)
1/2 Beam Angle: 56.9º
Center Beam (fc) Beam Diameter Distance
255
64 28
16 10

2.3'

4.6'

6.9'

9.2'

11.5'

2.0'

4.0'

6.0'

8.0'

10.0'
90º
75º
60º
45º
30º
15º 0º
250
500
750
1000
1250 (cd)
HK LIGHTING • 2151 Anchor Ct, Thousand Oaks, CA 91320 • TEL 805.480.4881 • [email protected] 5

PHOTOMETRY & ENERGY DATA
Polar Graph - Intensity Cone of Light - Illuminance
Polar Graph - Intensity Cone of Light - Illuminance
ZWL16
Wall Mount • ZW16 Series
Cone of Light - Illuminance
Cone of Light - Illuminance
Polar Graph - Intensity
Polar Graph - Intensity
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 20.5°
Max. Candlepower 3507cd
Delivered Lumens 864lm
Efficacy 91lm/W
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 32.5°
Max. Candlepower 1842cd
Delivered Lumens 863lm
Efficacy 91lm/W
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 44.1°
Max. Candlepower 1332cd
Delivered Lumens 850lm
Efficacy 89lm/W
Input Power 9.5W
Color Temperature (CCT) 3000K
Color Rendering Index (Ra) 83
Beam Angle 56.9°
Max. Candlepower 1019cd
Delivered Lumens 876lm
Efficacy 92lm/W
Wattage Multiplier
5 Watt 0.53
7 Watt 0.83
10 Watt 1.00
AMBER 10W 0.73
Color Temp. Multiplier
2700k 0.97
3000k 1.00
4000k 1.05
ZWL16 (Narrow)
ZWL16 (Medium)
ZWL16 (Wide)
ZWL16 (Extra Wide)

WATTAGE MULTIPLIER CCT MULTIPLIER

07.27.25 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1576
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 26 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
1 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES

IC RATED
The Via Seal Collection is engineered for environments where performance is critical. Designed to withstand the harshest conditions, Via Seal fixtures feature ingress protection ratings from IP44 to IP66 and an impact protection rating of IK08. These luminaires provide robust defense against dust, water, and physical damage, all while maintaining the visual continuity and design flexibility of the sleek Via product line.

SENSORS
For latest
information
on sensors,
click here.

IP RATINGS
IP66
IP65EC
IP44

LIGHT SOURCE
Static White
Full Spectrum Static White
BIOS
UP TO
IK08

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1577
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 27 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
2 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
Project:

Type:

LUMINAIRE ID DISTRIBUTION ENVIRONMENT 1 OPTIC LIGHT SOURCE 3 CRI V2SEALR D
V2SEALR - Via 2"
Seal Recessed
D - Direct IP66 - IP66-Rated
IP65EC - IP65-Rated Electrical Components
IP44 2 - IP44-Rated
1 See page 4 for more information on the features
and installation details for each environment
option.
2 Fixture must be installed with direct lens facing
down.

EPDO - Environmentally
Protected Direct Optic
ASDO - Asymmetric Soft
Direct Optic
SW - Static white
FS - Full spectrum static white
80CRI 5 - 80+ CRI
90CRI 5, 6 - 90+ CRI
95CRI 7 - 95+ CRI
5 Not available with full
spectrum.
6 Not available with BIOS.
7 Only available with full
spectrum.

BIOSST 4 - BIOS Biological Static
BIOSDY 4 - BIOS Biological Dynamic
BIOSTU 4 - BIOS Biological Tunable
3 Chromawerx SOLA and DUO also available.

Consult factory for RGBW.
4 See page 6 for details.

LUMEN PACKAGE COLOR TEMP. LUMINAIRE LENGTH VOLTAGE DRIVER 12 350LMF - Low output 350 lm/ft
500LMF - Medium output 500 lm/ft
750LMF 8 - High output 750 lm/ft
8 Not available with BIOS.
27K 9 - 2700K
30K - 3000K
35K - 3500K
40K - 4000K
50K 9 - 5000K
9 Not available with
BIOS.
#FT#IN 10 - Specify nominal length (#) in 1'
and/or 1" increments
Standard nominal lengths:

Single units: 2' to 12'
Continuous runs: lengths over 12'
10 Minimum 2'.
120V - 120V
277V - 277V
UNV - 120V-277V
347V 11 - 347V
11 Available with D1
driver only.

D1 - 1% 0-10V
ELV 13 - ELV 120V
TRI 13 - TRIAC 120V
DA 14 - DALI
LDE1 14 - Lutron Hi-lume 1% Eco
ELD1 - eldoLED 1% ECOdrive 0-10V
ELD0 - eldoLED 0.1% SOLOdrive 0-10V
RLTD10 - Low-temperature 10% 0-10V
12 See page 4 for driver temperature ranges.
13 Available with 120V only.
14 On-site commissioning is required.

ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL SECTIONS (optional) 19, 20 POWER FEED MOUNTING FINISH OPTION 1C - 1 circuit
#MC 15 - Multi circuit
EC - Emergency-powered fixture
NL - Night light fixture
DL - Daylight fixture
GTD 16, 17, 18 - Generator transfer device fixture
15 Specify total number of circuits (#), including any
circuits required for electrical section options. Provide drawing or layout specifications. Minimum 4' section
per circuit.
16 Minimum 4' fixture.
17 Not available with 347V.
18 Not available for environments where the ambient
temperature falls below 0°C (32°F).
#EC## 21 - Emergency-powered section
#NL## 21 - Night light section
#DL## 21 - Daylight section
#GTD## 21, 22, 23, 24 - Generator transfer device section #EMB 23, 24, 25, 26 - Emergency battery
NA - None
19 Specify with multi circuit (#MC) electrical option only. 20 Provide drawing or layout specifications. Consult factory for other configurations. Default section length is 4'.
21 Specify quantity (#), and section length in inches (##). 22 Minimum 4' section.
23 Not available with 347V.
24 Not available for environments where the ambient temperature falls below 0°C (32°F).
25 Specify quantity (#). All batteries will be on the same circuit. Each battery powers a 4' section.
26 Only available with IP44.

TF - Top feed
EF - End feed
TG9 - Tegular 9/16"
TG15 - Tegular
15/16"
TB9 - T-bar 9/16"
TB15 - T-bar 15/16"
ST - Screw slot
T-bar
DTR - Trim
DTL - Trimless
DMF - Drywall
mud flange
W - Matte
white
AL -
Aluminum
B - Matte
black
WA - White
antimicrobial
Silverwerx
CF# - Custom
finish, specify
RAL#
CRF -
Corrosionresistant
finish
NA - None
Order Guide

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1578
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 28 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
3 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
2 3/8"
3 3/4"
3 3/16"
with flange
3 3/8" between T-bars

TRIM TRIMLESS DRYWALL MUD FLANGE
2 3/8"
3 3/4"
2 5/8" hole width
3 3/16"
with flange
2 3/8"
3 3/4"
2 1/2" hole width
2 3/8"
3 3/4"
3 1/4" hole width
4 7/8"
with flange
Dimensions
TG9
Tegular 9/16"
TG15
Tegular 15/16"
TB9
T-bar 9/16"
TB15
T-bar 15/16"
ST
Screw slot T-bar
GRID

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1579
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 29 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
4 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
Environment Options
Ambient Temperature Range based on driver selection
LDE1 ELV / TRI DA / ELD1 / ELD0 D1 RLTD10
Minimum temperature: 0 °C / 32 °F -10 °C / 14 °F -20 °C / -4 °F -30 °C / -22 °F -40 °C / -40 °F Maximum temperature: 40 °C / 104 °F
Direct
IP66 IP65EC Electrical ComponentsIP44
Dust tight High water
resistance
Dust tight Moderate
water
resistance
Particles
larger
than 1mm
protected
Water
splash
resistance

OUTDOOR
Directly exposed to the
elements
Moderate exposure to
the elements
Under canopy,
not exposed
INDOOR
Wipe down application
Healthcare application
Cleanroom application
Wipe down application
Healthcare application
external end cap gasket
lens gasket
internal end cap gasket
lens gasket
External joiner gasket
every 12'
Continuous line of light over 12'
Driver: in a sealed enclosure
Electrical connections: water and dust proof
LED boards: conformal coated for maximum
protection

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1580
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 30 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
5 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
Photometrics
Values calculated based on a 4' fixture at 3500K and 80+ CRI for all optics.

DIRECT
Multiplier - CCT/CRI

CCT WATTS LPW
80+ CRI 90+ CRI 80+ CRI 90+ CRI
2700K 1.05 1.27 0.95 0.79
3000K 1.02 1.23 0.98 0.81
3500K 1.00 1.19 1.00 0.84
4000K 1.00 1.19 1.00 0.84
5000K 0.96 1.12 1.04 0.89

EPDO ASDO

MULTIPLIERS
Use this table to get results for different color temperatures and CRI for all photometric tables.

LM/FT W/FT LM/W
350 3.5 99
500 5.2 97
750 8.2 92

LM/FT W/FT LM/W
350 4.3 82
500 6.3 79
750 10.0 75

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1581
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 31 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
6 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
Are people there
before 7am?
Is 2700K too
warm?
Are people there
after 7pm?
NO YES
YES
YES NO
NO
BIOS
Three BIOS Circadian LED solutions are offered – Biological Static, Biological Dynamic, and Biological Tunable.

Use the decision tree below to identify when and where to use BIOS Wellness LED Lighting Solutions.

Biological Static
BIOSST
Biological Dynamic
BIOSDY
Biological Tunable
BIOSTU
No CCT change when dimmed 500K shift when dimmed Dims to 2700K Daytime solution Daytime + evening solution Daytime + evening solution Spaces in operation during daytime hours,
between 7am and 7pm
Spaces in operation overnight, after 7pm
and before 7am, and when CCT color shift
in the evening is not preferred
Suitable for spaces in operation overnight,
after 7pm and before 7am, and where
people do not sleep (CCT color shift in the
evening is preferred)
E.g. offices, medical/dental offices E.g. hospitals E.g. offices, shiftwork

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1582
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 32 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
7 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
Technical Specifications
OPTICS
Environmentally Protected Direct Optic (EPDO)
The Environmentally Protected Direct Optic creates a seal that blocks debris and moisture, and withstands UV distortion and moderate impact. This extruded snap-in lens has a gasket to ensure proper sealing. The lens is 1/16" thick and made of frosted polycarbonate. Internally, white, side kicking reflectors guide the light through the lens. The EPDO suits moderate climate environments.

Asymmetric Soft Direct Optic (ASDO)
The Asymmetric Soft Direct Optic creates a seal that blocks debris and moisture, and withstands UV distortion and
moderate impact. This extruded snap-in lens has a gasket to ensure proper sealing. The lens is 1/16" thick and made of frosted polycarbonate. Internally, white, side kicking reflectors specifically angled to guide the light through the lens to create a nice asymmetric distribution. The ASDO suits moderate climate environments.

LIGHT SOURCE
Static white
Custom linear array of mid-flux LEDs are cartridge-mounted with quick-connect wiring to facilitate service and thermal management. Available in 2700K, 3000K, 3500K, 4000K, and 5000K with a minimum 80+ CRI and an option for 90+ CRI
with elevated R9 value. Color consistency maintained to within 3 SDCM. All LEDs have been tested in accordance with IESNA LM-80-08 and the results have shown L80 lumen maintenance greater than 60,000 hours. Absolute product photometry is measured and presented in accordance with IESNA LM-79,
unless otherwise indicated.

Full spectrum static white
The full spectrum LED option offers improved color particularly in the cyan region that is beneficial in both healthcare and circadian lighting strategies. The cyan region in full spectrum LED is richer at the 480 nm range.

BIOS
BIOS SkyBlue™ Technology is designed to provide the specific circadian stimulus to improve overall sleep quality, recovery during the night, and overall feelings of well-being.

The non-visual light signals that stimulate our circadian system have peak intensity in the "sky blue" region. As the diagram below illustrates, BIOS SkyBlue technology shifts the peak LED spectral intensity (490 nm) to align better with the peak response of circadian stimulus. Also note the enhanced deepred (near 660 nm) spectrum.

Three BIOS solutions are offered: BIOS Biological Static (BIOSST), BIOS Biological Dynamic (BIOSDY), and BIOS Biological Tunable (BIOSTU). See page 6 for details.

WELL BUILDING STANDARD
WELL for Light WELL WELL WELL : The WELL building standard focuses on light quality in several features. There are three categories that are fully attributed to the construction and features of a luminaire.

In WELL V1, it’s Feature 54 Circadian Lighting, Feature 55 Glare Control, and Feature 58 Color Quality. In WELL V2, it’s Feature L03 Circadian Lighting, Feature L04 Glare Control, and Feature L07 Electric Light Quality.

This fixture meets Features:
- Feature 54 or L03 when BIOS LED is selected
- Feature 58 or L07 when 90+ CRI is selected
All LED drivers used at Lumenwerx are deemed to have a low risk level of flicker, of 5% or less below 90Hz operational as defined by IEEE standard 1789-2015 LED.

WELL for Mind WELL : This luminaire meets WELL for mind as it is a human centric luminaire offering quality light, excellent color, and smooth optics. If any of these features are incorporated in a luminaire, it can improve the ability to focus, concentrate, and persist longer on a given task. This fixture harmoniously operates in a space to assist the mind.

For more information, please contact [email protected]

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1583
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 33 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
8 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES

LUMINAIRE LENGTH
Via 2 Seal is available in standard lengths of 2' to 12'. Continuous runs are available for run lengths over 12'. Exact run length must be noted in the product code. The minimum length is 2' and can be ordered in 1' and/or 1" increments. All individual sections are joined together onsite using the joiner kits provided. Lumenwerx joiner kits are extremely simple to work with in the field and result in a fixture that appears virtually seamless with no light leak at any connection.

TEMPERATURE VARIATION PROTECTION
The intergrated pressure equalization and moisture control GORE® protective vent allows air to flow while blocking water, dust, and contaminants. It reduces internal condensation, supports thermal stability, and preserves the fixture’s sealed performance over time.

Location may vary.

ELECTRICAL
Factory-set, adjustable output current LED driver with universal (120-277 VAC) input. Dimmable from 100% to 1% with 0-10V dimming control. Rated life (90% survivorship) of 50,000 hours at 50°C max. ambient (and 70°C max. case) temperature. At maximum driver load: Efficiency>84%, PF>0.9, THD<20%. Other specifiable options include Lutron Hi-Lume 1% Ecosystem, eldoLED 1% ECOdrive 0-10V, eldoLED 0.1% SOLOdrive 0-10V, and DALI protocol drivers. All of our standard 0-10V drivers are NEMA 410 compliant. An optional low-temperature 10% 0-10V driver, suitable for temperatures down to -40°C/F is also available.

PoE
Depending on the PoE manufacturer selected, Lumenwerx will install the node in factory as either integral to the luminaire or as a remote module. Factory programming of the PoE node may or may not enable the following functionalities: lumen package, DUO (tunable white), QUADRO (RGBW), emergency battery
backup, and sensor integration. These must be addressed and evaluated on a case-by-case basis.

ELECTRICAL SECTION OPTIONS
Electrical section options are available for fixtures specified as multi circuit (#MC). With MC, specify the total number of circuits (#), including any circuits required for optional electrical sections.

A drawing is required to specify the layout. Please consult factory for custom configurations.

Electrical sections
Options include emergency-powered light (#EC##), night
light (#NL##), daylight (#DL##), and generator transfer device (#GTD##) sections. Specify the quantity (#), as well as the section length in inches (##).

Example 1: A 32' Direct fixture with two 8' emergency light sections on a second circuit.

Code: 2MC-2EC96
Example 2: A 24' Direct fixture with one 4' generator transfer device section.

Code: 1MC-1GTD48
Battery
Each emergency battery (#EMB) powers a 4' section. All
batteries will be on the same circuit. Specify the number of batteries (#) required.

Factory installed long life, high temperature, maintenance-free Lithium-Ion battery pack with self-test functionality, test switch and charge indicator. Minimum of 90 minutes operation, up to 1000 lumens per 4' (25°C) emergency lighting output and recharge time of 24 hours. Suited for ambient temperatures of 0°C (32°F) to 55°C (131°F).

Generator Transfer Device (GTD)
A UL924 listed shunt relay that can bypass both line voltage (120-277V) and 0-10V dimming signal. Suited for ambient temperatures of 0°C (32°F) to 60°C (140°F).

MOUNTING
Recessed fixtures can be mounted into exposed or concealed T-bar or tegular ceiling, as well as in ceilings with trim, trimless, or mud flange options.

FINISH
Interior: 95%, reflective matte powder coated white paint Exterior: Powder-coat paint in matte white, matte black, or aluminum. Custom finishes are also available. Optional antimicrobial finish.

CONSTRUCTION
Housing: Extruded aluminum, up to 90% recycled content
Interior brackets: Die-formed cold rolled sheet steel
Gaskets: closed-cell silicone foam
Reflectors: Die-formed cold rolled sheet steel, 95% reflective matte white painted
Recessed flanges: Extruded aluminum, up to 90% recycled content
Mud flange: Extruded aluminum, up to 90% recycled content End cap: Die-cast aluminum
Mounting bracket: Aluminum bracket with stainless steel PEM studs and sealing washers

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1584
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 34 of 20 ends

VIA 2 SEAL
9 / 9
3737 Cote Vertu St-Laurent, Quebec, Canada H4R 2C9
T (514) 225-4304 F (514) 931 -4862
www.Lumenwerx.com
Lumenwerx reserves the right to modify
product specifications without notification.
© Lumenwerx, ULC. All rights reserved.

VIA2SEAL-RECESSED-SPEC-REV5 July 23, 2025

RECESSED
DIRECT

SEALWERX SERIES
WEIGHT
4': 9.0 lbs - 4.1 kg
8': 18.3 lbs - 8.3 kg
12': 28 lbs - 12.7 kg

CERTIFICATIONS
ETL: IP44-Rated environment option is rated for dry/damp locations. IP66-Rated and IP65-Rated Electrical Components environment options are ETL Wet Listed. Conforms to UL
Standard 1598 and certified to CAN/CSA Standard C22.2
No. 250.0. During the installation of Wet Listed fixtures, the contractor is responsible for properly sealing all mounting and electrical connection points.

IC rated: Suitable for direct contact with insulation
IK08: Impact resistance rated to IK08

WARRANTY
Lumenwerx provides a five-year limited warranty on electrical and mechanical performance of the luminaires, including the LED boards, drivers, and auxiliary electronics. Lumenwerx will repair or replace defective luminaires or components at our discretion, provided they have been installed and operated in accordance with our specifications. Other limitations apply, please refer to the full warranty on our website.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1585
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 35 of 20 ends

Application
Recessed downlight with a symmetric very wide beam distribution. These luminaires are designed for down lighting atriums, canopies, passages, and other interior and exterior locations.

Materials
Clear safety glass with matte finish
Marine grade, copper free (≤ 0.3% copper content) A360.0 aluminum alloy High temperature silicone gasket
Silicone applied robotically to casting, plasma treated for increased adhesion
Stainless steel screw clamps
Aluminum ceiling mounted driver box
Pure anodized aluminum reflector surface
Silicone optic with excellent high temperature and UV stability BEGA Hybrid Optics®
NRTL listed to North American Standards, suitable for wet locations Protection class IP 65
Weight: 1.8 lbs.

Electrical
Operating voltage 120-277VAC
Minimum start temperature -20° C
LED module wattage 12.3 W
System wattage 14.0 W
Controllability 0-10V dimmable
Color rendering index Ra > 90
Luminaire lumens 1211 lm
LED service life (L70) 60000 hrs
LED color temperature
4000K (K4)
3500K (K35)
3000K (K3)
2700K (K27)
BEGA can supply you with suitable LED replacement modules for up to 20 years after the purchase of LED luminaires - see website for details Finish
All BEGA standard finishes are matte, textured powder coat with minimum 3 mil thickness. BEGA Unidure® finish provides superior fade protection in Black, Bronze, and Silver. BEGA standard White is a super durable polyester powder. Optionally available RAL, custom, and premium colors provided in polyester powder and/or liquid paint.

Available colors
Black (BLK) Bronze (BRZ)
Silver (SLV) White (WHT)
Natural Bronze (NTB) RAL:

CUS:

Downlight · Very wide beam
BEGA 1000 BEGA Way, Carpinteria, CA 93013 (805) 684-0533 [email protected] Due to the dynamic nature of lighting products and the associated technologies, luminaire data on this sheet is subject to change at the discretion of BEGA North America. For the most current technical data, please refer to bega-us .com © copyright BEGA 2025
Type:

BEGA Product:

Project:

Modified:

Available options
CUS Custom finish
DALI-2 Digital addressable lighting interface
ELV/TRIAC Electronic low voltage/TRIAC dimming
FRO Frosted lens
FSC Fusing
MGU Marine grade undercoat
NTB Natural bronze (premium finish)
RAL RAL finish
Downlight · Very wide beam
LED β A B C
B24386 12.3 W 58° 43
/8 01/4 23/4
Updated 04/28/25

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1586
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-1 of 20
UrbanScape-MPTC-spec 03/24 page 1 of 5
Lumec UrbanScape LED post top luminaire features flexible, robust energy-saving solutions for modern-styled urban architectural lighting.

With its slightly rounded hood, the post top model comes with a flat lens to highlight the thinness of the LEDs. The luminaire provides attractive lighting at night, adding appeal to the surroundings and promoting safe use of the environment. Includes Service Tag,innovative way to provide assistance throughout the life of the product.

Project:

Location:

Cat.No:

Type:

Qty:

Notes:

Urban
UrbanScape
MPTC Post Top
Ordering guide Example: MPTC-42W32LED4K-G3-LE3-120-CDMGM25-PH8-BKTX Series
LED
module CCT Gen.

G3
Optical
system Voltage Driver
Options
Receptical Control Luminaire Mounting Poles Finish
MPTC1
MPTCCR
MPTCRC
MPTCRR
UrbanScape
LED post top
luminaire
35W32LED2
55W32LED2
72W32LED
97W32LED2
55W48LED
80W48LED
108W48LED
140W48LED2
70W64LED
110W64LED
90W80LED
135W80LED
3K
3000K
4K
4000K
G3
Gen3
LE2
Type II
(ASYM)
flat lens
LE3
Type III
(ASYM)
flat lens
LE3
Type III
(ASYM)
wide flat
lens
LE4
Type IV
(ASYM)
flat lens
LE5
Type V
(SYMM)
flat lens
UNV
120-277V
347
347V
480
480V
DMG
0-10 volt
SRD 2
Sensor ready driver
(standard
configuration)
SRD1 2
Sensor ready driver
(alternate
configuration)
RC 2
Receptacle
for twist-lock
photocell or
shorting cap,
5-pins
RCD7 2
Receptacle
for twist-lock
photocell or
shorting cap,
7-pins
PH8 3
Twist-lock
Photoelectric
Cell
PH9 3
Shorting cap
PHXL1,3
Twist-lock
Photoelectric
Cell extended
life, UNV (120-
277VAC)
SP2
20kV /
10kA Surge
Protector
TN3
Fitter to fit
over
3" (76 mm)
O.D. by 4"
(102 mm) long
tenon
TN3.5
Fitter to fit
over 3½"
(89 mm) by
O.D. by 4"
(102 mm) long
tenon
BAC4
Meets the
requirements
of the Buy
American Act
of 1933 (BAA)
Consult the
Signify web
site for details
and the
complete line
of Mountings
Consult
the Signify
web site for
details and
the complete
line of Poles
Textured
BE2TX
BE6TX
BE8TX
BG2TX
BKTX
BRTX
GN4TX
GN6TX
GN8TX
GNTX
GR
GY3TX
NP
RD2TX
RD4TX
TG
TS
WHTX
(consult pg 4 for
code descriptions)

1. DMG 0-10V driver come standard.

2. The 347V and 480V are not available.

3. Use of photoelectric cell or shorting cap is required to ensure proper illumination.

4. Failure to properly select the “BAC” suffix could result in you receiving product that is not BAA compliant product with no recourse for an RMA or refund. This BAC designation hereunder does not address (i) the applicability of, or availability of a waiver under, the Trade Agreements Act, or (ii) the “Buy America” domestic content requirements imposed on states, localities, and other non-federal entities as a condition of receiving funds administered by the Department of Transportation or other federal agencies.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1587
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-2 of 20
UrbanScape-MPTC-spec 03/24 page 2 of 5
Dimensions
17 3⁄4" (451 mm)
311⁄2" (880 mm)
347⁄8"
(886 mm)
MPTC UrbanScape post top
urban luminaire

MPTCCR MPTCRC MPTCRR
EPA: 1.7 sq ft
Weight: 32.2 lbs (14.6 kg)
MPTC
Series code logic:

MPTC C R
Retro fitter
Contemporary cage
Urbanscape retro series
Ordering Code:

Total
LEDs
System
current
(mA)
Average
System
Watts
(W)
LE2 LE3 LE3W LE4 LE5
Lumen
Output
Efficacy
(LPW)
BUG
Rating
Lumen
Output
Efficacy
(LPW)
BUG
Rating
Lumen
Output
Efficacy
(LPW)
BUG
Rating
Lumen
Output
Efficacy
(LPW)
BUG
Rating
Lumen
Output
Efficacy
(LPW)
BUG
Rating
No Shield MPTC 3000K
35W32LED3K-G3-x 32 350 36 3920 109 B1-U0-G1 3948 110 B1-U0-G1 3982 111 B1-U0-G1 3963 110 B1-U0-G1 4038 112 B3-U0-G1 55W32LED3K-G3-x 32 530 54 5623 104 B1-U0-G1 5662 105 B1-U0-G1 5711 106 B1-U0-G2 5684 105 B1-U0-G2 5792 107 B3-U0-G1 72W32LED3K-G3-x 32 700 68 7092 104 B1-U0-G1 7142 105 B1-U0-G2 7203 106 B1-U0-G2 7170 105 B1-U0-G2 7305 107 B3-U0-G2 97W32LED3K-G3-x 32 1050 101 9779 97 B2-U0-G2 9847 97 B2-U0-G2 9932 98 B2-U0-G2 9886 98 B2-U0-G2 10073 100 B4-U0-G2 55W48LED3K-G3-x 48 350 53 5964 113 B1-U0-G1 6006 113 B1-U0-G1 6058 114 B1-U0-G2 6030 114 B1-U0-G2 6144 116 B3-U0-G1 80W48LED3K-G3-x 48 530 79 8556 108 B2-U0-G2 8616 109 B2-U0-G2 8691 110 B2-U0-G2 8650 109 B2-U0-G2 8814 112 B3-U0-G2 108W48LED3K-G3-x 48 700 102 10789 106 B2-U0-G2 10865 107 B2-U0-G2 10959 107 B2-U0-G2 10908 107 B2-U0-G2 11114 109 B4-U0-G2 140W48LED3K-G3-x 48 1050 152 14879 98 B2-U0-G2 14983 99 B2-U0-G2 15113 99 B2-U0-G3 15042 99 B2-U0-G2 15326 101 B4-U0-G2 70W64LED3K-G3-x 64 350 71 7972 112 B2-U0-G1 8028 113 B1-U0-G2 8097 114 B2-U0-G2 8060 114 B1-U0-G2 8212 116 B3-U0-G2 110W64LED3K-G3-x 64 530 102 11435 112 B2-U0-G2 11515 113 B2-U0-G2 11615 114 B2-U0-G2 11560 113 B2-U0-G2 11779 115 B4-U0-G2 90W80LED3K-G3-x 80 350 88 9842 112 B2-U0-G2 9911 113 B2-U0-G2 9997 114 B2-U0-G2 9950 113 B2-U0-G2 10138 115 B4-U0-G2 135W80LED3K-G3-x 80 530 132 14118 107 B2-U0-G2 14217 108 B2-U0-G2 14340 109 B2-U0-G2 14273 108 B2-U0-G2 14543 110 B4-U0-G2 No Shield MPTC 4000K
35W32LED4K-G3-x 32 350 36 4116 114 B1-U0-G1 4145 115 B1-U0-G1 4181 116 B1-U0-G1 4161 116 B1-U0-G1 4240 118 B3-U0-G1 55W32LED4K-G3-x 32 530 54 5904 109 B1-U0-G1 5945 110 B1-U0-G1 5997 111 B1-U0-G2 5968 111 B1-U0-G2 6082 113 B3-U0-G1 72W32LED4K-G3-x 32 700 68 7447 110 B1-U0-G1 7499 110 B1-U0-G2 7563 111 B1-U0-G2 7529 111 B1-U0-G2 7670 113 B3-U0-G2 97W32LED4K-G3-x 32 1050 101 10268 102 B2-U0-G2 10339 102 B2-U0-G2 10429 103 B2-U0-G2 10380 103 B2-U0-G2 10577 105 B4-U0-G2 55W48LED4K-G3-x 48 350 53 6262 118 B1-U0-G1 6306 119 B1-U0-G1 6361 120 B1-U0-G2 6332 119 B1-U0-G2 6451 122 B3-U0-G1 80W48LED4K-G3-x 48 530 79 8984 114 B2-U0-G2 9047 115 B2-U0-G2 9126 116 B2-U0-G2 9083 115 B2-U0-G2 9255 117 B3-U0-G2 108W48LED4K-G3-x 48 700 102 11328 111 B2-U0-G2 11408 112 B2-U0-G2 11507 113 B2-U0-G2 11453 112 B2-U0-G2 11670 114 B4-U0-G2 140W48LED4K-G3-x 48 1050 152 15623 103 B2-U0-G2 15732 104 B2-U0-G2 15869 104 B2-U0-G3 15794 104 B2-U0-G3 16092 106 B4-U0-G2 70W64LED4K-G3-x 64 350 71 8371 118 B2-U0-G2 8429 119 B1-U0-G2 8502 120 B2-U0-G2 8463 119 B1-U0-G2 8623 121 B3-U0-G2 110W64LED4K-G3-x 64 530 102 12007 118 B2-U0-G2 12091 119 B2-U0-G2 12196 120 B2-U0-G2 12138 119 B2-U0-G2 12368 121 B4-U0-G2 90W80LED4K-G3-x 80 350 88 10334 117 B2-U0-G2 10407 118 B2-U0-G2 10497 119 B2-U0-G2 10448 119 B2-U0-G2 10645 121 B4-U0-G2 135W80LED4K-G3-x 80 530 132 14824 112 B2-U0-G2 14928 113 B2-U0-G2 15057 114 B2-U0-G3 14987 114 B2-U0-G2 15270 116 B4-U0-G2 LED Wattage and Lumen Values for 3000K & 4000K fixtures with No Shield Actual performance may vary due to installation variables including optics, mounting/ceiling height, dirt depreciation, light loss factor, etc.; highly recommended to confirm performance with a layout - contact Applications at signify.com/outdoorluminaires.

Note: Some data may be scaled based on tests of similar. But not identical luminaires.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1588
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-3 of 20
UrbanScape-MPTC-spec 03/24 page 3 of 5
Specifications
Cage
In a round shape with 4 arms and a built-in
mechanical ring, this cage is a one piece die cast
A360 Aluminum alloy 0.100 (2.5mm) minimum
thickness, mechanically assembled to the fitter.

Choice of Contemporary (C) and Retro (R) style
cages. See Series code logic.

Fitter
Made of die cast A360.1 Aluminum alloy 0.100
(2.5mm) minimum thickness, the fitter is complete
with a watertight access door giving access
to the driver rated IP66, and a terminal block
that accepts (#2 max.) wires from the primary
circuit. Comes with an easy self adjusting system
with two (2) set screws 3/8 16 UNC for ease of
maintenance and installation. Fits on a 4" (102mm)
outside diameter by 4" (102mm) long tenon.

Choice of Contemporary (C) and Retro (R) style
fitters. See Series code logic.

Hood
Made of die cast A360.1 Aluminum alloy 0.1 (2.5mm)
minimum thickness, mechanically assembled to
the cast aluminum heat sink.

Access-Mechanism
A die cast A360.1 Aluminum alloy 0.1 (2.5mm)
minimum thickness technical ring with latch
and hinge.

Light Engine
LEDgine is composed of 4 main components:

LED lamp / Optical System / Heat Sink / Driver
Electrical components are RoHS compliant.

LEx Lens
Flat Lens: Made of soda lime clear tempered glass,
mechanically assembled and sealed onto the ring
of the access mechanism.

LED Module
Composed of high-performance white LEDs.

Color temperature as per ANSI/NEMA bin Neutral
White, 4000 Kelvin nominal (3985K +/-.275K or
3710K to 4260K) or Warm white, 3000 Kelvin
nominal (3045K +/- 175K or 2870K to 3220K), CRI
70 Min. 75 Typical.

Optical System
Composed of high performance optical polymer
refractor lenses to achieve desired distribution
optimized to get maximum spacing, target lumens
and a superior lighting uniformity. System is rated
IP66. Performance shall be tested per LM 63, LM
79 and TM 15 (IESNA) certifying its photometric
performance. Street side indicated. Dark Sky
compliant with 0% uplight and U0 per IESNA TM 15.

Heat Sink
Made of cast aluminum optimizing the LEDs
efficiency and life. Product does not use any
cooling device with moving parts (only passive
cooling device).

Driver
High power factor of 95%. Electronic driver,
operating range 50/60 Hz. Auto adjusting
universal voltage input from 120 to 277 and 347 to
480 VAC rated for both application line to line or
line to neutral, Class I, THD of 20% max. Maximum
ambient operating temperature from 40F (40C)
to 130F (55C) degrees. Certified in compliance to
UL1310 cULus requirement. Dry and damp location.

Assembled on a unitized removable tray with Tyco
quick disconnect plug resisting to 221F(105C)
degrees. Dimmable driver 0-10V.

The current supplying the LEDs will be reduced
by the driver if the driver experiences internal
overheating as a protection to the LEDs and
the electrical components. Output is protected
from short circuits, voltage overload and current
overload. Automatic recovery after correction.

Standard built in driver surge protection of 2.5kV
(min).

Driver options
DMG: Dimmable driver 0-10V.

SRD: Sensor Ready Driver including SR
communication (used for dimming and other
functionalities), 24V auxiliary supply and a logical
signal input (LSI) connected to the top NEMA twist
lock receptacle.

SRD1: Sensor Ready Driver including SR
communication (used for dimming and other
functionalities) but with 24V auxiliary supply and a
logical signal input (LSI) not connected to the top
NEMA twist lock.

Luminaire options
HS
House side shield
PH8 (allows a 90° rotation)
Photoelectric cell, twist-lock
type complete with receptacle
and decorative polycarbonate
(grey) cap with a plastic lens.

PH9
Shorting cap, twist-lock type
complete with receptacle.

PHXL (allows a 90° rotation)
Extended life Photoelectric cell,
twist-lock type complete with
receptacle and decorative
polycarbonate (grey) cap with
a plastic lens.

RCD
Receptacle 5-pins allowing
dimming, can be used with a
twist-lock Starsense, shorting
cap or a photoelectric cell.

RCD7
Receptacle
7-pins.

TN3
Fitter to fit over a
3" (76 mm) O.D.
by 4” (102 mm) tenon.

TN3.5
Fitter to fit over a
3-1/2" (89 mm) O.D.
by 4” (102 mm) tenon.

MPTC UrbanScape post top
urban luminaire

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1589
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-4 of 20
UrbanScape-MPTC-spec 03/24 page 4 of 5
Specifications (continued)
Surge Protector
Surge protector tested in accordance with ANSI/
IEEE C62.45 per ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2 Scenario I
Category C High Exposure 10kV/10kA waveforms
for Line Ground, Line Neutral and Neutral Ground,
and in accordance with U.S. DOE (Department
of Energy) MSSLC (Municipal Solid State Street
Lighting Consortium) model specification for
LED roadway luminaires electrical immunity
requirements for High Test Level 10kV / 10kA.

Optional SP2 20kV / 10kA surge protection device
that provides extra protection beyond the SP1
10kV/10kA level.

Finish
The Thermosetting powder coating provided
meets the color requirements of the AAMA 2604
specification as measured per ASTM D2244. The
Thermosetting product is applied at a dry film
of 2.5 to 4.0 mils (64-102 microns) on textured
finishes, resulting in a durable long lasting finish.

Textured Finishes: Other Finishes:

BE2TX: Midnight Blue GR: Gray Sandtex
BE6TX: Ocean Blue NP: Natural Alum.

BE8TX: Royal Blue TG: Hammer-tone
BG2TX: Sandstone Gold
BKTX: Black TS: Hammer-tone
BRTX: Bronze Silver
GN4TX: Blue Green
GN6TX: Forest Green
GN8TX: Dark Forest Green
GNTX: Green
GY3TX: Medium Grey
RD2TX: Burgundy
RD4TX: Scarlet
WHTX: White
Vibration Resistance
Meets the ANSI C136.31-2018, American National
Standard for Roadway Luminaire Vibration
specifications for Bridge/overpass applications.
(Tested for 3G over 100,000 cycles by
independent lab)
LED manufacturing standard
The electronic components sensitive to
electrostatic discharge (ESD) such as light
emitting diodes (LEDs) are assembled in
compliance with IEC61340 5 1 and ANSI/ESD
S20.20 standards so as to eliminate ESD events
that could decrease useful life of the product.

Quality Control
Manufactured to ISO 9001 2015 and
ISO 14001 2015 International Quality
Standards Certification.

Vibration Resistance
Meets the ANSI C136.31, American National
Standard for Roadway Luminaire Vibration
specifications for Bridge/overpass applications.
(Tested for 3G over 100 000 cycles by an
independent lab).

Service Tag
Each individual luminaire is uniquely identifiable,
thanks to the Service tag application. With
a simple scan of a QR code, placed inside
the luminare, you gain instant access to the
luminaire configuration, making installation and
maintenance operations faster and easier, no
matter what stage of the luminaire’s lifetime.

Just download the APP and register your
product right away.

For more details visit: signify.com/servicetag
Certifications and Compliance
cULus Listed for Canada and USA.

UrbanSacpe is on the DesignLights.

LED Performance
Predicted lumen depreciation data1
Ordering Code
Ambient
Temperature (°C) Driver mA
Calculated
L70 hours1,2 L70 per TM-212,3
Lumen Maintenance %
@ 60,000 hours
MPTC-135W80LED4K 25°C 530 mA >100,000 >60,000 94.01%
MPTC-140W48LED4K 25°C 1050 mA >100,000 >60,000 96.78%

1. Predicted performance derived from LED manufacturer’s data and engineering design estimates, based on IESNA LM-80 methodology. Actual experience may vary due to field application conditions.

2.L70 is the predicted time when LED performance depreciates to 70% of initial lumen output.

3. Calculated per IESNA TM21-11. Published L70 hours limited to 6 times actual LED test hours.

MPTC UrbanScape post top
urban luminaire

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1590
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-5 of 20
Specifications (continued)
18 5.49
16 4.88
20 6.10
14 4.27
12 3.66
10 3.05
8 2.44
6 1.83
4 1.22
2 0.61
ft
m
MPTC
M30-2
SM8-BA
MPTC
APR4-LBC3-SA1
MPTC
M30-2
SM8-BA
MPTC
APR4-LBC3-SA1
MPTC
M10-1A
P604-PS
MPTC
CRF-1A
MPTC
CRF-F
SSM8
18 5.49
16 4.88
20 6.10
14 4.27
12 3.66
10 3.05
8 2.44
6 1.83
4 1.22
2 0.61
ft
m
MPTC
M30-2
SM8-BA
MPTC
APR4-LBC3-SA1
18 5.49
16 4.88
20 6.10
14 4.27
12 3.66
10 3.05
8 2.44
6 1.83
4 1.22
2 0.61
ft
m

MPTC MPTC MPTC
Pole: P604-PS Pole: SM8-BA Pole: APR4-LBC3-SA1
Mounting: M10-1A Mounting: M30-2
Consult Signify.com/outdoorluminaires for details and the complete line of Signify poles and brackets.

Poles
MPTC UrbanScape post top
urban luminaire
© 2024 Signify Holding. All rights reserved. The information provided herein is subject to change, without notice. Signify does not give any representation or warranty as to the accuracy or completeness of the information included herein and shall not be liable for any action in reliance thereon. The information presented in this document is not intended as any commercial offer and does not form part of any quotation or contract, unless otherwise agreed by Signify.

UrbanScape-MPTC-spec 03/24 page 5 of 5
Signify North America Corporation
400 Crossing Blvd, Suite 600
Bridgewater, NJ 08807
Telephone: 800-555-0050
Signify Canada Ltd.
281 Hillmount Road,
Markham, ON, Canada L6C 2S3
Telephone: 800-668-9008
All trademarks are owned by Signify Holding or their respective owners. www.lumec.com

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1591
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-6 of 20
Project:

Location:

Cat.No:

Type:

Lamps: Qty:

Notes:

Lumec_POLE_APR4 12/20 page 1 of 3
Outdoor
Poles and Brackets
APR4
Round Aluminum Pole
Made from a one-piece, seamless 4" round (102 mm) tube of extruded aluminum welded to both the top and bottom of a cast-aluminum anchor plate. A 2" by 4-1/2" (51 by 114 mm) maintenance opening is complete with cover and copper ground lug.

Note: The recommended method for calculating EPA (Effective Projected Area) is in accordance with AASHTO 2001 standards: for three seconds, the pole is tested in wind gusts equivalent to the strongest winds on record over the past 50 years, and with a 50 pound load (22.7 kg) placed at 1 foot (305 mm) above its center.

Ordering guide example: APR4-F-8-LS-BE2TX
Pole Family
APR4
Wall Thickness Nominal Height Options Finish
APR4 F 0.125" 8 8' DE Pole buried 5’ (1524 mm) in the ground LS Provision for loudspeaker outlet
PH7 Button-type photoelectric cell (specify operating voltage) PH8 Quarter-turn type photoelectric cell (specify operating voltage) DR Duplex receptacle (120V line voltage. only)
GFI DR with common ground fault interrupter (120V line voltage only) HB Hinged base (16.0 ft./4.8 m max.)
BA Banner arm
PS Plant support
MPL Mid-pole luminaire
Two-piece round decorative base covers
LBC1 Cast-aluminum
LBC2 Cast-aluminum
LBC3 Cast-aluminum
LBC4C Cast-aluminum
BE2TX Midnight Blue Textured
BE6TX Ocean Blue Textured
BE8TX Royal Blue Textured
BG2TX Sandstone Gold Textured
BKTX Black Textured
BRTX Bronze Textured
GN4TX Blue Green Textured
GN6TX Forest Green Textured
GN8TX Dark Forest Green Textured
GNTX Green Textured
GY3TX Medium Grey Textured
RD2TX Burgundy Textured
RD4TX Scarlet Textured
WHTX White Textured
GR Gray Sandtex
NP Natural Alum.

TG Hammer-tone
TS Hammer-tone Silver
10 10'
12 12'
14 14'
15 15'
16 16'
U 0.226" 8 8'
10 10'
12 12'
14 14'
15 15'
16 16'
18 18'
W 0.318" 12 12'
14 14'
15 15'
16 16'
18 18'
20 20'

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1592
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-7 of 20
POLE OPTION DETAILS > PS
PSS / PSD > PLANT SUPPORT
> shown here on a straight round pole
XX" XX" XX"
XX"
16" (406 mm)
1" (25 mm)
2" (51 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
1/2" (13 mm)
5/16" O (8 mm)
5/8" (16 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm)
XX" XX"
XX" XX" XX"
LF
ral Tubing
1/4" (6 mm) stick sign
supplied by others
Eyelet
Bolt circle
6 1/2" (165 mm)
Attachment
Arm
Decorative
end-of-arm
ast-aluminum
ball
Safety Cable
XX" XX" XX"
XX"
16" (406 mm)
7 1/2" (191 mm)
Wireway 7/8" (22 mm)
1" (25 mm)
2" (51 mm)
Lenght to be specified
3"
(76 mm)
1/2" (13 mm)
5/16" O (8 mm)
5/8" (16 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm)
XX" XX"
XX" XX" XX"
LF
Pole
Central Tubing
1/4" (6 mm) stick sign
supplied by others
Eyelet
Bolt circle
6 1/2" (165 mm)
Attachment
Arm
Decorative
end-of-arm
cast-aluminum
ball
Safety Cable
XX" XX" XX"
XX"
16" (406 mm)
1" (25 mm)
2" (51 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
1/2" (13 mm)
5/16" O (8 mm)
5/8" (16 mm)
3"
(76 mm) 3" (76 mm)
16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm)
XX" XX"
XX" XX" XX"
LF
1/4" (6 mm) stick sign
supplied by others
Eyelet
Safety Cable
XX" XX" XX"
XX"
16" (406 mm)
1" (25 mm)
2" (51 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
1/2" (13 mm)
5/16" O (8 mm)
5/8" (16 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
3"
(76 mm)
16" (406 mm) 16" (406 mm)
XX" XX"
XX" XX" XX"
LF
1/4" (6 mm) stick sign
supplied by others
et
Safety Cable
Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PS are designed to fit round, fluted, square and multisided poles, using a central tubing inserted through two opposite 1 3/8” (35 mm) holes.

The steel arm [1 1/16” diameter (27 mm)] can then easily slip-fit into the plant support fitter, where it is secured by stainless steel hardware.

Completing the installation are two end-of-arm decorative casting.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSAC features a cast-aluminum curved arm mechanically assembled to a cast-aluminum plate.

The plate is mechanically assembled with two bolts going through the pole.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSCRA features a seamless 1” x 2” (25 x 51 mm) rectangular extruded aluminum tube and cast decorative scroll, welded to a cast-aluminum plate.

The plate is mechanically assembled with two bolts going through the pole.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSPC features a 1 1/16” (27 mm) round extrudedaluminum arm welded to the cast-aluminum plate.

The plant support arm includes an extruded-aluminum decorative rod welded to the cast-aluminum plate and to the arm.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

PSS > Single plant support
PSACS > Single plant support
PSCRAS > Single plant support
PSPCS > Single plant support
Decorative end-of-arm option
PSD > Double plant support
PSACD > Double plant support
PSCRAD > Double plant support
PSPCD > Double plant support
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg) on each side.
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
on each side.
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
on each side.
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg) on each side.

PSACS / PSACD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.6 sq.ft. Weight: 8.0 lbs. (3.6 kg)
PSCRAS / PSCRAD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.5 sq.ft. Weight: 8.0 lbs. (3.6 kg)
PSPCS / PSPCD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.4 sq.ft. Weight: 7.5 lbs. (3.4 kg)

PSACS PSCRAS
PSYRS
PSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
18" (457 mm)
5" (127 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
15" (381 mm)
15" (381 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
22" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSCRASPSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
22" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSPCS

RFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
m) 14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSPCS

RFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
m) 14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSCRASPSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
22" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSACS PSCRAS
PSYRS
PSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
18" (457 mm)
5" (127 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
15" (381 mm)
15" (381 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
22" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSCRASPSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
381 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
22" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1593
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

R1
Page R1-8 of 20
PS > POLE OPTION DETAILS
PSCRFS / PSCRFD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.6 sq.ft. Weight: 11 lbs. (5.0 kg)
PSARS / PSARD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.5 sq.ft. Weight: 8.0 lbs. (3.6 kg)
PSYRS / PSYRD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.5 sq.ft. Weight: 7.6 lbs. (3.5 kg)
PSVCS / PSVCD > PLANT SUPPORT
EPA: 0.6 sq.ft. Weight: 9.6 lbs. (4.4 kg)
Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSYR feature a cast-aluminum curved arm and a decorative element welded to a cast-aluminum plate.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSCRF features a cast-aluminum curved arm mechanically assembled to a cast-aluminum plate.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSAR features a cast-aluminum curved arm and a decorative element welded to a cast-aluminum plate.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

Specifications:

Lumec’s plant support arm PSVC features a cast-aluminum curved arm and a cast-aluminum decorative scroll welded to a cast-aluminum plate.

Completing the installation is an eyelet to support the flower pot.

Consult factory for all plant support heights and orientations. > Plant supports should hold plants at least 8 feet above the ground. > Flower pot supplied by others.

PSACS PSCRAS
PSYRS
PSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
5" (127 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
15" (381 mm)
15" (381 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)

PSCRASPSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
57 mm)
5" (127 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
1 mm)
15" (381 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
22" (559 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSACS PSCRAS
PSYRS
PSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
5" (127 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
15" (381 mm)
15" (381 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
PSPCS

SCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
59 mm) 14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSYRS > Single plant support
PSCRFS > Single plant support
PSARS > Single plant support
PSVCS > Single plant support
PSYRD > Double plant support
PSCRFD > Double plant support
PSARD > Double plant support
PSVCD > Double plant support
PSPCS
PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
24" (610 mm)
PSPCS
PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
24" (610 mm)
14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSCRASPSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
PSPCS
PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
24" (610 mm)
14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSPCS
PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
32 mm) 24" (610 mm)
14 1/2" (368 mm)
PSPCS
PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
32 mm) 24" (610 mm)
14 1/2" (368 mm)

PSCRASPSPCS

PSCRFS PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
17" (432 mm) 24" (610 mm)
PSPCS
PSVCS
11" (279 mm)
4" (102 mm)
11" (279 mm)
32 mm) 24" (610 mm)
14 1/2" (368 mm) > Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
on each side.
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
on each side.
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
on each side.
> Maximum weight of 100 lbs (45.4 kg)
on each side.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1594
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 9 of 20 ends

DECOSTRING - SERIES

FESTOON LIGHTING SYSTEM
PAGE 1 of 12 C US DSW 12-24 / v2
TYPE
NOTES

PROJECT

DURABLE CONSTRUCTION

VERSATILE APPLICATIONS

CUSTOMIZATION

WET-RATED
Constructed with high-quality stainless-steel cables for strength, UV-rated duplex power cables and zip ties for reliable performance, and non-metallic phenolic sockets for durability in harsh environments.

Designed to remain resilient and functional in extreme weather conditions.

Decostrings are a specification-grade festoon lighting system engineered to endure harsh year-round commercial conditions. Ideal for restaurants, hospitality venues, cityscape enhancements, and theme park installations, they offer both functional lighting and aesthetic appeal.

Decostrings are custom-built to your specifications, offering precise run lengths and personalized lamp spacing. With a wide selection of lamps and decorative shades, you can tailor the lighting to match your vision.

This level of customization brings your project ideas to life, ensuring both functionality and aesthetic appeal.

Decostrings, including strings and lamps, are ETL listed for permanent wet installations, ensuring durability in any environment.

Proudly made in the USA, Decostrings guarantee lasting quality and reliability.

FEATURES

SERIES SPACING LAMP SHADE-STYLE SHADE-FINISH TERMINATION KIT LENGTH DSW
STK

STANDARD

TERMINATION KIT
QL

QUICK LINK
TBK

TURNBUCKLE KIT
12 18
24 36
48 60
12" O/C
18" O/C
24" O/C
36" O/C
48" O/C
60" O/C
CUSTOM
(SPECIFY)
Refer to PG. 1, 2 Refer to PG. 2 Refer to PG. 3 Refer to PG. 4,5,6,7 Refer to PG. 6,7 Refer to PG. 8 Refer to PG. 10 SELECT
FROM
LAMPS
PAGE
SELECT
FROM
SHADE
PAGES
SELECT
FROM
SHADE
PAGES

DRY/WET OPTIONAL OPTIONAL SPECIFY
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1595
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 10 of 20 ends

CV2 - FLX/ST -V2
PAGE 2 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
VOLTAGE 120 volts system. No drivers or transformers required.

LAMP HOLDER Black phenolic, medium base, UL weatherproof socket with hook for optional mounting SUPPORT CABLE 3/32" 7X7 Stainless steel support cable, 920 lbs test / 175 lbs working load. Larger cable size available TIE WRAP Heavy duty, black UV rated tie wraps secure power cable to support cable TERMINATION KITS Heavy duty stainless steel termination hardware available, refer to page 8 for details and options.

PROTECTION KIT (SGK) silicone grease kit for socket and lamp extra protection against corrosion and seizing. (Included) SHADES Optional, shapes made out of aluminum, steel and acrylic, refer to page 4,5,6,7 for details and options LAMPS LED, 120V, medium base, dimmable, wet rated. Silicone coated available, refer to page 3 for details & options SPACING Standard socket spacing: 12"O/C, 18"O/C, 24"O/C, 36"O/C, 48"O/C, 60"O/C. Custom spacing available DIMMING Dimmable to less than 10% with Primus lamps and ELV trailing edge type dimmers MAXIMUM RUNS Product is rated for 20A, 125V, 2500W, the maximum run we recommend per NEC is 16A, 1920W max.

POWER CORD 12 / 2 AWG. Black flexible wire, UV rated for outdoor use COLD TESTING ETL cold weather tested to minus 40 degrees C, per IEC 60068-2-1 standards.

PHOTOMETRY ETL tested with bare & shielded lamp. BUG rating: B0-U0-G0 when using DSC7 (7" cone shade) WEIGHT / FT The weight per foot includes: socket, power wire, support cable, tie wraps and lamp Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent
12" O/C 18" O/C 24" O/C 36" O/C 48" O/C 60" O/C

0.24 lbs / ft 0.21 lbs / ft 0.20 lbs / ft 0.19 lbs / ft 0.17 lbs / ft 0.15 lbs / ft Support Cable
Tie Wrap
Socket Hook
Wire
Socket
17/8"
15/8"
3/4"

SPECIFICATIONS
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1596
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 11 of 20 ends

PAGE 3 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES
Consult factory for a different lamp shape, lumens, color or any other special requirements.

TRADITIONAL LAMPS 120V, Wet Rated, Outdoor / Indoor (included ) VINTAGE LAMPS 120V, Wet Rated, Outdoor / Indoor (included ) The above lamps dim to off using ELV/TE trailing edge type dimmers. *Add "SC" suffix for silicone coated finish lamp (Food Service) example: S14/C/24/150/SC *The actual finish color of the silicon-coated lamps may vary, resulting in the clear lamps having a frosted appearance.

LAMPS
S14/C/24/150
S14, 1.5W, 24/27K, 150L G16.5, 3.5W, 24/27K, 350L A19, 7.5W, 3K, 800L G25, 3.5W, 27K 350L G40, 3.5W, 27K 350L 24K, CLEAR 24K, CLEAR
S14/B S14/Y S14/R S14/G

BLUE YELLOW RED GREEN
S14/W/24/150
S14/C/27/150
24K, WHITE 27K, CLEAR
27K, CLEAR
G16/C/24/350
G16/C/27/350
G16/W/27/350 27K, WHITE
G16.5, 3.5W, 24/27K, 350L
G16/C/24/350
G16/C/27/350
G16/W/27/350
24K, CLEAR
27K, CLEAR
27K, WHITE
S14, 1.5W, 150L
S14/C/24/150
S14/W/24/150
S14/C/27/150
24K, CLEAR
24K, WHITE
27K, CLEAR
A19, 7.5W, 3K, 800L
A19/C/3/800
A19/W/3/800
27K, CLEAR
27K, WHITE
G40, 3.5W,27K 350L
G40/C/27/350 27K, CLEAR
A19, 3.5W, 22K, 350L
A19/A/22/350

AMBER GLASS
ST19/A/22/350

AMBER GLASS
ST19, 3.5W, 22K, 350L
G25/A/22/350L

AMBER GLASS
G25, 3.5W, 22K, 350L
G40/A/22/350

AMBER GLASS
G40, 3.5W, 22K, 350L
T10/AG/22

AMBER GLASS
T10, 3.5W, 22K, 350L
100L Available, Consult Factory 200L Available, Consult Factory G25, 3.5W, 27k, 350L
G25/C/27/350
G25/W/27/350
27K, CLEAR
27K, WHITE G25/C/27/350 27K, CLEAR G40/C/27/350 27K, CLEAR G25/W/27/350 27K, WHITE
A19/C/30/800 30K, CLEAR
A19/W/30/800 30K, WHITE
A19, 3.5W, 22K, 350L ST19, 3.5W, 22K, 350L G25, 3.5W, 22K, 350L G40, 3.5W, 22K, 350L T10, 3.5W, 22K, 350L

AMBER GLASS AMBER GLASS AMBER GLASS AMBER GLASS AMBER GLASS A19/A/22/350 ST19/A/22/350 G25/A/22/350 G40/A/22/350 T10/A/22/350 (661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1597
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 12 of 20 ends

PAGE 4 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

METAL SHADES

METAL SHADES
Decostring metal shades are hand crafted, aluminum or steel and feature powder coat finishes.

Most metal shades are shipped separately and easily installed in the field using our gasket ring to secure them to the socket.

All shades dimensions are nominal.

Custom designs, sizes, and finishes are available, consult factory.

HAT SHADE
Shown:Verde Bronze
*Factory Installed
*Aluminum
4"
6"
8"
W
W
W
H
H
H
7/8"
1/4"
3/4"
1 2
2 X
X
X
4"
6"
8"
W
W
W
H
H
H
7/8"
1/4"
3/4"
1 2
2 X
X
X
4"
6"
W
W
H
H
6"
8"
X
X
DSH4
DSH6
DSH8

RADIAL WAVE SHADE
Shown:Powder Coat Black
*Factory Installed
*Aluminum
DSRW4
DSRW6
DSRW8

PERFORATED TUBE SHADE
Shown:Powder Coat Black
*Field Installed
*Aluminum
DSPT4/6
DSPT6/8

0.70 1.38
lbs
lbs

0.13 0.25

0.38 lbs
lbs
lbs

0.13 0.25

0.38 lbs
lbs
lbs

CONE SHADE
*Provides 0/0/0 BUG RATING
Shown:Dark Bronze
*Field Installed
*Aluminum
DSC7
DSC10
DSC12
7"
10"
12"
W
W
W
H
H
H
3"
3"
4"
X
X
X

0.38 0.57

1.13 lbs
lbs
lbs
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)

PERFORATED TUBE WITH TOP DISC
*Field Installed
*Aluminum
DSPTD
With 10"Ø Top Disc
(FINISH) 4" W X 8" H
Shown:Dark Bronze

1.13 lbs
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1598
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 13 of 20 ends

PAGE 5 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

METAL SHADES
Shown:Powder Coat Black
4"
6"
W
W
H
H
6"
8"
X
X

CAGE TUBE SHADE
Shown:Dark Bronze
*Field Installed
*Aluminum and Steel

0.57 0.94
lbs
lbs
DSCT4/6
DSCT6/8
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
5 9
W
W
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
H
H
6 10
X
X

SQUARE CAGE
Shown:Red Finish
*Field Installed
*Aluminum

0.29 0.35
lbs
lbs
DSSC5/6
DSSC9/10
(FINISH)
(FINISH)

ENCLOSED WIRE GUARD
*Factory Installed
*Steel

DSEWG (FINISH)
Shown: Black Finish

0.16 lbs
*Can be used with Cone Shade (DSC10, DSC12)
3W 3/4" 1/2" 5X H

OPEN WIRE GUARD
*Factory or field Installed
*Yellow, silver and black standard finishes
*Steel
DSOWG (FINISH) 5W 1/2" 1/2" 7X H 0.39 lbs
Shown: Yellow Finish

ROUND CAGE
*Field Installed
*Steel
DSRC (FINISH) 8" W X 9" H 0.95 lbs

ROUND SHADE W/GUARD
*Factory Installed
*Aluminum
DSRG (FINISH) 6" W 5 1/8"X H
Shown:Custom Textured Bronze

0.57 lbs
*Delete "G" for no guard
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1599
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 14 of 20 ends

PAGE 6 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

METAL SHADES

CUSTOM SHADE DESIGN
Available
provide your design or consult factory

METAL SHADES FINISH OPTIONS
All finish options shown below are in powder coat finishes.

Custom colors also available. Custom powder coat finishes are available, provide RAL# The actual color of the product may vary from what is seen on electronic devices.

We cannot guarantee that the color you see on your screen accurately reflects the true color of the product.

DB - DARK BRONZE
(Powder Coat, Standard)

VB - VERDE BRONZE
(Powder Coat, Standard)

W - WHITE
(Powder Coat, Standard)

S - SILVER
(Powder Coat, Standard)

B - BLACK
(Powder Coat, Standard)

CC - CUSTOM COLOR
(Powder Coat, Not Standard )
Provide RAL#
or
Consult Factory
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1600
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 15 of 20 ends

PAGE 7 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

PLASTIC SHADES

Y - YELLOW
(Not Standard)

B - BLUE
(Not Standard)

R - RED
(Not Standard)

G - GREEN
(Not Standard)

P - PURPLE
(Not Standard)

O - ORANGE
(Not Standard)

C - CLEAR
(Standard)

OW - OPAL WHITE
(Standard)

F - FROSTED
(Standard)

ACRYLIC SHADES FINISH OPTIONS
Standard finishes are available on all plastic shades.

Optional finishes are only available on spheres and cube shades The actual color of the product may vary from what is seen on electronic devices.

We cannot guarantee that the color you see on your screen accurately reflects the true color of the product.

SPHERE SHADE

CUBE SHADE

TUBE SHADE
Shown:White Acrylic
Shown:Clear Acrylic
*Field Installed
*Field Installed
*Field Installed
*Acrylic
*Acrylic
*Acrylic
DSS8
DSS10
DSS12
DSQ8
DSQ10
DSQ12
DSAT3/6
DSAT6/8
8"
10"
12"
Diameter
Diameter
Diameter
8"
10"
12"
8"
10"
12"
8"
10"
12"
X
X
X
X
X
X
3"
6"
W
W
H
H
6"
8"
X
X

0.57 1.00

1.34 lbs
lbs
lbs

0.57 1.25

1.65 lbs
lbs
lbs

0.55 0.88
lbs
lbs
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)
(FINISH)

PLASTIC SHADES
Decostring plastic shades are made out acrylic for indoor and outdoor use.

All plastic shades are shipped separately and easily attached in the field using our gasket ring to secure them to the socket.

All shades dimensions are nominal.

Custom designs, sizes, and finishes are available, consult factory.

Shown:Frosted Acrylic
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1601
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 16 of 20 ends

PAGE 8 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

TERMINATION KITS
(STK) - STANDARD TERMINATION KIT (For drooped suspensions) Standard termination kit includes stainless steel hardware for both ends of the run:
(2) - 1/4" Quick links 5/16" gate
(2) - 3/32" thimbles
(4) - 3/32" Cable clamps
(TBK) - TURNBUCKLE TERMINATION KIT (For tensioned suspensions) Turnbuckle termination kit includes stainless steel hardware for both ends of the run:
(2) - 1/4" Jaw style turnbuckles
(2) - 3/32" Thimbles
(6) - 3/32" Cable clamps
(QL) - QUICK LINK KIT (For intermediate points)
Quick link kit includes stainless steel hardware for intermediate points on continuous zig-zag or pattern runs:
(1) - 1/4" Quick link 5/16" gate
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1602
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 17 of 20 ends

PAGE 9 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

POWER CONNECTIONS

HARDWIRE / WET LOCATION

POWER PLUG / DRY & WET LOCATION POLE HARDWIRE / WET LOCATION

HARDWIRE / DRY, DAMP LOCATION
Decostrings are designed and listed for dry, damp, wet location and permanent installation.

Electrical connections must be done by a qualified electrician and according to local and NEC requirements.

Below are some options and details of customary installations. All electrical hardware required for the installation by others.

Power plug, must connect to a weatherproof outlet with cover.

GFCI not recommended due to false tripping.

Pole connection can include a cord grip at the top /side of the pole with wiring connections protected under the pole cap.

Drip Loop
Drip Loop
Drip Loop
STK or TBK (KIT)
Aircraft Cable Aircraft Cable
Aircraft Cable
Power Cord
Power Cord
Weatherproof cordgrip Fitting
½" Cordgrip for 2 cords
¾" Cordgrip for 3 or 4 cords
Power Cord
Weatherproof
Junction Box
(By Others)
Weatherproof
Outlet with
cover
(By Others)
Plug
(By Others)
Field Installed
Junction Box
(By Others)
Weatherproof
Cordgrip Fitting
(By Others)
Connector Fitting
(By Others)
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1603
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 18 of 20 ends

PAGE 10 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

DESIGN GUIDELINES

RUN LENGTH DETAILS

RUN LAYOUTS
4’
Aircraft Cable
Standard
(Other Specify)
12” Minimum
Distance Suggested
From
Attachment Points
12” Minimum
Distance Suggested
From
Attachment Points
End Cap
Attachment Point
Spacing
Measure Run Length
From Attachment Points
4’
Aircraft Cable &
Power lead
Standard
(Other Specify)
Attachment Point
STK or TBK
STK or TBK
STK or TBK
STK or TBK
STK or TBK
STK or TBK
QL-Quick Link
QL-Quick Link
QL-Quick Link
QL-Quick Link
QL-Quick Link
Decostrings are custom-ordered and built to specific run lengths and socket lamp spacing.

Each run length comes with a standard 4' power lead on one end, along with 4' support cable tails on both ends for suspension and adjustment, for both tensioned and drooping installations. See illustration below for more details.

The Illustrations below are examples of the most common run layouts.

STRAIGHT - ONE SINGLE RUN (One end power Feed)
ZIG ZAG - ONE SINGLE RUN (One end power Feed)
ZIG ZAG - MULTIPLE RUNS (Center power Feed)
STK or TBK
Power Feed
Power Feed
Power Feed
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1604
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 19 of 20 ends

PAGE 11 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

DESIGN GUIDELINES - AFG & APPLICATIONS
(AFG) - ABOVE FINISH GRADE (Height Minimum Requirements)

VERSATILE APPLICATIONS
See illustrations below for AFG-Above finish grade, NEC (225-18) minimum height requirements.

Other local codes may have different height requirements.

The Illustrations below demonstrate just a few of the countless ways Decostrings can be used and applied. 10'
Minimum
18'
Minimum

PEDESTRIAN VEHICULAR
Building to Building Pole to Pole
Indoors
Building to Pole
Pergolas Extreme Cold Weather
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1605
San Carlos Downtown Phase 1A
240852.000
100% Submittal / Bid Set
30 October 2025
Type:

Page 20 of 20 ends

PAGE 12 of 12
DSW 12-24 / v2

DECOSTRING - SERIES

PHOTOMETRICS / BUG RATINGS
BARE LAMP (S14/1.5W/27K/150L)
LAMP WITH 7" CONE SHADE (S14/1.5W/27K/150L)

PHOTOMETRICS

PHOTOMETRICS
6 12
18 23
1 2
Maximum Candela = 23.392 Located At Horizontal Angle = 30, Vertical Angle = 85 # 1 - Vertical Plane Through Horizontal Angles (30 - 210) (Through Max. Cd.) # 2 - Horizontal Cone Through Vertical Angle (85) (Through Max. Cd.)

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504703.IES

POLAR GRAPH
6 12
18 23
1 2

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504704.IES

POLAR GRAPH
Maximum Candela = 22.135 Located At Horizontal Angle = 30, Vertical Angle = 65 # 1 - Vertical Plane Through Horizontal Angles (30 - 210) (Through Max. Cd.) # 2 - Horizontal Cone Through Vertical Angle (65) (Through Max. Cd.) 6 12
18 23
1 2
Maximum Candela = 23.392 Located At Horizontal Angle = 30, Vertical Angle = 85 # 1 - Vertical Plane Through Horizontal Angles (30 - 210) (Through Max. Cd.) # 2 - Horizontal Cone Through Vertical Angle (85) (Through Max. Cd.)

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504703.IES

POLAR GRAPH
6 12
18 23
1 2
Maximum Candela = 23.392 Located At Horizontal Angle = 30, Vertical Angle = 85 # 1 - Vertical Plane Through Horizontal Angles (30 - 210) (Through Max. Cd.) # 2 - Horizontal Cone Through Vertical Angle (85) (Through Max. Cd.)

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504703.IES

POLAR GRAPH
BUG RATING (B0-U3-G1)
BUG RATING (B0-U0-G0)
(Dark Sky Compliant)
Luminaire Lumens
Back Front
Uplight
15 30
45 59
0 30
60 80
90 100
30 60
80 90
100

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504703.IES

LUMINAIRE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (LCS) GRAPH
Luminaire Lumens:

Front: Low=2.7, Medium=16.3, High=18.9, Very High=10.5
Back: Low=2.7, Medium=16.3, High=18.9, Very High=10.5
Uplight: Low=20.6, High=59.4
BUG Rating : B0-U3-G1
5 9
14 18
Luminaire Lumens Uplight
0 30
60 80
90 100
30 60
80 90
100

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504704.IES

LUMINAIRE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (LCS) GRAPH
Luminaire Lumens:

Front: Low=3.9, Medium=18.2, High=14.3, Very High=0.5
Back: Low=3.9, Medium=18.2, High=14.3, Very High=0.5
Uplight: Low=0.0, High=0.0
BUG Rating : B0-U0-G0
Luminaire Lumens
Back Front
Uplight
15 30
45 59
0 30
60 80
90 100
30 60
80 90
100

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504703.IES

LUMINAIRE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (LCS) GRAPH
Luminaire Lumens:

Front: Low=2.7, Medium=16.3, High=18.9, Very High=10.5
Back: Low=2.7, Medium=16.3, High=18.9, Very High=10.5
Uplight: Low=20.6, High=59.4
BUG Rating : B0-U3-G1
Luminaire Lumens
Back Front
Uplight
15 30
45 59
0 30
60 80
90 100
30 60
80 90
100

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504703.IES

LUMINAIRE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (LCS) GRAPH
Luminaire Lumens:

Front: Low=2.7, Medium=16.3, High=18.9, Very High=10.5
Back: Low=2.7, Medium=16.3, High=18.9, Very High=10.5
Uplight: Low=20.6, High=59.4
BUG Rating : B0-U3-G1
6 12
18 23
1 2

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504704.IES

LUMINAIRE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (LCS) GRAPH
Luminaire Lumens:

Front: Low=3.9, Medium=18.2, High=14.3, Very High=0.5
Back: Low=3.9, Medium=18.2, High=14.3, Very High=0.5
Uplight: Low=0.0, High=0.0
BUG Rating : B0-U0-G0
5 9
14 18
Luminaire Lumens Uplight
0 30
60 80
90 100
30 60
80 90
100

IES ROAD REPORT
PHOTOMETRIC FILENAME : L051504704.IES

LUMINAIRE CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (LCS) GRAPH
Luminaire Lumens:

Front: Low=3.9, Medium=18.2, High=14.3, Very High=0.5
Back: Low=3.9, Medium=18.2, High=14.3, Very High=0.5
Uplight: Low=0.0, High=0.0
BUG Rating : B0-U0-G0

LAMP CONVERSION CHART TO RATIO IES PHOTOMETRY

LAMP WATTS LUMENS MULTIPLIER
S14 27K 1.5 150 1.0 (Test Lamp)
G16.5 27K 2.0 200 1.33
G16.5 27K 3.5 325 2.16
A15 27K 4.5 500 3.33
ST19 22K 3.5 300 2.0
(661) 495 - 5700 | www.primuslighting.com
Due to continued product improvements and enhancements, Primus Lighting Manufacturing Company reserves the right to alter specifications, dimensions, data, and or materials without notice. Please visit our website to view the most current information.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1606
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0281300 - 1
Security Camera System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 281300 – SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Network cameras

2. Mounting hardware

3. Video storage

4. Power supply

1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 60950-1 – Safety of Information Technology Equipment B. IEEE 802.3af/at – Power over Ethernet (PoE)
C. TIA/EIA-568 – Telecommunications Cabling Standard
D. FCC Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices
E. NDAA - National Defense Authorization Act

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall provide a shop drawing detailing the camera location and type that are necessary to monitor the project area consistent with these specifications.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data sheets for each type of camera, network switch, and accessory.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 3 years of experience installing networked security systems.

B. Mockups: Provide one operational camera installation for review of image quality and field of view before proceeding with remainder of work.

1.5 BASIS OF SECURITY SYSTEM
A. The City of San Carlos has a security system installed, operated, and maintained by Edgeworth Security. This system offers the following elements:

1. A cloud-based camera and security system that uses Ava Aware video management software, Avigilon/Ava cameras, and supporting network hardware.

2. The system provides 90-day video storage, encrypted cloud connectivity, tamper alerts, mobile access, and audit trails, with five-year licenses for software and cloud services.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1607
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0281300 - 2
Security Camera System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3. Edgeworth Security is responsible for all cabling, equipment installation, programming, and training, and also provides ongoing technical support and annual maintenance through a renewable Service Level Agreement.

4. Provide 24/7 remote monitoring services for system health monitoring, diagnostics, and support.

B. The camera systems provide automatic monitoring through built-in analytics and alerts, such as motion detection, tamper detection (if the camera is moved, hit, or blurred), and system health checks (offline status, storage issues, or network errors). These events trigger real-time notifications to the Video Management System (VMS), allowing remote staff or city personnel to respond without continuous live viewing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide cameras, network equipment, and related appurtenances that complies with the existing system as installed and maintained by Edgeworth Security.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall provide a video surveillance system to monitor the project area with no less than four (4) cameras as shown on the Plans.

B. Cameras shall provide:

1. Minimum resolution: 5MP to 20MP as required to monitor the area

2. Wide Dynamic Range (WDR)

3. Low-light operation with infrared illumination

4. Onboard analytics and event detection

5. Secure cloud connectivity and encrypted data transmission

6. Compliance with NDAA standards
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surfaces are level, structurally sound, and suitable for installation of camera assemblies. Confirm proper network and power connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cameras, brackets, mounts, and cabling per manufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings.

B. Ensure all cameras are securely fastened and properly aimed.

C. Terminate cabling neatly in enclosures or junction boxes.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1608
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0281300 - 3
Security Camera System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
D. Connect all cameras via PoE or network switches as indicated.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test complete system to ensure full functionality.

B. Verify image clarity, field of view, and correct time synchronization.

C. Test storage and playback functions.

D. Record system test results and submit report.

3.4 TRAINING
A. Provide overall training of the system’s operation.

3.5 WARRANTY AND SERVICE PLAN
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 1-year warranty on all equipment and components.

B. Provide a 1-year Service Maintenance Plan that includes the following:

1. Quarterly preventative maintenance inspections for CCTV, access control, and intrusion systems.

2. 24/7 phone support with remote diagnostics.

3. On-site service response within 72 hours.

END OF SECTION 0281300

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1609
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 311000 - 1
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 311000 – SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for clearing, grubbing and disposing of vegetation, including bushes, brush, trees, stumps, fallen timber, logs, roots, rubbish, refuse trash, and debris within the indicated site limits.

B. Protection from injury or defacement of trees and other vegetation and objects indicated to be preserved.

C. Removal, salvage, or other disposition of slabs, footings and foundations; existing pavement, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, headwalls, walls, and steps; utility service facilities; guardrail and posts, highway and street signs and fences; and other miscellaneous structures and site improvements which interfere with construction.

1.2 REFERENCES
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4 Construction Safety Orders California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, Chapter 33, Site Work, Demolition and Construction
State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Specifications

1. Section 17-2 Clearing and Grubbing

1.3 JOBSITE CONDITIONS
A. Stockpile salvaged material in a secured location.

B. Clear and restore areas used for the Contractor's convenience. Restore such areas to their original condition, and provide mulching, seeding and planting as required.

C. Protect survey markers and monuments, existing improvements, and adjacent properties from removal and damage.

D. Give written notices to utility companies and municipal departments requesting discontinuance of services to areas which will be affected by the site preparation work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1610
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 311000 - 2
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1.4 CARE OF EXISTING TREES
A. Trees and plants indicated on the Contract Drawings to remain and to be preserved shall be protected from damage by constructing suitable barriers or fences at, or near, the driplines of the trees and plants. Vehicles, equipment, materials, and debris shall not be placed or parked in these areas or under trees to remain.

B. Feed, water, and maintain protected trees and plants in a healthy, growing condition during the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and Equipment

1. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, facilities, and services as required for performing site clearing and preparation work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS
A. Clearing and Grubbing

1. Perform clearing and grubbing as necessary to remove vegetation and objectionable material from the site. Clear the site within the limits indicated, and remove cleared materials and debris from the site.

2. Remove stumps and roots completely in excavation areas and under embankments where the original ground level is within 3.5 feet of subgrade or slope of embankments. In embankment areas, where the original ground level is more than 3.5 feet below the subgrade or slope of embankment, cut off trees, stumps, and brush to within six inches of the ground.

3. Do not start earthwork operations in areas where clearing and grubbing are not complete, except that stumps and large roots may be removed concurrently with excavation.

B. Where the work includes requirements for wood chip mulch, acceptable material from clearing and grubbing activities may be used to produce such mulch.

C. Tree Branches

1. Remove tree branches overhanging trackways, roadways, and other designated areas of the site to within 20 feet of finish grade. Cut off branches neatly and close to the tree boles.

Remove other branches as necessary to present a balanced appearance. Treat scars resulting from tree branch removal with a heavy coat of an approved asphaltic tree paint.

D. Removal

1. Remove existing pavements, structures, and site improvements which interfere with construction, where demolition is not indicated.

2. Remove walls and masonry construction to a minimum depth of two feet below existing ground level in areas where such items do not interfere with construction.

3. Slabs may be broken for drainage and left in place where they are not detrimental to the structural integrity of the fill or structure to be placed above.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1611
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 311000 - 3
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
E. Disposal of Removed Materials and Debris

1. Dispose of removed materials, waste, trash, and debris in a safe, acceptable manner, in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Burying of trash and debris on the site will not be permitted. Burning of trash and debris at the site will not be permitted.

3. Remove trash and debris from the site at frequent intervals so that its presence will not delay the progress of the work.

4. Removed materials, waste, trash, and debris shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the District's property and disposed of in a legal manner.

Location of disposal site and length of haul shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

F. Salvage

1. Items or materials to be salvaged are indicated on the Contract Drawings and in the Contract Specifications.

2. Protect metallic coatings on salvaged items. Remove adhering concrete from salvaged items.

3. Repair, or replace with new material, salvaged material damaged or destroyed due to Contractors negligence.

END OF SECTION 311000

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1612
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321313 - 1
Site Concrete Formwork
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 0321313 – SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Forms

1. Metal forms

2. Plywood forms

3. Plywood forms

4. Steel ties and or spreaders
B. Wall Forms

1. Exposed concrete surfaces

2. Unexposed concrete surfaces

3. Sealant

1.2 REFERENCES
ACI 301 Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for Concrete
APA PS-1 American Plywood Association Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
B. Form release agent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Except for metal forms, use new materials conforming to ACI 347.

B. Materials may be reused during progress of work, provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, and capable of producing formwork of required quality.

C. For footings and foundations use Douglas fir boards or planks secured to wood or steel stakes, substantially constructed to shapes as indicated and to support required loads.

D. For studs, walers and supports, use standard grade or better Douglas fir, dimensions as required to support loads but not less than two-inches x four-inches.

E. Exposed Concrete Surfaces

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1613
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321313 - 2
Site Concrete Formwork
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1. Use 3/4-inch minimum thickness Douglas fir plywood, grade B/B, Class I or II, exterior, sanded both sides, complying with National Standard PS-1.

2. Seal edges and coat both faces with colorless coating that will not affect application of applied finishes.

F. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces

1. Use one-inch x six-inch minimum Douglas fir boards, surfaced one side and two edges, or 3/4-inch minimum thickness Douglas fir plywood, grade B/B plyform Class I or II, sanded both sides.

2.2 DESIGN FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork so that it will safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by concrete structure.

B. Carry vertical and lateral loads to ground by formwork system and in-place construction that has attained strength for that purpose.

C. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape alignment, elevation and position.

D. Design forms and falsework to include assumed values of load, dead load, weight of moving equipment operated on formwork, concrete mix, height of concrete drop, vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability, and other factors pertinent to safety of structure during construction.

E. Provide shores and struts during concrete operations, using wedges or jacks, or a combination thereof.

F. Support form materials by structural members spaced sufficiently close to prevent objectionable deflection.

G. Fit forms placed in successive units for continuous surfaces to accurate alignment, free from irregularities, and within allowable tolerances.

H. Provide formwork, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and prevent fins.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS
A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown on the drawings, and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb Work in finished structure.

B. Provide for offsets, recesses, chamfers, anchorages, inserts and other features as required C. All reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, dowels, and inserts to be accurately placed and securely held in place prior to placing of concrete or grout.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1614
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321313 - 3
Site Concrete Formwork
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

B. Provide crush plates where stripping my damage cast concrete surfaces.

C. Hold inner and outer forms for vertical concrete together with combination steel ties and spreaders.

D. Space ties symmetrically in tiers and rows, each tier plum from top to bottom and each row level.

E. For exposed concrete surfaces, provide form ties of removable type with she-bolts equipped with permanent plugs.

3.3 FORMS FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE
A. Drill forms to suit ties being used, and to prevent leakage of cement paste around tie holes B. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes.

C. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets.

D. Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections.

E. Use extra studs, wales and bracing to prevent objectionable bowing of forms between studs, and to avoid bowed appearance in concrete.

F. Do not use narrow strips of form material which will produce bow.

3.4 CORNER TREATMENT
A. Unless shown otherwise, form chamfers with ½ inch x ½ inch strips, accurately formed and surfaced to produce uniformly straight lines and tight edges.

B. Extend terminal edges to required limit, and miter chamfer strips at changes in direction.

3.5 FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Coat form contact surfaces with form release agent compound before reinforcement is placed.

B. Do not allow excess form release agent material to accumulate in forms or to come in contact with surfaces which will bond to fresh concrete.

C. Apply form release agent material in strict accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations.

3.6 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not disturb or remove forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit form removal with complete safety.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1615
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321313 - 4
Site Concrete Formwork
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
B. Do not strip abutment forms in less than seven days.

C. Do not remove shoring until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its own weight, load upon it, and added load of construction.

3.7 FINISHED SURFACES
A. Exercise care in removing forms from finished concrete surfaces so that surfaces are not marred or gouged.

B. Release sleeve nuts or clamps, and pull form ties neatly.

C. Do not permit steel spreaders, form ties, or other metal to project from, or be visible on, any concrete surface except where indicated.

D. Solidly pack form tie holes, rod holes, and similar holes in the concrete with approved grout.

END OF SECTION 031000

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1616
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 312000 - 1
Earthmoving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 312000 - EARTHMOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for the excavation, filling, recompacting, grading and disposal of excess material.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312333 – Trenching and Backfilling
B. Section 321123 – Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C136-84a – Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregate B. ASTM D1557 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort C. ASTM D2922 – Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods D. Caltrans – State of California Standard Specifications; latest edition Section 19-3
E. Geotechnical Report – Harrington Park-Laurel Street Plaza Geotechnical Investigation, by ROMIG Engineers, dated August 5, 2025.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Compaction

1. The degree of compaction is specified as percent compaction. Maximum densities refer to the maximum laboratory dry soil densities obtainable at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557.

2. Percent compaction (relative compaction) is the ratio of the measured field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density.

B. Excavation Slope: Excavation slope shall be defined as an inclined surface formed by removing material from below existing grade.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data

1. Fill materials

2. Source of concrete and aggregate for approval

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1617
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 312000 - 2
Earthmoving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
B. Test Reports

1. Gradation (ASTM C136)

2. Density-In-Place (ASTM D2922)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILL MATERIALS
A. Class 2 Aggregate Base
Class 2 aggregate base for subsequent backfill and/or pavement base to be ¾ inches maximum Class 2 aggregate base conforming to Caltrans, Section 26.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. Surplus Material

1. Unless otherwise specified, surplus excavated material shall be disposed of in accordance with applicable ordinances and environment requirements at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Hauling

1. When hauling is down over highways or city streets, loads shall be trimmed and the vehicle shelf areas shall be cleaned after each loading.

2. Loads shall be watered after trimming to eliminate dust.

C. C.Subgrade

1. Unless directed otherwise on the drawings, existing subgrade shall be compacted to 90% RC, 12” in depth, prior to placement of base material.

2. Subgrade shall be inspected for compliance to the soils report by the City/Geotechnical engineer prior to filling or on achieving final cut depth D. Finish Grading

1. Finish surfaces shall be smooth, compacted and free from irregularities. The degree of finish shall be that normally obtainable with a blade-grader.

2. Finish grades shall be as specified on the plans, except where a local change in elevation is required to match existing conditions, or to ensure proper drainage.

3. When the work is at an intermediate stage of completion, lines and grades shall be as specified within 0.5 foot or as necessary to provide adequate drainage.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers and compacted with power operated tampers, rollers, idlers, or vibratory equipment. Material type, maximum layer depth, relative compaction, and general application are specified in Table A, below. Unless otherwise specified, fill classes shall be used where specified in Table A under General Application.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1618
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 312000 - 3
Earthmoving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
Table A: Fill Classification
Material Type
Maximum Uncompressed Layer Depth
(Inches)
Minimum Relative
Compaction (Percent)
General Application
Aggregate Base 8" 95% Roadway Grades

3.3 TESTS
A. Inspection Trenches

1. Owner will direct Contractor to construct inspection trenches in compacted or consolidated backfill to determine that Contractor has complied with these Specifications.

END OF SECTION 312000

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1619
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

GEOFOAM
31 23 00 - 1
SECTION 31 23 00

EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE GEOFOAM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 This work shall consist of furnishing and placing expanded polystyrene, referred to in this specification as EPS Geofoam fill, in accordance with the details shown in the plans, these specifications, Division 31 Earthworks Sections, or as directed by the engineer.

1.2 Reference Publications - Some or all of the publications referred to in this specification, form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The latest edition of the referenced American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) publication shall govern.

ASTM Designation
C 165 Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulation C 203 Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation C 303 Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block an Board-Type Thermal Insulation
C 390 Practice for Sampling and Acceptance of Thermal Insulation lots D 1621 Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics D 1622 Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
D 1623 Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics C 2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)
D 6817 Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam D 7557 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam PART 2 - MATERIAL

2.1 Manufacturer with a minimum of 10 years documented experience in the manufacture of lightweight, geo-synthetic fill. Manufacturer must also have a UL classification in category BRYX. Manufacturer must also maintain a UL classification in category QORW that ensures physical properties in accordance with ASTM D 6817. Third-party certifications that only include ASTM C 578 physical properties will not be considered as an alternative equal and will be rejected.

2.2 Geofoam may be fabricated using material with recycled content provided the physical properties of Table 1 are met. Unless the project dictates otherwise, the blocks shall have a height of at least .91 m (36 inches), a width of at least 1.22 m (48 inches), and length of at least 2.44 m (96 inches). All blocks shall be within tolerances of 0.5% of respective height, width and length dimensions.

Additional field and/or shop trimming and cutting will be required as necessitated by the geometry of the fill being constructed.

2.3 Geofoam blocks shall have the following physical properties:

TABLE 1: Physical Properties of EPS Geofoam
TYPE - ASTM D6817 EPS15

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1620
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

GEOFOAM
31 23 00 - 2
Density, min., kg/m 3, ( lb/ft3 ) 14.4
(0.90)
Compressive Resistance
@ 1% deformation, min., kPa (psi)
25 (3.6)
Flexural Strength min., kPa (psi) 172
(25.0)
Elastic Modulus, min., kPA (psi) 2500
(360)
Oxygen Index, min.,
volume % 24.0
Geofoam should be considered combustible and should not be exposed to open flame or any source of ignition. The Geofoam shall be manufactured using modified expanded polystyrene. Manufacturer must have a UL classification in category BRYX.

2.4 Each Geofoam block shall be marked with the manufacturer’s identification, and type.

Approved Material:

Insulfoam Manufacturing Facility, 5635 Schaefer Avenue, Chino, CA 91710, Phone: 909-591-7425, Fax: 909-591-8083.

Insulfoam Manufacturing Facility, 1155 Business Park Drive, Building A, Dixon, CA 95620, Phone:
707-678-6900, Fax: 707-678-2962

2.5 No product substitutions permitted.

PART 3 - SAMPLING AND TESTING

3.1 Quality assurance testing and sampling, to monitor the conformance of the Geofoam fill with the specification requirements, will be completed as directed by the engineer. Density, compression and geometry (dimensional tolerances) testing shall be conducted using 50.8 mm (2”) cubes cut from representative blocks. Blocks in conformance with contract requirements can be used to make required fills.

3.2 Testing shall be conducted on samples taken from the first 76 m3 (100 yd3) of each Geofoam type manufactured for project delivery and at a rate of one test per 1147 m3 (1500 yd3) thereafter. No more than 76 m3 (100 yd3) of Geofoam shall be manufactured until the Engineer has approved the material.

3.3 The Engineer has the right to randomly sample the manufacturing plant. If any block does not conform to the physical requirements it may be rejected by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1621
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

GEOFOAM
31 23 00 - 3
PART 4 - SUBMITTALS

4.1 See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

4.2 Prior to the start of work the Contractor shall submit for approval the following:

A. A plan sheet showing a profile and section view of the proposed embankment. The drawing shall clearly indicate the size, type, location and orientation of all Geofoam blocks.

B. The location and type of connectors.

C. Proposed ballasting or guying techniques.

D. Proposed placement methods.

4.3 Prior to the delivery of the EPS Geofoam blocks, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a copy of manufacturer’s test reports or a third party’s certified test report showing that the Geofoam blocks meet the physical properties and standards listed above in Table 1.

4.4 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for the first 76 m3 (100 yd3) and for every 1147 m3 (1500 yd3) thereafter before the Geofoam is delivered to the site.

4.5 The Certificate of Compliance shall include current inspection reports showing that the Geofoam manufacturer is in compliance with a UL follow-up service program for both flame and physical properties. In addition, computer generated stress-strain data and the accompanying curves shall be produced from compressive testing and supplied to the Engineer. The curves and/or data shall clearly indicate the stress at 1% strain and the modulus of elasticity.

PART 5 - PROTECTION

5.1 The Contractor shall prevent damage to the Geofoam blocks during delivery, storage, and construction. Prior to delivery of Geofoam block fill to the project site, the Contractor shall review and be thoroughly knowledgeable with the manufacturer's care and handling recommendations. Any Geofoam block that is exposed to sun light for more than six months shall be covered with an opaque material to prevent ultraviolet light degradation.

5.2 The Contractor shall protect the Geofoam blocks from: (1) Organic solvents such as acetone, benzene, and paint thinner; (2) Petroleum based solvents such as gasoline and diesel fuel; (3) Open flames.

5.3 Placement of embankment soil cover material will require special procedures and careful selection of appropriate construction equipment to prevent damage to the Geofoam fill. No heavy construction equipment or vehicles shall be allowed directly on the Geofoam.

5.4 Any damage to the Geofoam blocks resulting from the Contractor’s vehicles, equipment or operations, shall be replaced by the Contractor.

5.5 Damage to Geofoam shall be corrected as follows:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1622
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

GEOFOAM
31 23 00 - 4
A. Slight damage less than .0283 m3 (1 ft3) may be left in place as is.

B. Moderate damage between .0283 m3 (1 ft3) and 1 m3 (35.3 ft3) shall be filled with sand.

C. Geofoam blocks with excessive damage (i.e. exceeding the "moderate" category) shall be replaced with Geofoam blocks which meet the damage material design properties. Geofoam blocks not meeting the damage criteria may be cut to eliminate the excessive damage and the remaining, undamaged, portion of the block may be used within the fill, provided the undamaged portion of the block meets all other design requirements.

PART 6 - SUBGRADE PREPARATION

6.1 Clear and grub site.

6.2 Dewater site as required.

6.3 The grade on which the Geofoam fill will be placed shall be graded to the elevations shown in the plans. The finish-grade shall be smooth and free from holes and protruding objects. A 200 mm (8 in) leveling pad shall be constructed over the prepared grade. The leveling pad material shall be sand, pea gravel or any locally available permeable material approved by the Engineer of record.

PART 7 - PLACEMENT

7.1 EPS Geofoam fill shall be placed to the lines and grades shown in the plans and as directed by the Engineer. The surface of a layer of Geofoam blocks to receive additional Geofoam blocks shall be constructed with a variation in surface tolerance of no more than 15 mm (0.05 feet) in any 3 m (10 ft) interval. All blocks shall accurately fit relative to adjacent blocks. No gaps greater than 20 mm (0.07ft) will be allowed on vertical joints.

7.2 The finished surface of the Geofoam immediately beneath pavement sections shall be constructed to within the tolerance of zero to minus 60 mm (0.20 ft) of the indicated grade.

7.3 The finished surface of the Geofoam on side slopes that receive soil cover shall be constructed to within a tolerance of plus 90 mm (0.30 ft) to minus 90 mm (0.30 ft) of the indicated grade.

7.4 Blocks placed in a row in a particular layer shall be offset .6 m (2.0 ft) relative to blocks placed in adjacent rows of the same layer as shown on the plans. In order to avoid continuous joints, each subsequent layer of blocks shall be rotated on the horizontal plane 90 degrees from the direction of placement of the previous layer placed.

7.5 When needed to prevent blocks sliding during embankment construction, Insulgrip plates or a urethane adhesive such as Flexible FastTM should be placed between horizontal layers of blocks. For the number required, refer to Section 8 of this specification.

7.6 Blocks shall be cut using a hot wire.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1623
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE

GEOFOAM
31 23 00 - 5

7.7 Because of the light unit-weight of the geofoam fill, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide temporary weighting and/or guying as necessary until all the blocks are built into a homogeneous mass, and the pavement section as well as any soil cover are in place.

7.8 Embankment over the side slopes of the Geofoam fills shall be placed starting at the bottom of the slope in such a manner to prevent damage to the Geofoam. Finished Geofoam on side slopes shall have a minimum of 0.61 m (2 ft) embankment cover.

7.9 The embankment material, in areas beyond the lateral distances necessary to protect Geofoam from damage, shall be compacted according to the Geotechnical Report prepared by Rockridge Geotechnical. The intent of this requirement is to minimize the encompassed zone around the Geofoam fill.

7.10 During placement of the load distribution slab over the top surface of the Geofoam fill it is permissible to use rebar supports to support the reinforcing steel during concrete placement.

PART 8 - CONNECTORS

8.1 Connectors shall be galvanized steel multi-barbed connectors or a urethane adhesive. Each connector shall have a lateral holding strength of at least 27.22 kg (60 lbs) when tested with an EPS15 Geofoam.

8.2 Install a minimum of 2 connectors for each 1.22 m (4 ft) x 2.44 m (8 ft) section of Geofoam material or as shown on plans or directed by the Engineer. Press firmly into the rigid foam until the connector is flush with the surface. Position the next foam block as specified and seat firmly before placing subsequent blocks.

END OF SECTION 31 23 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1624
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 312333 - 1
312333 Trenching and Backfilling
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 312333 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for excavating, backfilling and compacting for the installation of pipe and pipeline appurtenances (i.e. manholes, catch basins, area drains, etc.)

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earthmoving
B. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES
A. California Water Service Company District Standard Specifications - Latest Edition B. City of San Carlos General Provisions Specifications - Latest Edition C. City of San Carlos Standard Details - Latest Edition D. PG&E Standard Specifications - Latest Edition
E. AT&T Standard Specifications - Latest Edition
F. California Plumbing Code - Latest Edition
G. Caltrans Standard Specifications and Drawings - Latest Edition PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Trench backfill shall consist of Class 2 Aggregate Base, unless otherwise noted.

2.2 PIPING MATERIAL
A. All piping material shall conform to respective utility agency and the California Plumbing Code.

2.3 BURIED WARNKING AND IDENTIFICATIN TAPE
A. Polyethylene plastic and metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1625
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 312333 - 2
312333 Trenching and Backfilling
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
Provide tape on rolls, 3-inch minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to read, ‘CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW” or similar wording. Color and printing shall be permanent, unaffected by moisture or soil.

1. Warning Tape Color Codes.
a. Red: Electric.
b. Yellow: Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials.
c. Orange: Telephone and Other Communications.
d. Blue: Water Systems.
e. Green: Sewer Systems.
f. White: Steam Systems.
g. Grey: Compressed Air.

2. Warning Tape for Metallic Piping: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 0.003 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.

3. Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping: Polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above. Minimum thickness of the tape shall be 0.004 inch. Tape shall have a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Tape shall be manufactured with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3-feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.

2.4 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
A. Detection wire shall be insulated single strand, solid copper wire with a minimum of 12 AWG.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION
A. General

1. Keep trench dry throughout construction operations

2. Trench excavation shall follow the alignment of the pipe or utility centerline

3. No more than 100 LF of trench shall be open at one time B. Shoring and Bracing

1. Contractor is responsible for any damage or injury resulting from his construction operations. Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, all necessary repair work or reconstruction.

2. Contractor will be responsible for all shoring with bracing design and installation.

C. Excavation Required Beyond Trench Limits

1. Excavation (bell holes) where necessary in the sides and bottom of the trench at pipe joint locations shall be large enough to make joints and permit inspection.

2. Excavation to a greater depth than shown on the plans may be ordered by the Project Geotechnical Consultant if the native material at the bottom of the trench will not provide proper support for the pipe or if the excavation is in rock.

3. Remove all adjacent, saturated material where pipeline leaks occur.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1626
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 312333 - 3
312333 Trenching and Backfilling
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3.2 UTILITIES
A. Location

1. Approximate known locations of underground utilities and structures are indicated on the plans. Contractor shall determine exact location of underground utilities and structures prior to construction.

2. Adjustments of pipe alignment and elevation will be authorized by the Owner where exploratory work indicates the need.

B. Excavation Around Utilities

1. Excavation and other work under or adjacent to utilities shall not interfere with their safe operations and use.

2. Probe carefully to determine the exact location of utility and hand excavate where necessary to avoid damage.

3. In the event of damage incurred during construction near such structures or property, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and other appropriate utility or public safety authorities and shall arrange for immediate repairs at Contractor’s expense.

C. Tunneling Under Utilities

1. Tunneling may be allowed for short distances with the approval from the Project Geotechnical Consultant.

3.3 BLASTING
A. Blasting will not be permitted

3.4 BACKFILL OF TRENCHES
A. Prior to backfilling, the trench shall be cleared of all wood and debris.

B. Backfill pipeline trenches to the level of the original ground surface or the underside of the pavement base course.

C. Backfill material shall not be dropped directly on the pipe.

D. Carefully remove timbering, sheeting, shoring and sheet piling, according to the instructions of the shoring system designer or the manufacturer, using methods that will minimize caving. If caving is occurring, the shoring system will be required to remain in place up to one to six inches above the top of the pipe.

E. Jetting of trench backfill is not permitted.

F. If trench has been excavated below the specified depth, that portion of the trench shall be backfilled with Class 2 Aggregate Base or select material and compacted before pipe installation, at the Contractor’s expense.

G. If pipe or conduit has less than 24 inches of final cover, trench shall be backfilled with Control Density Fill (CDF) to a depth specified by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION 312333

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1627
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321123 - 1
321123 Aggregate Base
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 321123 - AGGREGATE BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for furnishing, spreading, and compacting aggregate base course for pavements as indicated.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM D1557 – Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft³)
ASTM D1556 – Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method ASTM D2216 – Test Methods for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock
ASTM D2487 – Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
ASTM D422 – Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils ASTM C136 – Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM D2419 – Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate ASTM D5821 – Test Method for Determining Percentage of Fractured Particles in Coarse Aggregate
ASTM D3744 – Test Method for Aggregate Durability Index ASTM D2844 – Test Method for Resistance “R” Value and Expansion Pressure of Compacted Soils
ASTM D6938 – Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
B. State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Specifications:

Section 26 Aggregate Bases
C. State of California, Department of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard Test Methods:

Calif. Test 201 Method of Soil and Aggregate Sample Preparation Aggregates Calif. Test 202 Method of Tests for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1628
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321123 - 2
321123 Aggregate Base
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
Calif. Test 205 Method of Determining Percentage of Crushed Particles Calif. Test 217 Method of Test for Sand Equivalent
Calif. Test 229 Method of Test for Durability Index
Calif. Test 231 Method of Test for Relative Compaction of Aggregates Calif. Test 301 Method of Test for Resistance “R” Value of Treated and Untreated Bases, Subbases and Basement Soils by the Stabilometer
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL
A. Class 2 aggregate base shall be free of vegetable matter and other deleterious substances.

Coarse aggregate, material contained on the No. 4 sieve, shall consist of material of which 25 percent by weight shall be crushed particles as determined by ASTM Test method No. D5821.

Class 2 aggregate base shall conform to one of the following gradings, determined in accordance with ASTM Test method No. C136:

Sieve Sizes Percentage Passing Sieves for ¾” maximum
2 inch ----
1 ½ inch ----
1 inch 100
¾ inch 90-100
No. 4 35-60
No. 30 10-30
No. 200 2-9
B. Class 2 aggregate base shall conform to the following additional requirements:

Tests ASTM Test method No. Requirements
Resistance (R-Value) D2844 78 min.

Sand Equivalent D2419 22 min.

Tests ASTM Test method No. Requirements
Durability Index D3744 35 min.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1629
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321123 - 3
321123 Aggregate Base
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Submit certificate of compliance for approval prior to installation of material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Call for an inspection by the Engineer and obtain written acceptance of the prepared subgrade or subbase before proceeding with the placement of aggregate base course.

B. The subgrade or subbase to receive aggregate base course, immediately prior to spreading, shall conform to the compaction and elevation tolerances indicated for the material involved and shall be free of standing water and loose or extraneous material.

3.2 INSTALLATION STANDARDS
A. Aggregate base course shall be applied over the prepared subgrade or subbase and compacted in accordance with Section 26 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

B. Aggregate base course shall be minimum uniform thickness after compaction of dimensions indicated. Where not indicated, compacted thickness shall be six inches for driveways/sidewalks and eight inches for roadways.

C. All compaction expressed in percentages in this section refers to the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM Testing Method No. D1557.

3.3 SPREADING OF MATERIAL
A. Aggregate for base course shall be delivered as uniform mixture of fine and coarse aggregate and shall be spread in layers without segregation.

B. Aggregate base course material shall be free from pockets of large and fine material. Segregated materials shall be remixed until uniform.

C. Aggregate base material shall be moisture-conditioned to near optimum moisture content in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 17 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.

D. Aggregate base course six inches and less in thickness may be spread and compacted in one layer. For thicknesses greater than six inches, the base course aggregate shall be spread and compacted in two or more layers of uniform thickness not greater than six inches each.

3.4 COMPACTING
A. Relative compaction of each layer of compacted aggregate base material shall be not less than 95 percent as determined by ASTM Method 1557.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1630
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321123 - 4
321123 Aggregate Base
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
B. Thickness of finished base course shall not vary more than 3/4 inch from the indicated thickness at any point. Base which does not conform to this requirement shall be reshaped or reworked, watered, and recompacted to achieve compliance with specified requirements.

C. The surface of the finished aggregate base course at any point shall not vary more than 3/4 inch above or below the indicated grade.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field tests in accordance with ASTM D2922 to determine compliance with specified requirements for density and compaction of aggregate base material, and with ASTM D3017 to determine moisture-content compliance of the installed base course.

END OF SECTION 321123

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1631
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321216 - 1
321216 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for providing asphaltic concrete paving as indicated.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earthmoving
B. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

ASTM D692 / D692M – Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D1073 – Specification for Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D1559 (now D6927) – Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Asphalt Mixtures
ASTM D2041 – Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Asphalt Mixtures
ASTM D2726 – Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Asphalt Mixtures Using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
ASTM D3203 – Test Method for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Asphalt Mixtures
ASTM D3515 – Specification for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D6926 – Preparation of Asphalt Mixture Specimens Using Marshall Apparatus ASTM D6927 – Test Method for Marshall Stability and Flow of Asphalt Mixtures ASTM D2047 – Test Method for Skid Resistance of Paved Surfaces Using the British Pendulum Tester
ASTM D1188 – Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens
ASTM D3549 – Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens
ASTM D2950 – Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1632
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321216 - 2
321216 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
ASTM D979 – Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D242 – Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D946 – Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction ASTM D3381 – Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction ASTM D2397 – Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D977 – Anionic Emulsified Asphalt

1.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete pavements and walks, curbs and bases, and other improvements adjacent to the operations with suitable materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by the Contractor’s employees or equipment and shall make necessary repairs. Building and other surfaces shall be covered with paper or other protection, where required. All damage caused by the Contractor’s operations shall be prepared or replaced as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASE COURSE MATERIAL
A. Class 2 Aggregate Base. Percentage composition by weight of aggregate base material shall conform to the 3/4 inch maximum grading when determined by ASTM C136.

2.2 TACK COAT (VERTICAL SURFACES)
A. Tack Coat: Diluted SS-1 or SS-1h emulsion or undiluted RS-1 emulsion conforming to ASTM D2397 or ASTM D977. Apply at a rate of 0.02 to 0.10 gallons per square yard on clean, dry surface.

2.3 ASPHALT PAVING MATERIALS
A. Binder: Asphalt cement conforming to ASTM D3381 (Performance Grade PG 64-16).

B. Aggregate: Coarse and fine aggregates shall conform to ASTM D692 / D692M and ASTM D1073 respectively.

C. Mixture: Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) shall comply with ASTM D3515 for bituminous paving mixtures.

D. Mixing: Asphalt concrete shall be produced at an approved commercial central mixing plant in accordance with ASTM D979.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1633
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321216 - 3
321216 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor shall submit Certificate of Compliance from manufacturer for approval prior to installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING OF BASE COURSE
A. The Contractor shall call for an inspection by the Engineer and obtain written approval of the subgrade before proceeding with the base course.

B. Base course shall be minimum uniform thickness after compaction of dimensions indicated.

Where not indicated, compacted thickness shall be six inches for parking stalls and eight inches for roads, driveways, and aisles of parking areas.

C. Base course shall be placed over finished subgrade and compacted in accordance with Section 321100 - Aggregate Base.

D. After base course has been completed, the Contractor shall call for an inspection by the Engineer and obtain written approval before proceeding with application of the asphalt wearing surface.

3.2 PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. Areas to be paved shall be covered with a layer of hot asphalt concrete surfacing not less than the thickness indicated after compaction. Where not indicated, compacted thickness shall be two inches for parking stalls and three inches for roads, driveways, and aisles of parking areas.

B. Paving asphaltic concrete shall be delivered, laid, rolled, and finished in accordance with ASTM D6927 and ASTM D3515.

C. Before placing asphalt concrete, a tack coat (paint binder) shall be applied to all vertical surfaces against which asphalt concrete surfacing will be placed. Tack coat (paint binder) shall be applied in accordance with Section 39-4 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications at the rate of from 0.02 to 0.10 gallons per square yard.

D. Finish surface of the wearing course shall be thoroughly compacted, smooth, and free from ruts, humps, depressions, cold joints, or other irregularities.

E. Finish paving shall conform to slopes, lines, and finish grades indicated, and shall drain properly.

Where adjacent surfaces are intended to be flush (as at concrete gutters, walks, and paving), they shall conform smoothly at all joints.

F. Ridges, indentations, and other objectionable marks left in the surface of the asphalt concrete by paving or rolling equipment shall be eliminated by rolling. The use of equipment that leaves ridges, indentations, or other objectionable marks in the asphalt concrete shall be discontinued, and other acceptable equipment shall be employed.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1634
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321216 - 4
321216 Asphaltic Concrete Paving
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
G. Where cold joints are indicated or necessary, cut back the placed and compacted cold asphalt a minimum of three inches with a concrete or masonry power saw, so that a vertical face of compacted full thickness material is exposed. Treat this surface with a tack coat before proceeding with the placement of new asphaltic concrete surfacing.

H. Finish paving shall conform to finish elevations within plus or minus 0.01 of a foot and shall be level to within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet when measured with a 10 foot straightedge in any direction.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall control the quality of the work and shall provide adequate testing to assure compliance with these Specifications.

B. After completion of paving work, all paving shall be flooded with water, and any resulting “ponds” shall be ringed with chalk. Such hollows shall be corrected with addition of asphalt paving materials and rerolling until all paving is completely level and free from hollows and high spots.

C. The Engineer shall perform in-place density and compaction tests of the completed pavement in accordance with ASTM D2950 to determine compliance with specified requirements. Test shall be performed as often as necessary to verify compliance, but not less frequently than the following:

1. One test for each street or driveway intersection for which asphalt pavement replacement is required.

2. One test for every 1,000 square yards of asphalt pavement at locations where the paved area exceeds 1,000 square yards.

3.4 MAINTENANCE OF PAVEMENT
A. Upon completion of final rolling, traffic shall not be permitted on the finished pavement for at least six hours, and until the asphalt concrete has cooled sufficiently to withstand traffic without being deformed.

B. Finished pavement shall be maintained in finished clean condition until the work is accepted by the City.

END OF SECTION 321216

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1635
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 1
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete
B. Section 312000 Earthmoving
C. Section 321123 Aggregate Base
D. Section 329451 Suspended Pavement System (Soil Cell)

1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Concrete unit pavers.

2. Existing donor brick pavers (salvaged).

3. Aggregate setting beds and joint filler for pavers.

4. Sealant for concrete pavers.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates

2. ASTM C39 Concrete Compressive Strength

3. ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

4. ASTM C150 Portland cement

5. ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements

6. ASTM C642 Water Absorption, Density, Voids in Hardened Concrete

7. ASTM C666 Rapid Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Concrete

8. ASTM C979 Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

9. ASTM E303 Pendulum Slip Resistance

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Concrete Unit Pavers.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1636
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 2
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

2. Brick Pavers (make-up bricks to match existing donor bricks).

3. Sealant.

C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.

D. Samples for each type of unit paver indicated.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, setting material and sealant from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Mockup shall include sealant.

1. Mockups may become part of completed work if approved by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

2. For non-permeable unit pavers, provide one 6’ x 6’ mockup.

C. Precast concrete paving units shall have a compressive strength of 5,000 psi minimum.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1. Conduct a site meeting when the complete layout for the Permeable Unit Paving pattern has been spray-painted on the base course for Landscape Architect’s review and approval, and to make any modifications to the layout as directed by Landscape Architect. (Mockup review shall occur on the same day.)

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when ambient temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F (4 and 49 deg C). Provide the following protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation when the mean daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 deg F (4 deg C), cover with weatherresistant membrane; below 25 deg F (minus 4 deg C), cover with insulating blankets;

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1637
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 3
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
below 20 deg F (minus 7 deg C), provide enclosure and temporary heat to maintain temperature above 32 deg F (0 deg C).

2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher. a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXISTING DONOR BRICK PAVERS (SALVAGED)

1. Salvage existing donor brick pavers with bronze plates.

2. Provide makeup brick pavers to match existing donor bricks in size, color, and finish.

2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Precast Concrete Pavers:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. As indicated on contract drawings, or approved equal.

2. Face Size and Shape: As indicated on contract drawings. a. 6” x 12” x 4”

3. Color: As indicated on contract drawings.
a. Integral color shall be throughout entire product. Finish color shall not be added as a face mix.

4. Finishes: All finishes shall be sandblasted. Walking surfaces of precast concrete paving units shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.60, wet and dry. a. Light Sandblasted – LS
b. Medium Sandblasted – MS

5. Physical Properties: Compressive strength: Minimum 5,000 psi.

6. Concrete for Narrow Modular Pavers shall be tested frequently to assure that mixes provide units having not less than 5,000 psi compressive strength at 28 days.

7. Integrated spacer tabs allow Narrow modular pavers to be placed together and maintain even spacing throughout the installation. Minor adjustments may be necessary to maintain consistent joint lines.

8. Weight: Narrow Modular Paver: 4” thick - 44 pounds per square foot.

9. Water absorption: Not more than 6.0 % average, not more than 7.0 % for any individual unit for standard colors.

10. Narrow Modular Pavers will contain on average 5% entrained air, with no individual piece under 4%.

11. Resistance to Freeze-Thaw: Narrow Modular Pavers will resist 300 freeze thaw cycles in accordance with ASTM C666 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1638
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 4
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

12. Narrow Modular Pavers shall be hand-made, wet-cast of cement conforming to ASTM C 150, Type III, aggregates conforming to ASTM C 33, and pigments for integrally colored concrete conforming to ASTM C979.

13. Minor chips, hairline cracks, air voids and slight variations in color and finish are normal in precast concrete. When viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet, minor chips, hairline cracks and air voids that cannot be seen with the naked eye are not grounds for rejection.

B. MANUFACTURER, or approved equal
Stepstone, LLC
17025 South Main Street
Gardena, CA 90248
(310) 327-7474
(800) 572-9029
FAX (310) 217-1424
www.stepstoneprecast.com

2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS FOR NON-PERMEABLE UNIT PAVING A. Graded Aggregate for Base: Caltrans Class 2 AB.

B. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.

C. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.

2.4 GEOGRIDS
A. TC Mirafi 500X, Tensar BX1100, or approved equal.

2.5 MORTAR
A. Type S, ASTM C 270

2.6 SEALANT FOR CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Apply sealant to resist oil- and water-based stains. Sealant shall be invisible, matte finish. No or low VOC’s.

B. Products:

1. White Mountain Ultrapel, Product #W1-06

2. Glaze N’ Seal Stain Defense Sealer

3. Or equal.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1639
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 5
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.

B. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.

C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive base course for unit pavers.

3.3 LAYOUT OF PAVING PATTERN
A. Spray-paint outlines of the paving pattern on the base material. Outlines shall be dimensioned roughly as indicated on the drawings. Lines shall be curvilinear and smooth between dimensioned points. Paint shall be easily visible from across the area to be paved.

B. Landscape Architect shall review painted layout of paving pattern prior to installation of unit pavers (with the exception of the mockup as described herein). Landscape Architect may direct contractor to adjust layout in the field.

3.4 EXISTING DONOR BRICK PAVERS
A. Salvage existing donor brick pavers during demolition.

1. Document with photographs and plan locations the existing brick pavers and reinstate in the exact same order as current condition. Existing names shall be adjacent to one another.

2. Protect and store to protect pavers.

3. Document the quantity of existing donor brick pavers.

4. Reinstate existing donor brick pavers per plan.

5. Notify the City of any damaged donor brick pavers with bronze plates.

3.5 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be visible in finished work.

B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1640
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 6
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

D. Joint Pattern: As indicated on contract drawings.

1. Lay out pavers so that cut pavers along edges of areas of unit paving are as large as possible.

E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

F. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

1. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.6 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.

B. Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Owner’s Authorized Representative, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Place separation geogrids over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches (300 mm).

E. Place aggregate base, compact to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density, and screed to depth indicated.

F. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted.

G. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.

H. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. Use string lines to keep straight lines.

I. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions:

1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is exposed to rain.

2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36 inches (900 mm) of the laying face. Cover pavers that have not been compacted, and leveling course on which pavers have not been placed, with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1641
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 321400 - 7
Unit Paving
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
J. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

K. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.

L. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.

3.7 REPAIRING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

3.8 SEALING
A. Apply sealant to concrete pavers per manufacturer’s directions.

B. Clean area thoroughly of all spills, overspray, etc.

C. Dispose of extra materials per applicable environmental regulations.

D. Protect area from traffic for full curing time.

END OF SECTION 321400

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1642
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 1
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 0321613 – CONCRETE PAVING, WALLS AND CURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete Forms

1. Standard Curbs, Extended Curbs and Rolled Curbs

2. Bioretention Walls

3. Pedestrian Concrete Flatwork

4. Vehicular Concrete Flatwork
B. Concrete Reinforcing

1. Detailing

2. Bending

3. Placement

4. Amounts of cover for cast-in-place concrete

5. Anchor bolts

6. Dowels

7. Inserts

8. Lap Splices
C. Curing Compound and Sealer.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 031000 - Concrete Formwork

1.3 REFERENCES
ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 308 Standard Specification for Curing Concrete
ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1643
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 2
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C979 Standard Specification for Integral Concrete Coloring System California Code of Regulations (CCR):

1. CCR Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4 – Construction Safety Orders

2. CCR Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, Chapter 33, Section 3303, Protection of Pedestrians during Construction or Demolition

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data

1. Curing / Sealing Compounds

2. Admixtures

3. Source of Concrete and Aggregates
B. Shop Drawings

1. Reinforcing Diagrams

2. Bar Schedules
C. Curing

1. Curing Method
D. Test Reports

1. Mill Test Reports
a. Reinforcing Steel
b. Cement
E. Concrete Mix Designs
Trial mixes including water-cement-fly ash ratio curves, concrete mix ingredients and proportions, and admixtures.

F. Grout Mix
To include mix ingredients, strength and shrinkage data G. Mockup: Cast mockups of concrete pavement and walls to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build mockups in the location as directed by Owner’s Representative. Mockups shall show full range of colors and finishes indicated on contract drawings. Mockups shall be constructed to show various colors and finishes in the adjacent relationships shown on the contract drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1644
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 3
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
a. For pavement: Provide one 5’ x 5’ mockup with typical joints for each color and finish combination indicated.
b. For pavement: Provide mockups with finishes indicated equivalent to Topcast 15 and Topcast 25 (for medium exposed aggregate finish) for selection by Landscape Architect.
1) Confirm Topcast finish numbers with Landscape Architect prior to installing mockup.
c. For CIP Concrete Curbs and Walls provide one 1’-6”-high x 1’-6”-deep x 5’-wide site mockup including all corners, acid etch finish, edges, batter, and any other features indicated on the drawings.
1) Do not remove site mockup sample until project has been installed and approved, unless directed in writing by Landscape Architect. 2) Prepare mockup under Quality Control provisions regarding tolerances, etc. 3) Use specified concrete mix design and proposed formwork.

2. Notify Landscape Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Obtain Landscape Architect’s approval of mockups before starting construction.

4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement.

5. Demolish and remove approved mockups from the site when directed by Owner’s Representative.

H. Delivery
With each batch of concrete, furnish certified delivery tickets listing information in Paragraphs

13.1 and 13.2 of ASTM C94. Maximum delivery temperature of concrete is 100 degrees Fahrenheit (F). Minimum delivery temperature as follows:

Atomospheric Temperature Minimum Concrete Temperature
30 degrees to 40 degrees F 60 degrees F
0 degrees to 30 degrees F 70 degrees F
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement

1. Clean, fresh, Type II, low alkali, Portland cement conforming with ASTM C150.

B. Pozzolan Fly-ash to be in conformance with ASTM C618.

C. Aggregates

1. Aggregates to be uniformly graded with a one inch maximum size for all concrete mixes.

2. Natural aggregates to be free from deleterious materials, conforming to ASTM C33.

Aggregate is not to be potentially reactive as defined in Appendix XI of ASTM C33.

Aggregates to be thoroughly and uniformly washed before use.

D. Mixing Water

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1645
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 4
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1. Fresh, clean, potable and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

E. Admixtures

1. Admixtures, if used to be of a type conforming to ASTM C494 that increases the workability of the concrete, will not impair the strength of the concrete, and is not used to reduce the cement content of the mix. Do not use Calcium Chloride.

F. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound

1. Is to be clear or translucent, suitable for spray application and is to conform to ASTM C309, Type 1.

G. Cement Grout

1. Non-shrink type composed of one part cement, two parts sand and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency.

H. Properties

1. 28 day strength of concrete in place to be a minimum of:

2. 3,000 psi

3. The maximum water/cement ratio to be 0.44 for bridge deck.

4. Slump of concrete and not to exceed four (4) inches unless otherwise authorized by City.

5. 15% of cement weight may be Pozzolan Fly-ash. Pozzolan Fly-Ash to be in conformance with ASTM C618.

2.2 REINFORCING STEEL
A. Bar reinforcement, dowels and tie bars to be ASTM A615, Grade 60.

2.3 EPOXY ADHESIVE
A. ASTM C881, Type V for load bearing concrete, Grade and Class as determined by project conditions and requirements.

2.4 FINISH
A. Flatwork and curb ramps

1. Exposed aggregate finish using chemical retarder. Top-cast, or approved equal.

2. Level of exposure shall be equivalent to Top-cast 15, 25, or other medium finish per Landscape Architect’s selection based on mockups.

B. Acid etch for CIP Concrete Walls and Curbs to match Pre-cast bench finish sample.

2.5 SEALANT FOR CONCRETE FLATWORK PAVING
A. Apply sealant to resist oil- and water-based stains. Sealant shall be invisible, matte finish. No or low VOC’s.

B. Products:

1. White Mountain Ultrapel, Product #W1-06

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1646
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 5
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

2. Glaze N’ Seal Stain Defense Sealer, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS
A. Reinforcing detailing, bending, and placing: In accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318.

B. Reinforcing steel to be provided with the following amounts of cover for cast-in-place concrete:

1. Concrete deposited against earth - three inches

2. Concrete surface (formed) exposed to earth or weather:
a. #6 through #18 bars - two inches
b. #5 bar and smaller - 1-1/2 inches
C. All reinforcing steel, anchor bolts, dowels, and inserts to be accurately placed and securely held in place prior to placing of concrete or grout.

D. Horizontal bars to lap a minimum of 16 gauge black annealed wire chairs or concrete “dobies.”

3.2 MIXING CONCRETE
A. All concrete materials to be measured accurately for each batch and mixed thoroughly until aggregate is coated with mortar. Combined ingredients to be mixed for a minimum of 1-1/2 minutes.

B. Concrete batching and mixing to comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94, delivered to site. Batch mixing at the Site is not permitted.

3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Preparation

1. Remove hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris from forms.

2. b) Remove hardened concrete and foreign materials from interior surfaces of mixing and conveying equipment.

3. Have reinforcement inspected and approved by Owner before depositing concrete.

4. Forms and reinforcing bars to be clean and wetted prior to placing of the concrete.

5. Place anchor bolts and other embedments, as indicated.

B. Conveying Concrete

1. Convey concrete from mixer to final place of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation. Method of conveying concrete is subject to approval of Owner.

C. Placing

1. Concrete to be placed in conformance with the recommendations of ACI 304.

2. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation, or when concrete has attained its initial set, or has contained its water or cement content more than 1-1/2 hours.

3. Deposit concrete as near as practicable in its final position. Prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of placing concrete.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1647
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 6
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

4. Do not drop concrete freely more than five feet. Where greater drops are required, use a tremie or flexible spout attached to a suitable hopper.

5. Discharge contents of tremies or flexible spouts in horizontal layers not exceeding 20 inches in thickness, and space tremies such as to provide a minimum of lateral movement of concrete.

6. Continuously place concrete until an entire unit between construction joints is placed. Rate and method of placing concrete to be such that no concrete between construction joints will be deposited upon or against partly set concrete.

7. Continuously place all concrete with no more than 10 minutes elapsed time between pours.

Sequence concrete pours such that each pour is placed on or adjacent to concrete that has been in place no more than 10 minutes.

D. Consolidation
Conform to ACI 309. Immediately after depositing, spade concrete next to forms, into corners and recesses, work around reinforcement and into angles of forms, tamp lightly by hand, and compact with mechanical vibrator. Vibrate concrete to produce thorough compaction, leaving no voids, complete embedment of reinforcement and concrete of uniform and maximum density without segregation of mix. Do not transport concrete in forms by vibration. Carry on vibration continuously with placing of concrete. Do not insert vibrator into concrete that has begun to set.

3.4 Hot or Cold Weather
A. Follow the recommendations of ACI 305R and ACI 306R for hot and cold weather conditions.

3.5 CONCRETE FINISHES – CURBS AND WALLS
A. Finish of formed surfaces to be smooth and free of fins, honeycomb, or segregation. When defects occur, they are to be remedied by chipping cavities and patching, or by other methods approved by Owner.

B. Exposed surfaces to be “sacked” by rubbing cement mortar into voids with burlap or canvas. Fins to be ground smooth and loose mortar to be removed.

C. Vertical edges of the walls to have 3/4-inch chamfer.

D. Horizontal edges of the walls to have ½-inch chamfer.

E. Unformed surfaces to be steel troweled to a smooth dense finish. After the trowel finish has sufficiently hardened, apply acid etch finish.

3.6 EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISHES - FLATWORK
A. Match approved mock-ups, to compare for color, texture, finish, and other characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

B. All work shall conform to CAL OSHA /MSDS for application and clean up procedures.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1648
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 7
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
C. Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations.

E. Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. Do not expose more than one-third of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the smallest aggregate.

F. Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.

3.7 JOINTS
A. Expansion Joints

1. Construct ½ inch thick expansion joints in the following locations:
a. In curb at points where curved and tangent sections join. b. Between curb, and any drain inlet, or similar structure occurring within the limits of the curb or combination curb and gutter.
c. At corners in sidewalks, following the projections of the building lines from the corner of the building to the curb.
d. Between flatwork and any permanent structure.
e. Between flatowrk and curb.

2. Construct 1/4 inch thick expansion joints in the following locations:
a. Through flatwork at intervals not greater than 15 feet. b. In flatwork, encircling fixtures more than 12 inches in diameter.

B. Contraction Joints

1. In flatwork, construct contraction joints in uniform intervals not greater than six feet, by means of a suitable tool which will form a groove 1/2 inch deep and 1/4 inch wide, with the edges rounded to a 1/4 inch radius.

C. Tooling

1. Finish joints with an edging tool having 1/4 inch radius, leaving joints free of mortar and concrete. In preformed type joints, leave joint filler material exposed for full length of joint with clean and true edges.

D. Joint Sealing

1. Seal to within 1/8 inch of pavement surface all joints in curbs and gutters, including gutter surfaces of combination curb and gutter sections, all joints between curbs and vehicular pavement, all joints between gutters and vehicular pavement, and all other expansion joints. Do not seal other joints unless so indicated.

2. Do not seal joints until concrete curing is complete. Prior to installation of the joint sealing compound, clean the joints of dirt and other foreign material. Joints may be cleaned with compressed air jets provided that the air in such jets is free of oil or water. Do not fill joints when there is any free water in or adjacent to joints. Joint walls and all surfaces to which the sealing material is to adhere shall be surface dry for at least three hours prior to sealing.

3. Apply with approved pressurized equipment. Perform sealing joints to make them impervious to water and to prevent the sealing compound from spreading over the surface of the pavement.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1649
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 8
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3.8 FORM REMOVAL
A. Remove front curb forms not less than two or more than six hours after placing concrete, but in no case while the concrete is still plastic enough to slump.

B. Remove other forms not less than 12 hours after finishing is completed.

3.9 FINISHING
A. Standard Curb, Rolled Curb, Walls and Extended Curb:

1. Trowel the face of curb smooth to a depth of not less than two inches below the flow line, or the flow line of integral curb and gutter, and finish with a steel trowel, all immediately after removal of front curb forms.

2. Finish all curb edges with a radius of 1/2 inch.

3. Provide a final fine brush finish to both top and face of curb with brush strokes parallel to the line of the curb, so that both top and front face present the same uniform appearance.

4. Keep the curb face wet during above finishing operations.

5. Allow no coarse aggregate to show on the finished curb surface.

B. Pedestrian and Vehicle Concrete Flatwork

1. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, leveled, grooved and edged as specified herein, and in UCS, do not work the concrete further until ready for floating.

2. Refer to Landscape Plans for flatwork finishes.

3. Where finishes are not identified on Landscape Plans, provide a “floated finish” or light “broom finish” as indicated in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301.

4. Broom finish shall be applied perpendicular to the direction of traffic flow.

C. Joints and Edges

1. As soon as the condition of the work permits, perform joint work, edging and marking.

Finish all edges with a radius of 1/4 inch.

3.10 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. In conformance with ACI 308, except as otherwise specified herein.

B. Initial curing to immediately follow the finishing operation. Protect exposed surfaces of concrete from premature drying, wash by rain and running water, wind, mechanical injury, and excessively hot or cold temperatures. Concrete not covered with membrane or other curing material to be kept continuously wet for at least seven days after placing. High-early-strength concrete net curing period to be not less than three days. Keep wood forms continuously wet to prevent moisture loss until forms are removed. Cure exposed concrete surfaces as described below.

Other curing methods may be used if approved by City

1. Liquid Curing and Sealing Compounds
Apply by spray or roller in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Apply immediately after finishing. Maximum coverage to be 400 square feet per gallon on steel troweled surfaces, and 300 square feet per gallon on floated or broomed surfaces for the curing/sealing compound.

2. Plastic sheets

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1650
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321613 - 9
Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
Apply as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage. Utilize widest practical width sheet and overlap adjacent sheets two inches. Tightly seal joints with tape.

3. Paper
Utilize widest practical width paper and overlap adjacent sheets two inches. Tightly seal joints with sand, wood planks, pressure-sensitive tape, mastic or glue.

C. Provisions are to be made to keep overspray for curing/sealing compounds from extending beyond bridge deck surface. Spray of curing/sealing compounds to cease if sustained winds exceed 10 miles per hour.

3.11 SEALING
A. Apply sealant to concrete pavers per manufacturer’s directions.

B. Clean area thoroughly of all spills, overspray, etc.

C. Dispose of extra materials per applicable environmental regulations.

D. Protect area from traffic for full curing time.

3.12 CLEANING
A. Cleaning of equipment for delivery or placement of concrete is prohibited on site.

3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. Walking surfaces are to be free from trowel marks, uniform in appearance and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inches in any 10 foot 0 inch when tested with a ten foot straightedge.

END OF SECTION 0321613

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1651
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321726 - 1
Tactile Warning Surface
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 0321726 – TACTILE WARNING SURFACE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
Specifications for all labor, material, tools, equipment and services necessary to complete the installation of detectable/tactile warning surfaces (either surface applied Vitrified Polymer Composite, VCP, or cast-in-place high strength reinforced concrete composite in non-vehicular areas, at the bottom of curb ramps and other locations such as depressed corners, raised crosswalks, raised intersections, borders of medians and islands, the edge of transit platforms, and sidewalks where railroad tracks cross to warn pedestrians of an upcoming change from pedestrian to vehicular way.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
B. 321613 – Concrete Paving, Walls and Curbs
C. 321400 – Unit Pavers

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Rehabilitation Act of 1973 and the American with Disabilities Act Section 504 28 CFR Part 35 Title II and 28 CFR 36 Title III.

B. California Code of Regulations (CCR): Title 24, Part 2, Section 205 definition of Detectable Warning. Section 1117A.4 and 1127B.5; Section 1133B.8.5.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Material Test reports.

2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

4. Installation methods.

5. Maintenance instructions for tactile warning panels as required.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide fabrication details, tactile warning panel surface profile, and plans of placement including joints.

C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1652
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 0321726 - 2
Tactile Warning Surface
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1.5 HANDLING
A. Warning Panels shall be packaged or crated to prevent damage in shipment or handling.

B. Store products under cover in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation.

C. Store pallets on supported flat surface. DO NOT DOUBLE STACK PALLETS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Detectable Warning Surface:

1. Color: Verify with local jurisdiction for required color.

2. Type: Tactile warning surface shall be prefabricated panels, either adhesive applied or cast-in-place as manufactured by “Detectable Warning Systems, Inc.” or approved equivalent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Temperature: Ambient and surface temperature must be 45 deg F and rising. If substrate surface temperatures exceed 90 deg F, do not attempt to apply more than 48-inch x 24-inch area at one time.

B. Surface: Apply on asphalt or concrete surfaces.

1. Surface must be free of dirt, dust, deicing agents, chemicals and significant oily substances.

2. Concrete surfaces must have surface porosity.

3. Do not apply on top of previous markings or coatings.

4. Follow Manufacturer’s written instructions on how to prepare surface.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

END OF SECTION 0321726

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1653
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 323300 - 1
Site Furnishings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Phase 1
SECTION 323300 – SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Custom Bench Type 1 – Landscape Forms “Pre-cast concrete bench with wood seat”

2. Tables and Chairs – Landscape Forms ”Parc Center”

3. Waste Receptacle – mmCite “Multiminimum

4. Bike Rack – Landscape Forms “Emerson”

5. Tree Grate – Iron Age “Rain Spin Combo”

6. Metal Tree Stakes @ Tree Grate – JR Partners Grate Stakes “Mega Grate Stake”

7. E-bike Charging Station – “Saris Power Post"

8. Anti-skate stopper – Escofet “Ball”

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B. 034801 SITE PRECAST CONCRETE (custom bench)
C. 057210 LANDSCAPE METAL FABRICATIONS (custom bench)
D. 064013 LANDSCAPE WOODWORK (custom bench)
E. Section 099623 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination: Coordinate locations with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and servicing of site furnishing units.

B. Uniformity: Provide products of the same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner.

C. General:

1. Field Measurements and Coordination: Verify dimensions with work specified in other sections which adjoins or to which this work will be attached.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1654
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 323300 - 2
Site Furnishings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Phase 1
a. Effect coordination with related work of other sections, including work of other separate Contracts.
b. Measurements of adjoining work shall be taken, so that work specified in this Section shall fit closely into the spaces and conditions provide. c. If any unusual conditions are encountered, the nature and location of conditions shall be shown on shop drawings submitted to Landscape Architect for determination and approval prior to fabrication.

2. Coordination with other Trades: Coordinate with and furnish all necessary templates and patterns required by work of other sections. Furnish components of assemblies that are to be built into work specified as part of other sections. Supervise and be responsible for the correct location and installation of such built-in items.

3. Fabrication Qualifications: Fabrications shall be by a firm or firms which have successfully fabricated each material type and condition, similar to the quality specified, and in the quantity shown for a period of not less than 5 years. a. The Landscape Architect and Owner may during the course of the work visit the places of fabrication. The Contractor shall afford these representatives free access and cooperation in the performance of their duties.

4. Installer Qualifications: Installers shall have a minimum of 10 years successful experience, either in the present business form or by having principal personnel with equivalent experience elsewhere, in the installation of the glass, metal and wood materials specified, and the products, systems, and scope specified. An experienced (10 years experience) field foreman shall oversee all work. Include evidence of experience including project list.

5. Forest Certification: Provide wood products obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

6. Welding: Procedures and personnel to the following:
a. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code – Steel”
b. AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel”
c. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for the related processes, and if pertinent, has undergone certification.

7. Shop Assembly: In so far as is practical, fitting and assembly of work shall be done in shop in order to minimize field splicing and assembly.
a. Work that cannot be permanently shop-assembled shall be completely assembled, marked for re-assembly and disassembled in shop before shipment to ensure correct assembly in field.
b. Shop assembles work in largest practical sizes to minimize field work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1655
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 323300 - 3
Site Furnishings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Phase 1
c. Shop fabricated items shall correctly fit the field condition. In event that shopfabricated items do not fit the field condition, the item shall be returned to the shop for correction, unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect.

8. This Specification Section does not define or establish the extent of work performed by subtrades. Contractor shall assign sub trade work as he deems appropriate for a complete, coordinated, cost effective and proper execution.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data cut sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: Product data for each type of furniture specified, with installation instructions for each unit built-in or connected to other construction. Include methods of installation for each type substrate.

1. Shop drawings and calculations shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer in the State of California.

2. Provide plans, sections, and elevations, as well as site context to adjacent materials. a. Custom Bench Type 1
b. Tree Grate and Frames
C. Color Samples: Provide full range of available color samples for selection by Landscape Architect. Provide samples of selected recycled plastic for Architect’s approval.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at fabricator’s facility of entire CUSTOM BENCH assembly including armrest, backrest, and wood support, wood members, precast members and anchorage system components. Provide mockup photographs and video.

E. Submit maintenance and cleaning programs for Owner.

F. Guarantee: The Contractor shall obtain in the Owner’s name the standard written manufacturer's guarantee of all materials furnished under this Section where such guarantees are offered in the manufacturer's published product data. All these guarantees shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, other liabilities, which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Materials: Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers at a secure location until installation.

B. Instructions and Recommendations: Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

C. Unload furniture at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. Product shall remain safe and undamaged at all times.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1656
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 323300 - 4
Site Furnishings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Phase 1

1.7 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage site furnishings during remainder of construction period.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions

1. Carefully examine the site before submitting a bid. Be informed as to the nature and location of the Work, general and local conditions including climate, adjacent properties and utilities, conformation of the ground, the nature of subsurface conditions, the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during execution of the Work.

2. Should the Contractor, in the course of Work, find any discrepancies between Drawings and physical conditions or any omissions or errors in Drawings, or in layout as furnished by the Landscape Architect, it will be his duty to inform the Landscape Architect immediately in writing for clarification. Work done after such discovery, unless authorized by the Landscape Architect, shall be done at the Contractor's risk.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Custom Bench Type 1 – Custom Precast Concrete Bench with Wood Seating, Backrest, and Armrest. By Landscape Forms Studio 431, or approved equal. Provide shop drawings.

1. Part 1 – PM-1 Precast Module 1 – Ramped concrete piece. See 034801 Site Precast Concrete.

2. Part 2 – PM-2 Precast Module 2 – Center concrete piece. See 034801 Site Precast Concrete.

3. Part 3 – PM-3 Precast Module 3 – End concrete piece with notch. See 034801 Site Precast Concrete.

4. Part 4 – PM-4 Precast Module 4 – Concrete support footing. See 034801 Site Precast Concrete.

5. Part 5 – PM-5 Precast Module 5 – Concrete end footing. See 034801 Site Precast Concrete.

6. Part 6 – SM-1 Stainless Steel Module 6 – SS Backrest & Armrest. See 057210 Landscape Metal Fabrications. Painted.

7. Part 7 – SM-2 Stainless Steel Module 7 – SS Armrest. See 057210 Landscape Metal Fabrications. Painted.

8. Part 8 – W-1 Wood Backrest. Wood shall be Kebony. See 064013 Landscape Woodwork.

9. Part 9 – W-2 Wood Seating. Wood shall be Kebony. See 064013 Landscape Woodwork.

10. Includes Anti-skate stopper per 2.1.I.

11. Includes CIP concrete footing below precast concrete parts.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1657
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 323300 - 5
Site Furnishings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Phase 1
B. Tables and Chairs – By Landscape Forms “Parc Centre,” or approved equal. 24” diameter table.

Powdercoated steel, color Lemon.

C. Waste Receptacle – By MM Cite “Multiminimum,” or approved equal. Powdercoated steel RAL 7024 Graphite Grey
D. Bike Rack – By Landscape Forms “Emerson”, or approved equal. Finish: Powdercoated Stainless Steel, color Dusk. Landscape Forms 7800 East Michigan Ave. Kalamazoo, MI 49048 – PH (800) 430.6209
E. Tree Grate – By Iron Age “Spin / Rain Combo 72” and frame, or approved equal. Raw iron, heel-proof and ADA compliant. Provide shop drawings.

F. Metal Tree Stakes @ Tree Grate – JR Partners Grate Stakes “Mega Grate Stake,” or approved equal. 2 per tree. For 36” box size trees. 8-foot length, 1.25-inch diameter.

G. E-bike Charging Station – “Saris Power Post, Non-locking, Model# 34014", or approved equal.

Zinc Plated.

H. Anti-skate stopper – “Ball” by Escofet, or approved equal. 35mm diameter, 35mm length with

1.5” radius to align with bull nose of seating.

2.2 LOCATIONS
A. Provide site furniture in locations as indicated on the drawings.

2.3 FABRICATION OF CUSTOM WOOD FURNISHINGS
A. Form custom fabrications to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines, and angles.

B. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work.

Drill and tap for required fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.

C. Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood caps/seats, as applicable to each unit of work.

D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux, and dress all exposed and contact surfaces.

E. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.

F. Finish exposed surfaces, including welds, to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arrises.

G. Assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1658
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 323300 - 6
Site Furnishings
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Phase 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which site furnishings are to be installed, and remedy any conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

0.2 PREPARATION
A. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorage devices such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site.

0.3 INSTALLATION
A. Furnishings shall be located where shown on plans, and as shown on detail drawings, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Review site furnishing locations with Architect prior to installation.

B. All site furniture shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. All site furnishings with embedded mounting shall be installed to be plumb and level.

0.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect furniture against damage during remainder of construction period, complying with manufacturer's directions.

END OF SECTION 323300

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1659
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 1

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
SECTION 32 84 00

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, supplies, tools, and transportation and perform all operations in connection with and reasonably incidental to complete the installation of the automatic sprinkler irrigation systems as shown on the drawings. Items hereinafter are included as an aid to take off, and are not necessarily a complete list of work items.

1. Keep existing valves operational as required.

2. Relocate and adjust existing sprinkler heads to achieve and maintain head to head coverage as required.

3. Trenching, stockpiling, excavation, materials, and refilling trenches.

4. Furnishing materials and installation for complete system including piping, valves, fittings, sprinkler heads, dripline and fittings, automatic controls, and final adjustment of heads to insure complete coverage.

5. Line voltage connections to the irrigation controllers and low voltage control wiring from controllers to remote control valves.

6. Replacement of unsatisfactory materials.

7. Clean-up, inspection and approval.

8. All work of every description mentioned in the specification and/or addenda thereto, all other labor, and materials reasonably incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work, including clean-up of the site, as directed by the Project Representative.

9. Tests.

10. As-built record drawings.

B. Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Irrigation water stub-out.

2. 120 volt A.C. electrical stub-out to controller location.

3. Irrigation sleeves.

4. Silva Cell details and profiles.

1.02 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Irrigation System:

1. Measurement: Irrigation system installation is measured on a lump sum basis.

2. Payment: The contract lump sum price paid for the Irrigation System shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in furnishing and installing the Irrigation System, complete in place.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1660
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 2

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer catalog information on all material to be used on the project as specified on the legend, notes, details and plans. Redline or highlight exact items on page to be submitted. Complete material list shall be submitted prior to performing any work.

B. Substitutions: No substitution will be permitted without prior written approval by the Project Representative. If the product is approved and, in the opinion of the Project Representative, the substituted product does not perform as well as the specified product, the Contractor shall replace it with the specified product at no additional cost to the Project Representative.

C. All equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Project Representative may be rejected and the Contractor may be required to remove the equipment or material at their own expense.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project As-built Record Documents:

1. The Contractor shall maintain in good order in the field office, one complete set of black line prints of all sprinkler drawings which form a part of the contract, showing all water lines, electrical, sprinklers, valves, stub-outs. In the event any work is not installed as indicated on the drawings, such work shall be corrected and documented accurately on the working drawings.

2. Dimension from two permanent points of reference, such as building corners, sidewalks, road intersections or monuments, the following items:
a. Connection to water source
b. Backflow preventor
c. Gate valves
d. Routing of pressurized mainlines and lateral lines
e. Remote control valves
f. Quick coupling valves
g. Flow sensor, master valve, and irrigation controller

3. Deliverables shall be one full size colored hard copy of the contract drawings with redlines and dimensions or a full sized colored scanned PDF version.

B. Controller Chart:

1. Provide one laminated (hermetically sealed between two pieces of 10 mil. plastic) controller chart showing the area covered by controller for each automatic controller supplied at the maximum size controller door will allow. Chart shall be a reduced drawing of the actual "as-built" system. If controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced to door size, the drawing shall be enlarged to a size that is readable and placed folded, in a sealed plastic container, inside the controller door.

2. Controller chart shall be a blackline print with a different color used to show area of coverage for each station. Charts must be completed and approved by the Project Representative prior to final inspection of the irrigation system.

3. Locate all dripline flush valves and dripline indicators on colored plans if the locations differ from design plans.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1661
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 3

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
C. Controller Cloud Based Communication and Flow Sensor installation confirmation:

1. Provide written confirmation that the cloud-based communications are set up and operational between controller(s) and cloud-based server.

2. If controller is a two-wire type controller. Provide confirmation that the controller is communicating with each decoder valve on system and there are no error messages logged on the cloud-based communication system. Provide a printout of information to Landscape Architect or Irrigation Consultant.

3. Provide written confirmation from the distributor/manufacturer's representative that the controller is communicating with flow sensors and that the correct "k" and "offsets" are setup and utilized properly. The “k” and “offsets” are pre-set numbers you plug into the controller software based on the flow sensor size and type when calibrating the flow sensor. Confirm that flow values have been "learned" and recorded for each valve on the controller, and the correct gpm per valve is shown and verified on a printout and provided to Landscape Architect or Irrigation Consultant. Flow alarms and automatic shut offs should be set up after plant establishment.

D. Maintenance and Operating Instructions and Manuals:

1. Contractor shall prepare an Operation and Maintenance Manual, organized in a 3-ring binder, containing the following information.
a. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Duration of guarantee, periods as specified herein, list of equipment with names and addresses of local manufacturer’s representatives with duration of written warranties.

Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all equipment spare parts lists and related manufacturer's information.

2. Submit the Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Project Representative within 10 Calendar Days of completion of work of this Section and as a condition of project acceptance.

E. Irrigation Audit, Irrigation Survey, and Irrigation Water Use Analysis:

1. All landscape irrigation audits shall be conducted by a local agency landscape irrigation auditor or a third party certified landscape irrigation auditor. Landscape audits shall not be conducted by the person who design the landscape or installed landscape.

2. For new construction and rehabilitated landscape projects installed after December 1,2015, as described in Section 490.1:
a. The project applicant shall submit an irrigation audit report with the Certificate of Completion to the local agency that may include, but is not limited to:
inspection, system tune-up, system test with distribution uniformity, reporting overspray or run off that causes overland flow, and preparation of an irrigation schedule, including configuring irrigation controllers with application rate, soil types, plant factor, slop, exposure and any other factors necessary for accurate programming.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE & GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Qualifications: The Contractor, personally or through an authorized and competent representative, shall supervise the work constantly, and shall as far as possible keep the same foreman and workmen on the job from commencement to completion. The workmanship of the entire job must in every way be first class, and only experienced and competent workmen will be allowed on the job. A minimum of five years’ experience of

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1662
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 4

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
installing irrigation systems of similar scope, size and complexity as the system being installed under this scope of work is required for all on-site job superintendents.

B. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and best practices: Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be followed in all cases when not shown in the Drawings or Specifications.

C. O.S.H.A. Compliance: All articles and services covered by this specification shall meet or exceed the safety standards established under the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, together with all amendments in effect as of the date of this specification.

D. All irrigation systems shall be installed to meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the California Department of Water Resources Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance.

E. All materials supplied for this Project shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to City.

F. Codes and Standards: Comply with all applicable codes and standards.

1. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the National Electric Code; published by the Western Plumbing Officials Association; California Code of Regulations, Title 23, Division 2.

Department of Water Resources, Chapter 2.7. Model Water Efficient Landscape Ordinance; and other State or local laws regulations. Nothing in these drawings or specifications is to be construed as to permit work not conforming to these codes.

2. When the specifications call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above mentioned rules and regulations, the provision of the specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations.

3. Contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and labor when required by the compliance with these rules and regulations, though the work be not mentioned in these particular specifications or shown on the drawings.

4. The Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, guards, warning signs, and lights as necessary or required by O.S.H.A. regulations for the protection of the public or workmen.

5. Any existing buildings, equipment, piping, pipe covering sewers, etc., damaged by the Contractor during the course of his work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Project Representative and at Contractor’s own expense, before final payment is made. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by leaks in the piping systems being installed or having been installed under this contract. He/she shall repair, at his/her own expense, all damage so caused, in a manner satisfactory to the Project Representative.

6. The Contractor shall secure the required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or arrangements made by others affecting the Work of this section.

1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1663
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 5

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities

1. The Drawings show, if applicable, existing above and below grade structures and utilities that are known to the Project Representative. Locate known existing installations before proceeding with construction operations that may cause damage to such installations. Existing installations shall be kept in service where possible and damage to them shall be repaired with no adjustment of Contract Sum. Verify with Project Representative if As Built drawings are available.

2. If other structures or utilities are encountered, request Project Representative to provide direction on how to proceed with the Work. If a structure or utility is damaged, take appropriate action to ensure the safety of persons and property.

B. Trench Interference with Existing Tree Root Systems: Prior to trenching, layout main and lateral line locations within drip Line of trees and review locations with Project Representative. Relocate any lines that may interfere with existing root systems to avoid or reduce damage to root systems as accepted by Project Representative.

C. Provide barricades, coverings, warning signs, lights and other protection required by local code or OSHA to prevent damage to existing improvements to remain and to protect the public.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during and after installation and the installed work and materials of all other trades.

B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the Project Representative and at no additional cost to the project.

1. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install; transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external load. Protect pipe from sunlight.

2. Repair all dented and damaged pipe by cutting out the dented or damaged section and rejoining with a coupling.

1.08 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall stake out the irrigation system as shown on the drawings. These areas shall be checked by the Contractor and Project Representative before construction is started.

Any changes, deletions or additions shall be determined at this check.

B. Due to the scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all piping offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. Carefully investigate the conditions affected all of the work and plan accordingly, and furnish all required fittings. Install system in such a manner to avoid conflicts with planting, utilities and architectural features.

C. Do not install the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in arc dimensions exist that might not have been considered. Bring such obstruction or differences to the attention of the Project Representative. Notify and coordinate irrigation Work with applicable contractors for location and installation of piping and sleeves through or under walls, pavement and structures. In the event this notification is not given, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary.

1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1664
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 6

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Acceptance: Do not install main line trenching prior to acceptance by Project Representative of rough grades completed under another Section.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with the all other trades the sleeving, power requirements of the project, prior to the start of construction.

1.10 EXISTING IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. This Contract requires that the existing irrigation system be kept intact on all areas of the park not yet worked on to permit normal watering during construction. On areas that have been installed according to these plans and specifications, irrigation shall be programmed to operate via the controller. On areas being worked on, the Contractor shall afford the City every opportunity to hand water during the period of shutdown.

1.11 INSTRUCTION
A. After the system has been installed and approved, the Contractor shall instruct the Project Representative and or Maintenance Contractor, in complete operation and maintenance of the irrigation system.

1.12 SUPERVISION OF CONSTRUCTION
A. The day-to-day full-time supervision of construction will be under the direction of the City Representative. Any questions regarding day-to-day interpretation of the specifications or working drawings which the Contractor may have, are to be directed only to the City Representative. Only the City Representative shall be authorized to approve the necessary day-to-day adjustments or modifications which from time to time may arise during the term of construction. In any disputes relating to the irrigation system design, or the implementation of that design, only the City Representative shall make the final and binding decisions.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pressure Mainline pipe and fittings.

1. Pressure mainline piping:
a. 3” AND SMALLER: Shall be PVC 1120-Schedule 40 plastic pipe. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved Type 1, Grade 1 PVC compound conforming to ASTM D1785.

2. Schedule 40 pipe shall be manufactured in strict compliance to ASTM D1785 and D2665 (where applicable), consistently meeting and/or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements of these standards with regard to material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality.

3. All PVC pipe shall bear the following markings:
a. Manufacturer’s name
b. Nominal pipe size
c. Class or Schedule
d. Pressure rating in PSI
e. NSF

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1665
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 7

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
f. Date of extrusion

4. Use solvent weld pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter less than 3- inches or where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40 80, Type 1, PVC solvent weld fittings conforming to ASTM Standards D2466 D2467 and D1784 at changes in direction or branch mains. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564.

5. Connections between main lines and RCV’s shall be of Schedule 80 PVC (threaded both ends) nipples and fittings.

6. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer’s name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable I.P.D. schedule and NSF Seal of approval.

7. Inside diameter of pipe shall be the same size as iron pipe.

8. PVC Type I shall not be threaded.

9. PVC fittings shall be PVC Type II, Schedule 40 NSF approved.

10. Caution shall be utilized in handling Type I pipe due to the possibility of cracking or splitting.

11. When connection is plastic to metal, male adapters shall be used unless otherwise noted or detailed. The Male adapter shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base (Teflon paste or equal).

12. Threaded Nipples – ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads.

B. PVC Non-pressure lateral line and fittings

1. Lateral lines (non-pressure): 3/4” and larger shall be Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe.

2. Manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and ASTM D1784; cell classification 12245-B, Type 1, Grade 1.

3. Fittings – All lateral lines shall be connected with Schedule 40, Type I, Grade I, PVC solvent weld fittings.

4. Threads – Injection molded type (where required).

5. Tees and ells – Side gated.

6. Threaded Nipples – ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads.

7. Refer to “trenching and backfilling” elsewhere in these specifications for minimum depths.

C. Solvent for all PVC pipe shall be #711 Gray, along with #P-70 primer, NSF approved as manufactured by Industrial Polychemical Service, Gardena, California, or approved equal.

D. Pipe joint compound shall be non-hardening, non-toxic materials designed specifically for use on threaded connections in water carrying pipe. Performance shall be same as RectorSeal #5.

E. PVC Flexible Pipe: Extruded from flexible vinyl chloride compound.

1. ½ inch pipe: 0.50 inch inside diameter, 0.090 inch wall thickness

2. Material shall conform to ASTM designation D-2287.

F. Swing joints shall be as shown on construction details.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1666
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 8

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

2.02 SLEEVES
A. Sleeve below all hardscape elements with SCH 40 or Class 200 PVC twice the diameter of the pipe or wire bundle within, or as delineated on the plans.

B. Under Hardscape Crossings: Sleeves shall extend a minimum of 24 inches beyond all sidewalks, or shall be extend 24” beyond the back edge of the curb, where noted on the plans.

C. Refer to Civil plans for exact placement and installation details.

2.03 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE
A. Backflow prevention device shall be as shown on plans.

2.04 MASTER CONTROL VALVE
A. Master control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC solenoid actuated globe pattern valve.

B. Valves shall be made of brass with a minimum pressure rating of 150 PSI C. Valve shall have external and internal bleed for manual operation.

D. Valve model and size shall be as shown on drawings.

2.05 FLOW SENSORS
A. Inline flow sensors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Contractor is responsible for the installation, all required materials and connections of the flow sensors for complete operation with the irrigation controller.

B. Flow sensor size and model shall be listed on the drawings.

2.06 FLOW SENSOR CABLE AND CONDUIT
A. Flow sensor wire shall be shielded cable Paige model 7171D or approved equal.

B. Maximum cable distance from controller to flow sensor shall be 2000 ft.

C. Install flow sensor cable in a 1” grey SCH 40 PVC conduit with long sweep elbows.

D. Conduit and flow sensor cable shall be routed with mainline wherever possible. Provide a minimum 6” separation between conduit and pressure main line.

E. Provide 10” round gray electrical pull boxes a minimum of every 200 ft, at each change in direction and adjacent to each controller. Heat brand lid of pull box “FSB”.

2.07 GATE VALVES
A. Gate valves 3” and smaller shall meet the following requirements:

1. Valves shall be of stainless steel (304 or higher) or bronze/brass construction with non-rising stem, cross handle and threaded connections.

2. Valves shall be Leemco Model #LGT-SS, Nibco T-113-K or approved equal. Size as shown on the drawings

3. Install in 10” diameter plastic valve box as detailed.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1667
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 9

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

2.08 QUICK COUPLING VALVES
A. Quick coupling valves shall be as shown on the drawings.

B. Install in 10” diameter plastic valve box as detailed.

2.09 CONTROLLERS
A. Controller’s size and model shall be as listed on the drawings.

B. Final location(s) of controller shall be approved by the Project Representative.

C. Controller requires 120v power. Maximum power output of controller is 2.5 amps.

D. Install Controller and accessories as detailed and per Manufacturer’s details.

2.10 TWO WIRE CABLE
A. Irrigation control wires: solid copper with U.L. approval for direct burial in ground. Size #14awg wire with a jacketed 2-conductor. Preferred wire make and model is the Paige irrigation wire or approved equal. All splicing shall be made with 3M SCOTCHLOK 3570 waterproof splice kit.

B. Two wire cable shall be installed within 1¼” Schedule 40 grey PVC with Schedule 40 fittings and Schedule 40 electrical long sweeps elbows at all changes in direction. Pull boxes shall be located a maximum of 250 feet on center, adjacent to controller, and at each change of direction.

2.11 CONDUIT PULL BOXES
A. In Landscaped Areas: Conduit pull boxes shall be Carson Model 1419, or approved equal plastic valve box with a lockable plastic lid. Color shall be Gray and lockable. Heat brand box “PB”. Text height of letters to be 2”.

B. In concrete: All irrigation pull boxes placed in concrete surfacing, shall be high density reinforced concrete, with a steel checker plate, bolt-down lid, placed on a concrete footing, and marked “Irrigation”, dependent upon the utility housed within. Acceptable products shall be Christy N-9, Brooks, Quickset, or approved equal. Covers shall have cast brass hold-down lugs.

C. Pull boxes along a long conduit run shall be no more than 250 feet apart.

D. Each pull box shall be set on 6 inches, minimum, of clean drain rock.

E. Pull boxes shall be placed at all angle points in conduit runs.

2.12 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Electric remote control valves sizes shall be shown on drawings.

B. Electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC solenoid actuated globe pattern valve.

C. Valves shall be made of durable glass-filled nylon, brass or cast iron with a minimum pressure rating of 150 PSI
D. Valve shall have external and internal bleed for manual operation.

E. Where shown on details, all valves shall have one Schedule 80 PVC FIPT threaded true union ball valve with EPDM O-rings on the upstream side of valve and one Schedule 80 union on the downstream side of valve. Ball valve shall be IPEX VXE series, Asahi Type 21 or equal. Match valve size when sizing ball valve and union.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1668
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 10

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
F. All valves that service dripline or drip systems shall include a plastic wye filter and pressure regulator on the valve or a solid set 40 PSI plastic regulator downstream of the valve. Filters shall be rated to 120 psi, includes a 150 mesh disk or stainless steel screen.

2.13 IDENTIFICATION TAG
A. Identification tags for all electric control valves shall be manufactured by Christy. Tag numbers shall match stationing in controller and as shown on as-built drawings. Provide one yellow station number tag for each electric control valve as follows:

1. Potable water systems: Christy ID.STD.Y1

2.14 VALVES BOXES
A. ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVE BOXES:

1. All electric remote control valve boxes that service non-drip systems shall be installed within a Carson model 1419 (14”x19”) or 1220 (13” x 20”) plastic valve box with bolt down plastic lid or approved equal. Size of box is dependent on the size of valve. Lid shall be marked: "Irrigation Control Valve."

2. All electric remote control valve boxes that service dripline or drip systems shall be installed within a Carson model 1220 plastic valve box with bolt down plastic lid or approved equal. Lid shall be marked: "Irrigation Control Valve."

3. Use black colored boxes in shrub and groundcover areas and green in turf areas.

4. Heat brand controller letter and numbers into lid. Minimum text height to be 2”.

B. GATE VALVE AND QUICK COUPLING VALVE BOXES:

1. All gate valve and quick coupling valve shall be installed within a Carson Model 910-18” depth plastic valve box with plastic lid or approved equal. Use 8” or 10” sleeve to encase gate valve.

2. Use black colored boxes in shrub and groundcover areas and green in turf areas.

3. Heat brand the letters “GV” into lid. Minimum text height to be 2”.

C. DRIP COMPONENT BOXES:

1. All drip components shall be installed within a 6” round black plastic valve box with plastic lid. Carson Model 708 plastic valve box with plastic lid or approved

2.15 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. All sprinkler heads shall be as listed on the drawings.

B. Pop-up spray sprinklers shall include a built in check valve in the body to hold up to 14 feet of head.

C. Pop-up spray sprinklers shall include built in pressure regulation in the body.

D. Use 30 psi regulators for all spray nozzles and 45 psi regulators for all rotating nozzles.

Use 12” pop-ups in shrub and ground cover areas and 6” pop-ups in turf areas.

E. Riser units and nipples shall be the same size as the inlet to the sprinkler body.

2.16 BUBBLERS
A. Bubblers shall be as listed on the drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1669
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 11

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
B. Bubblers shall be pressure compensating from 20 psi to 60 psi.

C. The bubbler body shall be manufactured with UV Stabilizers and have ½” FIPT threads for connection to ½” MNPT male adaptor or nipple.

D. Flow rate molded onto the bubbler for easy identification E. Where low head drainage occurs, each bubbler shall have a check valve installed. Hunter HC-50F-50M or approved equal.

2.17 DRIPLINE & DRIPLINE COMPONENTS
A. Dripline shall be as listed on the drawings.

B. Tubing shall be low density, UV resistant, polyethylene tubing with internal pressurecompensating, drip emitters impregnated into the tubing spaced at 12 or 18 inches C. The built in emitters shall be capable of delivering 0.6 gallons per hour per emitter.

D. All dripline systems shall have a manual flush valve at each isolated zone within the systems. Multiple flush valves may be required per drip zone.

2.18 CHECK VALVE
A. Spring check valve shall be Schedule 40 PVC with ½ lb spring and stem rated at 150 PSI.

B. Check valves shall be NDS. Use KSC series swing check valve for all uphill flow direction valves and KC series spring check for all downhill flow direction valves. Size per line size of lateral line.

2.19 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Solvent cement and primer for solvent weld joints shall be of make and type approved by manufacturer(s) of pipe and fittings. Cement shall be maintained at proper consistency throughout use.

B. Pipe joint compound shall be non-hardening, non-toxic materials designed specifically for use on threaded connections in water carrying pipe. Performance shall be same as RectorSeal #5.

2.20 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all equipment called for by the drawings.

B. Provide to the Project Representative at completion of the maintenance period, three (3) each of all operating and servicing keys and wrenches required for complete maintenance and operation of all heads and valve. Include all wrenches necessary for complete disassembly of all heads and valves.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Schedule and coordinate placement of materials and equipment in a manner to effect the earliest completion of work in conformance with construction and progress schedule.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1670
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 12

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Protect work and materials from damage during construction and storage as directed by the Project Representative.

B. Handle plastic pipe carefully; especially protect it from prolonged exposure to sunlight.

Any section of pipe that has been damaged will be discarded and removed and replaced if installed.

3.03 LAYOUT
A. Lay out work as accurately as possible in accordance with diagrammatic drawings.

B. Where site conditions do not permit location of piping, valves and heads where shown, notify Project Representative immediately and determine relocation in joint conference.

C. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out the routing of all pressurized main lines and sprinkler heads for approval by Project Representative.

D. Run pipelines and automatic control wiring in common trenches wherever practical.

3.04 EXCAVATING AND TRENCHING
A. Work shall be performed when soils are reasonably dry and not saturated.

B. Trenching

1. Excavations shall be open vertical construction sufficiently wide to provide free working space around the work installed and to provide ample space for backfilling and compacting.

2. In existing turf areas remove sod with sod cutter. Roll and set aside. Replace immediately after installing conduit (three days maximum), backfilling and compacting.

3. Depth of trenches shall be pipelines deep enough to provide minimum cover from finish grade as follows.
a. 18” minimum cover over main lines to control valves and quick coupling valves. Refer to legend for depth requirements.
b. 18” minimum cover over control wires from controller to valves. Refer to legend for depth requirements.
c. 12” minimum cover over RCV controlled lateral lines to sprinkler heads. 18” depth will be required at all 12” pop-up sprinklers. Refer to legend for depth requirements.

4. Trenches shall be excavated to such depths as will permit the pipe to be laid at the elevations, slopes, or depths of cover indicated on the drawings, and at uniform slopes between indicated elevations.

5. Whenever cobbles larger than 2 inches in size are present in earthen subgrade, the trench section shall be excavated to the lines required. Every effort shall be made to keep the sides of the trenches firm and undisturbed until backfilling has been completed and consolidated. Trenches shall be excavated with approximately vertical sides between the elevation of the bottom of the pipe and an elevation one foot above the top of the pipe.

6. When two pipes are to be placed in the same trench, maintain a 4” space between pipes as minimum.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1671
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 13

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

7. Where other utilities interfere with irrigation trenching and pipe work, adjust the trench depth as instructed by the Project Representative.

8. Restore surfaces, existing underground installations, etc., damaged or cut as a result of excavations, to original conditions in a manner approved by the Project Representative.

C. Backfilling:

1. Backfill materials shall be approved native soil in all landscaped areas. Unsuitable material, including clods and rocks over 2inches in size shall be removed from the premises by Contractor and disposed of legally at no cost to the Project Representative.

2. Backfill only after piping has been tested, inspected and approved.

3. Place backfill materials in 6” layers and compact by jetting or tamping to a minimum compaction of 90 percent of original soil density.

4. Dress off areas to finish grades and remove excess soil, rocks or debris remaining after backfill is completed.

5. All backfilling shall be properly compacted so as to avoid future settlement.

6. If settlement occurs along trenches, and adjustments in pipes, valves and sprinkler heads, soil, sod or paving are necessary to bring the system, soil, sod or paving to the proper level or the permanent grade, the Contractor, as part of the work under this contract, shall make all adjustments without extra cost to the project.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVING UNDER ASPHALT OR CONCRETE A. General: Layout of the piping system shall be per the drawings and to the depth specified above.

B. Under Existing Pavement:

1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring or hydraulic driving, except that no hydraulic driving will be permitted under asphaltic concrete pavement.

2. Where cutting of existing pavement is necessary, provide alternate routes for vehicular traffic. After placement of pipes, backfill trench and compact to 95%.

Replace entire section of base rock and hardscape to match existing conditions.

C. Inspection of Pipe and Fittings: Carefully inspect all pipe fittings before installation, removing all dirt, scale and burrs; ream as required. Install all pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification.

D. Installation of Sleeving:

1. Sleeving shall be installed a minimum of 24 inches below grade.

2. Sleeving shall extend 24 inches beyond the edge of finished concrete surface.

3. Trenches containing sleeves shall be backfilled with material that consists of unwashed creek or bank gravel, crushed grave, crushed rock, sand or a mixture of these materials. If must be free from roots, vegetable matter or other deleterious substance and shall be of such nature and so graded that it will bind readily when watered and compacted. Backfill with such material to the bottom of the concrete or hardscape section and compacted to a minimum of 90%. Where the sleeve extends beyond the edge of the hardscape or concrete, the sleeve shall be back8.e November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1672
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 14

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
filled with native soil or imported topsoil, which ever is specified. If nothing is specified, use previously excavated native soil.

4. Prior to placement of concrete, the ends of the sleeves shall be marked with a stake that shall be exposed approximately 2”-3” above rough, or finished grade to identify sleeve locations. On all street crossing, the location shall be marked at the edge of concrete or hardscape with a chiseled line or “x”, and the stake removed.

3.06 ASSEMBLING PIPELINES
A. PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner which will provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Pipe routing is diagrammatic and shall be installed in such a manner as to conform with the details.

B. In joining, use only the specified solvent and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods. Give solvent welds at least 16 minutes set-up time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling with water.

C. All pipe shall be assembled free from dirt and pipe scale. Field cut ends shall be reamed only to full pipe diameter with rough edges and burrs removed.

D. Install 3” wide detectable warning tape above all pressurized main lines as shown in the details. Use Christy model #TA-DT-3-BIRR for potable irrigation systems E. Solvent Weld Joint:

1. Prepare joint by first making sure the pipe end is square. Then, de-burring the pipe end, and clean pipe and fitting of dirt, dust and moisture.

2. Dry insert pipe into fitting to check for proper sizing. Pipe should enter fitting 1/3 to 2/3 depth of socket.

3. Coat the inside socket surface of the fitting and the male end of the pipe with P70 primer (manufactured by Weld-On). Then without delay, apply Weld-On 711 cement liberally to the male end of the pipe and also apply 711 cement lightly to the inside of the socket. At this time, apply a second coat of cement to the pipe end.

4. Insert pipe immediately into fitting and turn 1/4 turn to distribute cement and remove air bubbles. The pipe must seat to the bottom of the socket and fitting.

Check alignment of the fitting. Pipe and fitting shall be aligned properly without strain to either.

5. Hold joint still for approximately thirty (30) seconds and then wipe the excess cement from the pipe and fitting.

6. Cure joint a minimum of thirty (30) minutes before handling, at least six (6) hours before allowing water in the pipe.

F. Threaded Joint:

1. Field threading of plastic pipe or fittings is not permitted. Only factory formed threads will be permitted.

2. Factory made nipples shall be used wherever possible. Field cut threads in metallic pipe will be permitted only where absolutely necessary. When field threading, cut threads accurately on axis with sharp dies.

3. All threaded joints shall be made up with pipe joint compound. Apply compound to male threads only.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1673
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 15

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

4. Where assembling metallic pipe to metallic fitting or valve, not more than three (3) full threads shall show when joint is made up.

5. Where assembling to threaded plastic fitting, take up joint no more than one full turn beyond hand tight.

6. Where assembling plastic pipe, use strap type friction wrench only; do not use metal-jawed wrench.

G. Cap or plug openings as pipeline is assembled to prevent entrance of dirt or obstructions. Remove caps or plugs only when necessary to continue assembly.

H. Where pipes or control wires pass through sleeves, provide removable nondecaying plug at ends of sleeve to prevent entrance of earth.

I. For plastic-to-steel connections, work the steel connections first; use a nonhardening non-lead base pipe dope on all threaded plastic-to-steel connections and use only light wrench pressure. All plastic-to-steel connections shall be made with SCH 80 PVC nipple or plastic male adapters.

3.07 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A. Install where shown on drawings and group together where practical. Limit one remote control valve per box.

B. Locate valve boxes 12” from and perpendicular to walk edges, buildings and walls.

Provide 12” between valve boxes where valves are grouped together.

C. Thoroughly flush main line before installing valves.

D. Install in shrub or groundcover areas where possible.

E. Label control line wire at each valve with an I.D. tag, indicating identification number of valve (controller and station number). Attach label to control wire.

F. Flow control stems shall be adjusted or tuned per manufacturer recommendations.

G. Install 18GA ½” x ½” square hot dipped galvanized wire mesh under all valve boxes and wrap up the sides of the valves. Adhere wire mesh to sides of box with stainless-steel screws and washers as required. Refer to details for more information.

3.08 TWO WIRE CABLE
A. Run lines along mains wherever practical.

B. Loop a minimum of two (2) feet of extra wire in each valve box.

C. Connections shall be made by crimping bare wires with brass connectors and sealing with watertight resin sealer packs per manufacturer specifications.

D. Splicing will be permitted only at valve/decoder connections and at main line tee branches. Do not splice in wire pull boxes. Locate all splices within valve boxes or in a two wire splice box.

E. Where two wire cable passes under paving, they shall pass through Schedule 40 electrical PVC conduit. (NOT REQUIRED IF TWO WIRE IS SPECIFIED IN CONDUIT)

3.09 TWO WIRE CABLE IN CONDUIT:

A. Install cable in PVC electrical conduit with pull/splice boxes located as shown on plans and as required. This conduit shall be dedicated to irrigation control wires only.

B. For all cable runs, pull/junction boxes will be required every 250 linear feet of conduit run.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1674
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 16

IRRIGATION SYSTEM
C. All electrical equipment and wiring shall comply with local and state codes and be installed by personnel skilled and licensed in the trade.

D. Connecting and splicing of wire at the valves shall be made using approved materials and shall be made by crimping bare wires with brass connectors and sealing with watertight resin sealer packs. 3M DBY-6 or approved equal.

E. All splices shall be placed within a valve box. Leave a 24” long coil, at each pull box, or splice location.

3.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER
A. Provide and install automatic irrigation controller in approximate locations shown on drawings. The exact location will be determined on the site by the Project Representative.

Provide conduit and wire and connect to 120 volt switch accessible to controller for ease of maintenance.

3.11 QUICK COUPLING VALVES
A. Thoroughly flush lines before installing quick coupling valves.

B. Locate quick coupling valves as shown in the drawings and details.

C. Locate valve boxes 12” from and perpendicular to walk edges, buildings and walls.

Provide 12” between other valve boxes where valves are grouped together.

3.12 DRIPLINE AND DRIPLINE COMPONENTS
A. Thoroughly flush all driplines.

B. Install dripline a minimum of 12” away from all buildings and 6” off hardscapes for shrubs and groundcover. 2” of paving for all no-mow or sod type grasses.

C. Space driplines equally throughout the planting area as detailed. Refer to legend for emitter and row spacing of dripline. Adjust alternate rows so emitters are spaced in a triangular pattern.

D. All dripline tubing shall be buried 4” below finish grade and stapled down every 4’ and at each change in direction with a 6” tubing stake.

E. For slopes greater than 10:1, modify dripline row spacing on the bottom 1/3 of the slope to be 25% greater at the bottom of the slope.

F. Install flush valves at the low end of each drip zone minimum of 2 valves are required for each valve. Refer to manufacturer details for installation instructions.

G. Install air vacuum relief valve(s) at high point(s) of each planting area. Refer to drawings for approximate locations. Revise locations in field based on actual grades of the site.

Locate 1 valve per every 500’ of dripline. Refer to manufacturer details for installation instructions.

H. Thoroughly saturate soil prior to planting. Provide additional surface watering as required to keep plant root systems moist during planting establishment period.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Coverage Tests:

1. Perform coverage tests in the presence of Project Representative, after sprinkler or drip system is completed. Test system to assure that all areas are irrigated completely and uniformly.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1675
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 17

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

2. Do not spray onto pavement or structures. Adjust arc nozzles as needed to provide full coverage without over spray.

B. Adjusting and Cleaning:

1. System adjustment:
a. Valves: Adjust flow for proper operation.
b. Heads: Adjust for alignment and coverage.
c. If it is determined that coverage could be improved by adding additional driplines or a nozzle change, make such changes as required to provide adequate coverage to all plant material.
d. Perform final cleaning of all risers, dripline, heads, and equipment for proper operation. Demonstrate operation and uniform coverage in the presence of the Project Representative prior before final acceptance.

3.14 TESTING
A. General

1. Notify the Project Representative at least three (3) days in advance of testing.

2. Furnish all necessary testing equipment and personnel.

3. Perform testing at his/hers own expense.

4. Correct all leaks and retest until acceptance by the Project Representative.

5. Center load piping with small amount of backfill to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. No fitting shall be covered
B. Closing uninspected work: Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Project Representative and other authorized agencies.

C. Flushing: Before backfilling the main line, and with all control valves in place but before lateral pipes are connected, completely flush and test the main line and repair all leaks.

Flush out each section of lateral pipe before sprinkler heads are attached.

D. Perform test as specified below. Remake any faulty joints with all new materials. Use of cement or caulking to seal leaks is absolutely prohibited.

E. Pressure Testing Procedure:

1. Apply the following tests after welded plastic pipe joints have cured at least twenty-four (24) hours.
a. Solvent Weld Mainline: Remove all the air from the piping system then test live (constant pressure) and QCV lines hydrostatically at 125 PSI minimum.

Lines will be approved if test pressure is maintained for six (6) hours. The lines shall be restored to the original test pressure. The Contractor shall make tests and repairs as necessary until test conditions are met. b. Test RCV controlled lateral lines with water at line pressure and visually inspect for leaks. Retest after correcting defects.

F. Final Inspection

1. Thoroughly clean, adjust and balance all systems.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1676
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
RMA 100% Submittal / Bid Set 328400 - 18

IRRIGATION SYSTEM

2. Demonstrate the entire system to the Irrigation Consultant and/or, if required, authorized agent and other governing agencies providing that all remote control valves are properly balanced, that all heads are properly adjusted for radius and arc of coverage, and that the installed system is workable, clean and sufficient.

3.15 GUARANTEE
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to fill and repair all depressions and replace all necessary lawn and planting due to the settlement of irrigation trenches for one year following completion and acceptance of the job.

B. The Contractor shall also guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship furnished by him to be free of all defects of workmanship and materials, and shall agree to replace at his expense, at any time within one year after installation is accepted, any and all defective parts that may be found.

3.16 MAINTENANCE
A. Continuously maintain irrigation system in areas indicated in the Contract during the progress of work and for a period of 12 months after substantial completion.

B. It is Contractor's responsibility to turn over the irrigation in a first-class condition at the end of the maintenance period.

C. Maintenance Schedule: Contractor shall submit schedule of maintenance tasks to be performed for Project Representative review and approval. At a minimum, maintenance staff shall be on-site two times per month. It is not the intention of these Specifications to allow a "quick cleanup" at the end of the maintenance period, but rather that the work be continuous and ongoing.

D. Proper irrigation system maintenance includes the overall supervision of the system, controller scheduling, routine adjustments and necessary repairs.

E. Maintain irrigation system for optimum performance, as per manufacturer’s specifications, by inspecting the entire system on an on-going basis. This includes cleaning and adjusting all bubbler heads, dripline and valves for proper coverage.

3.17 CLEAN-UP
A. Preservation and Cleaning: The Contractor shall clean up the work as it progresses. At frequent intervals, and at all times when directed by the Project Representative, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of accumulations of rubbish and debris of all kinds.

At the time of completion, the entire site shall be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish, etc., all of which shall be removed from the site; and the entire project, including surrounding premises, shall be left in proper, clean condition ready for acceptance.

END OF SECTION 32 84 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1677
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 1
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
SECTION 329300 - PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 Earthmoving
B. Section 329415 Suspended Pavement System
C. Section 334727 Bioretention

1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Trees.

2. Shrubs.

3. Ground cover.

4. Plants.

5. Planting soil.

6. Organic mulch.

7. Bioretention mulch.

8. Maintenance of all specified plants until the beginning of the warranty period.

9. Plant warranty.

10. Clean up and disposal of all excess and surplus material.

11. Maintenance of all specified plants during the warranty period.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. The following specifications and standards of the organizations and documents listed in this paragraph form a part of the specification to the extent required by the references thereto. In the event that the requirements of the following referenced standards and specification conflict with this specification section the requirements of this specification shall prevail. In the event that the requirements of any of the following referenced standards and specifications conflict with each other the more stringent requirement shall prevail or as determined by the Owners Representative.

1. State of California, Department of Food and Agriculture, Regulations for Nursery Inspections, Rules and Grading.

2. ANSI Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock, most current edition.

3. ANSI A 300 – Standard Practices for Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance, most current edition and parts.

4. Interpretation of plant names and descriptions shall reference the following documents.

Where the names or plant descriptions disagree between the several documents, the most current document shall prevail.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1678
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 2
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

5. USDA - The Germplasm Resources Information Network (GRIN) http://www.arsgrin.gov/npgs/searchgrin.html

6. Manual of Woody Landscape Plants; Michael Dirr; Stipes Publishing, Champaign, Illinois; Most Current Edition.

7. The New Sunset Western Garden Book, Oxmoor House, most current edition.

8. Pruning practices shall conform to recommendations “Structural Pruning: A Guide For The Green Industry” most current edition; published by Urban Tree Foundation, Visalia, California.

9. Glossary of Arboricultural Terms, International Society of Arboriculture, Champaign IL, most current edition.

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container with well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and size of exterior plant required.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Topsoil: The top layer of soil from an undisturbed site, described as the A horizon. Topsoil is rich in organic content, is usually dark in color, and has desirable physical properties for plant growth.

D. Surface soil: Soil which may be used to produce acceptable planting soil, but which is not necessarily the A horizon.

E. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

F. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments to meet the requirements specified herein and per the soil test report.

G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Notify Landscape Architect 2 weeks in advance to tag trees at nursery. Submit photographs prior.

C. Photographs of trees to be shipped to site. Include a person in the photographs to show scale.

Include close-up of trunk with ruler to show trunk caliper.

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. 0.5 lb or organic mulch in labeled plastic bag.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product manufacturer, and complying with the following:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1679
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 3
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

F. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

G. Material Soil Test Reports and Lab Report Recommendations: For imported topsoil, planting soil, amendments, and bioswale soil. Lab Report Recommendations shall be informed by submitted soils, site conditions, and proposed planting.

H. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of exterior plants.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

C. Soil Analysis for imported topsoil and planting soil: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soiltesting laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material (including gravel content); pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.

1. Report suitability of soil for plant growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory planting soil as specified herein.
a. Report shall recommend “Bay Friendly” organic soil amendments only and shall avoid synthetic fertilizers and amendments if possible. b. Report shall make soil amendment recommendations specific to plant palette indicated.

2. Provide soils analyses of amended planting soils and import topsoil to verify compliance with specifications and soils report recommendations.

D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip.

F. Observation: Landscape Architect will observe and tag trees at place of growth and shrubs at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Owner’s Representative retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1680
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 4
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

1. Notify Landscape Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect.

Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.

B. Handle planting stock by root ball.

C. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

2. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.

1.9 COORDINATION
A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during the following period. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.

1. Fall Planting: October 1 – December 31.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following plants for the warranty period indicated against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Plants: Six months from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Remove dead plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

4. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

5. A limit of one replacement of each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Trees and Shrubs: Maintain for the following maintenance period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening, and repairing stakes and

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1681
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 5
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Restore or replace damaged tree wrappings.

1. Maintenance Period: 90 days from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Ground Cover and Plants: Maintain for the following maintenance period by watering, weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings:

1. Maintenance Period: 90 days from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Owner’s Authorized Representative, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.

D. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs is shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number label to assure symmetry in planting.

E. Plant Quality:

1. General: Provide healthy stock, grown in a nursery and reasonably free of die-back, disease, insects, eggs, bores, and larvae. At the time of planting all plants shall have a root system, stem, and branch form that will not restrict normal growth, stability and health for the expected life of the plant

2. Plant quality above the soil line:
a. Plants shall be healthy with the color, shape, size and distribution of trunk, stems, branches, buds and leaves normal to the plant type specified. Tree quality above the soil line shall comply with the project Crown Acceptance details (or Florida Grades and Standards, tree grade Florida Fancy or Florida #1) and the following:
b. Crown: The form and density of the crown shall be typical for a young specimen of the species or cultivar pruned to a central and dominant leader. 1) Crown specifications do not apply to plants that have been specifically trained in the nursery as topiary, espalier, multi-stem, clump, or unique selections such as contorted or weeping cultivars.
c. Leaves: The size, color, and appearance of leaves shall be typical for the time of year and stage of growth of the species or cultivar. Trees shall not show signs of prolonged moisture stress or over watering as indicated by wilted, shriveled, or dead leaves.
d. Branches: Shoot growth (length and diameter) throughout the crown should be appropriate for the age and size of the species or cultivar. Trees shall not have dead, diseased, broken, distorted, or otherwise injured branches. 1) Main branches shall be distributed along the central leader not clustered together. They shall form a balanced crown appropriate for the cultivar/species.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1682
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 6
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
2) Branch diameter shall be no larger than two-thirds (one-half is preferred) the diameter of the central leader measured 1 inch above the branch union. 3) The attachment of the largest branches (scaffold branches) shall be free of included bark.
e. Trunk: The tree trunk shall be relatively straight, vertical, and free of wounds that penetrate to the wood (properly made pruning cuts, closed or not, are acceptable and are not considered wounds), sunburned areas, conks (fungal fruiting bodies), wood cracks, sap leakage, signs of boring insects, galls, cankers, girdling ties, or lesions (mechanical injury).
f. Temporary branches, unless otherwise specified, can be present along the lower trunk below the lowest main (scaffold) branch, particularly for trees less than 1 inch in caliper. These branches should be no greater than 3/8-inch diameter. Clear trunk should be no more than 40% of the total height of the tree. g. Trees shall have one central leader. If the leader was headed, a new leader (with a live terminal bud) at least one-half the diameter of the pruning cut shall be present. 1) All trees are assumed to have one central leader trees unless a different form is specified in the plant list or drawings.
h. All graft unions, where applicable, shall be completely closed without visible sign of graft rejection. All grafts shall be visible above the soil line. i. Trunk caliper and taper shall be sufficient so that the lower five feet of the trunk remains vertical without a stake. Auxiliary stake may be used to maintain a straight leader in the upper half of the tree.

3. Plant quality at or below the soil line:
a. Plant roots shall be normal to the plant type specified. Root observations shall take place without impacting tree health. Root quality at or below the soil line shall comply with the project Root Acceptance details and the following:
1) The roots shall be reasonably free of scrapes, broken or split wood. 2) The root system shall be reasonably free of injury from biotic (e.g., insects and pathogens) and abiotic (e.g., herbicide toxicity and salt injury) agents.

Wounds resulting from root pruning used to produce a high quality root system are not considered injuries.
3) A minimum of three structural roots reasonably distributed around the trunk (not clustered on one side) shall be found in each plant. Root distribution shall be uniform throughout the root ball, and growth shall be appropriate for the species.
a) Plants with structural roots on only one side of the trunk (J roots) shall be rejected.
4) The root collar shall be within the upper 2 inches of the substrate/soil. Two structural roots shall reach the side of the root ball near the top surface of the root ball. The grower may request a modification to this requirement for species with roots that rapidly descent, provided the grower removes all stem girdling roots above the structural roots across the top of the root ball. 5) The root system shall be reasonably free of stem girdling roots over the root collar or kinked roots from nursery production practices. 6) At time of observations and delivery, the root ball shall be moist throughout.

Roots shall not show signs of excess soil moisture conditions as indicated by stunted, discolored, distorted, or dead roots.

2.2 SHADE AND FLOWERING TREES
A. Shade Trees: Single-stem trees with straight trunk, well-balanced crown, and intact leader, of height and caliper indicated, complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees required. Leaders shall not have been pruned at the nursery and shall not be pruned by Contractor.

1. Provide container-grown trees.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1683
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 7
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

2.3 BROADLEAF EVERGREENS
A. Form and Size: Normal-quality, well-balanced, broadleaf evergreens, of type, height, spread, and shape required, complying with ANSI Z60.1.

1. Provide container-grown trees.

2.4 GROUND COVER PLANTS
A. Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.

2.5 PLANTS
A. Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed.

2.6 PLANTING SOIL
A. Planting Soil characteristics:

1. Meets ASTM D 5268

2. pH: 5.5 to 7

3. Organic content: 4 percent

4. Soluble salts: less than 2 dS/m

5. Texture: 40-65% Sand, 25-60% Silt, 5-20% Clay.

B. Topsoil Source: Use the following sources as applicable and amend per soils analysis recommendations and to meet Planting Soil characteristics.

1. Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

C. YARD WASTE COMPOST

1. Gradation: A minimum of 90% of the material by weight shall pass a ½” screen. Material passing the ½” screen shall meet the following criteria.

Percent Passing Sieve Designation
85 – 100 9.51 mm (3/8”)
50 – 80 2.38 mm (No. 8)
0 – 40 500 micron (No. 35)

2. 3. Organic content: Minimum 50% based on dry weight and determined by ash method.

Minimum 250 lbs. organic matter per cubic yard of compost.

4. 5. Carbon to nitrogen ratio: Maximum 35:1.

6. pH: 5.5 – 8.0 as determined in saturated paste.

7. 8. Soluble salts: Soluble nutrients typically account for most of the salinity levels but sodium should account for less than 25% of the total. To avoid a leaching requirement, the

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1684
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 8
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
addition of the compost shall result in a final ECe of the amended soil of less than 4.0 dS/m @ 25 degrees C. as determined in a saturation extract.

Use the following table to determine the maximum allowable ECe (dS/m of saturation extract) of compost at the desired use rate.
3 dS/m 2 dS/m 1 dS/m
2 11 7 14 21
3 16 5 9.5 14
4 22 3.5 7 10.5
5 27 3 5.5 8.5
Desired Use Rate Salinity (ECe) of On-Site Soil
Maximum ECe of Compost
Cu. Yds. Amendment
per 1000 sq. ft. for
incorporation to 6"
depth
Volume Percentage
of Amendment
Example: Specification calls for 4 cu. yds. compost per 1000 sq. ft. to a 6” depth, and site soil has an ECe of 2.0. In order to avoid exceeding an ECe of 4 in the final blend, compost ECe should be less than 5.5 dS/m.

9. Contaminants: The compost shall be free of contaminants such as glass, metal and visible plastic. Heavy metals, fecal coliform, and Salmonella sp shall not exceed levels outlined in California Integrated Waste Management regulations.

10. Maturity characteristics:
a. Color:
b. ark brown to black
c. Odor: Acceptable = none, soil-like, musty or moldy. Unacceptable = sour, ammonia or putrid.
d. Particle characterization: identifiable wood pieces are acceptable but the balance of material should be soil-like without recognizable grass or leaves.

2.7 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent.

1. If magnesuim is required, provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.

E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

F. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum of 90 percent calcium sulfate.

G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1685
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 9
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.

I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.

2.8 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing 1/2-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.

B. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

2.9 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.

2.10 COMPOSTED WOOD MULCH
A. Composted Wood Mulch shall be stable, weed free organic matter sourced from waste materials including yard debris, wood wastes or other organic materials, not including biosolids or manure feedstock. Composted Wood Mulch shall be tested for and conform to all requirements of Section

2.6.C. Composted Wood Mulch shall also conform to California Code of Regulations Title 14, Division 7, Chapter 3.1 requirements, be certified through the USCC Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) Program, and meet the following:

1. Feedstocks: Composted Wood Mulch shall be derived from plant debris with at least 90% consisting of clean (minimal trash) woody vegetation such as “Arbor Mulch” (i.e., tree trunks, branches, stumps, and brush). Up to 10% by volume may be derived from other clean source-separated feed stocks, such food scraps, and/or other woody materials.

2. Composted Wood Mulch shall be screened to meet the following size gradation per TMECC 02.02-B (test shall be run on dry compost sample):

Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight
Min Max
3 inch 100 -
2 inch 90 -
3/8 inch 20 40

3. No dyes or fiber mulch (aka “gorilla hair”) shall be used in the finished mulch product.

4. A 5-gallon sample of the mulch product shall be submitted to the laboratory for testing, to provide enough fines from the product to complete the specific testing procedures.

5. Mulch shall be non-floating organic mulch.

6. Z-Best Organic Mulch, or approved equal.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1686
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 10
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

2.11 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Stakes: Stakes shall be lodge pole stakes free of knots and of diameters and lengths appropriate to the size of plant as required to adequately support the plant.

B. Hose Chafing Guard: Reinforced rubber or plastic hose at least 1/2 inch in diameter, black, cut to lengths required to protect tree trunks from damage.

C. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.

2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine the surface grades and soil conditions to confirm that the requirements of the Specification Section – Planting Soil - and the soil and drainage modifications indicated on the Planting Soil Plan and Details (if applicable) have been completed. Notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect’s acceptance of layout before planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

D. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation.

1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1687
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 11
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT
A. Excavate and remove unsuitable soil as indicated.

B. Rip and cross rip subgrade to 8” depth, loosen all compacted areas.

C. Mix planting soil and loosened subgrade to create transition zone as indicated.

D. Place planting soil over transition zone to finish grade of planting area in 6” lifts. Lightly compact each lift.

E. Do not proceed if planting soil or subsoil is muddy or excessively wet.

F. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

G. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.

3.4 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base.

Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.

B. Obstructions: Notify Owner’s Authorized Representative if unexpected rock, pavement, or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

C. Drainage: Perform a percolation test from the bottom of a tree pit. Dig a hole 12” deep from the bottom of the tree pit and fill it with water, then check it regularly for the next 24 hours. If the test hole drains in less than 4 hours, drainage is good; 5-12 hours means moderate drainage; 12-24 hours indicates poor/slow drainage. Notify Landscape Architect of percolation test results. If subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water retention in tree or shrub pits, tree sumps or other drainage enhancements may be required.

D. If soils are saline or sodic, leach tree pits by filling excavations with water and allowing to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs.

3.5 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING
A. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball flush with adjacent finish grades per details.

1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.

2. Place backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle fill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. Place and tamp final layer of planting soil mix and water thoroughly.

3.6 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs only as directed by Owner’s Authorized Representative.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1688
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 12
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

3.7 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated.

B. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.

C. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.

D. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.

3.8 PLANTING BED MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of all planting beds and other areas indicated.

1. Organic Mulch: Apply organic mulch to thickness indicated, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems.

3.9 CLEAN-UP
A. During installation, keep the site free of trash, pavements reasonably clean and work area in an orderly condition at the end of each day. Remove trash and debris in containers from the site no less than once a week.

1. Immediately clean up any spilled or tracked soil, fuel, oil, trash or debris deposited by the Contractor from all surfaces within the project or on public right of ways and neighboring property.
a. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures.

Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. The Owner’s Representative’s seals are to remain on the trees and removed at the end of the warranty period.

B. Once installation is complete, wash all soil from pavements and other structures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site.

The Owner’s Representative’s seals are to remain on the trees and removed at the end of the warranty period.

C. Make all repairs to grades, ruts, and damage by the plant installer to the work or other work at the site.

D. Remove and dispose of all excess planting soil, subsoil, mulch, plants, packaging, and other material brought to the site by the Contractor.

3.10 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall protect planting and related work and other site work from damage due to planting operations, operations by other Contractors or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation until Substantial Completion Acceptance. Treat, repair or replace damaged work immediately.

B. Damage done by the Contractor, or any of their sub-contractors to existing or installed plants, or any other parts of the work or existing feature to remain, including roots, trunks, or branches of large existing trees, soil, paving, utilities, lighting, irrigation, other finished work and surfaces

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1689
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 13
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
including those on adjacent property, shall be cleaned, repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative shall determine when such cleaning, replacement, or repair is satisfactory.

3.11 PLANT MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE A. During the project work period and prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance, the Contractor shall maintain all plants.

B. Maintenance during the period prior to Substantial Completion Acceptance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, removal of dead material, repairing and replacing of tree stakes, tightening and repairing of guys, repairing and replacing of damaged tree wrap material, resetting plants to proper grades and upright position, and furnishing and applying such sprays as are necessary to keep plantings reasonably free of damaging insects and disease, and in healthy condition. The threshold for applying insecticides and herbicide shall follow established Integrated Pest Management (IPM) procedures. Mulch areas shall be kept reasonably free of weeds.

3.12 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon written notice from the Contractor, the Owners Representative shall review the work and make a determination if the work is substantially complete.

1. Notification shall be at least 7 days prior to the date the contractor is requesting the review.

B. The date of substantial completion of the planting shall be the date when the Owner’s Representative accepts that all work in Planting, Planting Soil, and Irrigation installation sections is complete.

C. The Plant Warranty period begins at date of written notification of substantial completion from the Owner’s Representative. The date of substantial completion may be different than the date of substantial completion for the other sections of the project.

3.13 MAINTENANCE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD BY THE PLANT INSTALLER A. During the warranty period, provide all maintenance for all plantings to keep the plants in a healthy state and the planting areas clean and neat.

B. General requirements:

1. All work shall be undertaken by trained planting crews under the supervision of a foreman with a minimum of 5 years of experience supervising commercial plant maintenance crews.

2. All chemical and fertilizer applications shall be made by licensed applicators for the type of chemicals to be used. All work and chemical use shall comply with all applicable local, provincial and federal requirements.

3. Assure that hoses and watering equipment and other maintenance equipment does not block paths or be placed in a manner that may create tripping hazards. Use standard safety warning barriers and other procedures to maintain the site in a safe manner for visitors at all times.

4. All workers shall wear required safety equipment and apparel appropriate for the tasks being undertaken.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1690
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 14
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

5. The Contractor shall not store maintenance equipment at the site at times when they are not in use unless authorized in writing by the Owner’s Representative.

6. Maintenance vehicles shall not park on the site including walks and lawn areas at any time without the Owner’s Representative’s written permission.

7. Maintain a detailed log of all maintenance activities including types of tasks, date of task, types and quantities of materials and products used, watering times and amounts, and number of each crew. Periodically review the logs with the Owner’s Representative and submit a copy of the logs at the end of each year of the maintenance agreement.

8. Meet with the Owner’s Representative a minimum of three times a year to review the progress and discuss any changes that are needed in the maintenance program. At the end of the warranty period attend a handover meeting to formally transfer the responsibilities of maintenance to the Owner’s Representative. Provide all information on past maintenance activities and provide a list of critical tasks that will be needed over the next 12 months. Provide all maintenance logs and soil test data. Make the Contractor’s supervise available for a minimum of one year after the end of the warranty period to answer questions about past maintenance.

9. Contractor shall coordinate and attend monthly coordinated site review between installer and City maintenance staff.

10. Failure to comply with these general requirements may result in a monetary penalty issued at the Owner’s discretion.

C. Provide the following maintenance tasks:

1. Watering; Provide all water required to keep soil within and around the root balls at optimum moisture content for plant growth.
a. Maintain all watering systems and equipment and keep them operational. b. Monitor soil moisture to provide sufficient water. Check soil moisture and root ball moisture with a soil moisture meter on a regular basis and record moisture readings.

Do not overwater.

2. Soil nutrient levels: Take a minimum of 4 soil samples from around the site in the spring and fall and have them tested by an accredited agricultural soil testing lab for chemical composition of plant required nutrients, pH, salt and % organic matter. Test results shall include laboratory recommendations for nutrient applications. Apply fertilizers at rates recommended by the soil test.
a. Make any other soil test and/or plant tissue test that may be indicated by plant conditions that may not be related to soil nutrient levels such as soil contaminated by other chemicals or lack of chemical uptake by the plant.

3. Plant pruning: Remove cross over branching, shorten or remove developing co dominant leaders, dead wood and winter-damaged branches. Unless directed by the Owner’s Representative, do not shear plants or make heading cuts.

4. Restore plants: Reset any plants that have settled or are leaning as soon as the condition is noticed.

5. Guying and staking: Maintain plant guys in a taught position. Remove tree guys and staking after the first full growing season unless directed by Owner’s Representative.

6. Weed control: Keep all beds free of weeds. Hand-remove all weeds and any plants that do not appear on the planting plan. Chemical weed control is permitted only with the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Schedule weeding as needed but not less 12 times per year.

7. Trash removal: Remove all trash and debris from all planting beds and maintain the beds in a neat and tidy appearance. The number of trash and debris removal visits shall be no less than 12 times per year and may coincide with other maintenance visits.

8. Plant pest control: Maintain disease, insects and other pests at manageable levels.

Manageable levels shall be defined as damage to plants that may be noticeable to a professional but not to the average person. Use least invasive methods to control plant disease and insect outbreaks.

9. The Owner’s Representative must approve in advance the use of all chemical pesticide applications.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1691
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329300 - 15
Planting
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

10. Plant replacement: Replace all plants that are defective as defined in the warranty provisions, as soon as the plant decline is obvious and in suitable weather and season for planting as outlined in above sections. Plants that become defective during the maintenance period shall be covered and replaced under the warranty provisions.

11. Mulch: Refresh mulch once a year to maintain complete coverage but do not over mulch.

At no time shall the overall mulch thickness be greater that 4 inches. Do not apply mulch within 6 inches of the trunks or stems of any plants. Replacement mulch shall meet the requirements of the original approved material. Mulch shall be no more than one inch on top of the root ball surface.

12. Bed edging: Check and maintain edges between mulch and lawn areas in smooth neat lines as originally shown on the drawings.

13. Leaf, fruit and other plant debris removal: Remove fall leaf, spent flowers, fruit and plant part accumulations from beds and paved surfaces. Maintain all surface water drains free of debris. Debris removal shall be undertaken at each visit to weed or pick up trash in beds.

14. Damage from site use: Repair of damage by site visitors and events, beyond normal wear, are not part of this maintenance. The Owner’s Representative may request that the Contractor repair damage beds or plantings for an additional cost.

15. All additional work shall be approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative.

3.14 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

3.15 END OF WARRANTY FINAL ACCEPTANCE / MAINTENANCE OBSERVATION A. At the end of the Warranty and Maintenance period the Owner’s Representative shall observe the work and establish that all provisions of the contract are complete and the work is satisfactory.

1. If the work is satisfactory, the maintenance period will end on the date of the final observation.

2. If the work is deemed unsatisfactory, the maintenance period will continue at no additional expense to the Owner until the work has been completed, observed, and approved by the Owner’s Representative.

B. FAILURE TO PASS OBSERVATION: If the work fails to pass final observation, any subsequent observations must be rescheduled as per above. The cost to the Owner for additional observations will be charged to the Contractor at the prevailing hourly rate of the Owners Representative.

END OF SECTION 329300

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1692
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 1
Suspended Pavement System
SECTION 329451 - SUSPENDED PAVEMENT SYSTEM (SOIL CELL)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Silva Cell (Soil Cell) system for planting and paving, including Silva Cell assemblies and related accessories.

2. Other materials including, but not limited to, geotextile, geogrid, aggregate, subbase material, backfill, root barrier, Water + Air System, and planting soil.

B. Materials Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:

1. Planting soils are furnished in Section 32 93 00 - Planting.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2. Section 033300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

3. Section 321400 – Unit Paving

4. Section 328400 – Irrigation System

4. Section 329300 – Planting

1.02 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:

1. AGGREGATE BASE COURSE: Aggregate material between the paving and the top of the Silva Cell deck below, designed to distribute loads across the top of the deck.

3. AGGREGATE SUBBASE: Aggregate material between the bottom of the Silva Cell base and the compacted subgrade below, designed to distribute loads from the Silva Cell bases to the subgrade.

4. BACKFILL: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation beside the Silva Cell system to the excavation extents.

5. FINISH GRADE: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil or paving.

6. PLANTING SOIL: Soil as defined in Division 32, Section 329300 - Planting Soil, intended to fill the Silva Cell system and other planting spaces.

7. SILVA CELL (SOIL CELL) SYSTEM:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1693
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 2
Suspended Pavement System
a. Silva Cell: One assembled unit made up of 1 base, 6 post assemblies, and 1 Silva Cell deck.
b. Silva Cell System: Two or more Silva Cells used in combination with each other and with required accessories.

8. SUBGRADE: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill.

9. WALK-THROUGH COMPACTION: A process for light compaction of soils by walking through the soil following placement.
a. Walk through compaction shall result in 75-85 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method. Do not exceed root limiting compaction for the given soil type.

B. Reference Standards:

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
a. AASHTO H-20

2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. ASTM D448-12, Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction
b. ASTM D698-12e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 [600 kN-m/m3]) c. ASTM D1241-07, Standard Specification for Materials for Soil-Aggregate Subbase, Base, and Surface Courses
d. ASTM D3786/D3786M-13, Standard Test Method for Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics-Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method
e. ASTM D4491-99a(2014)e1, Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
f. ASTM D4533-D4533M-15, Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
g. ASTM D4632-D4632M-15, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles
h. ASTM D4751-12, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile
i. ASTM D4833/D4833M-07(2013)e1, Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes and Related Products
j. ASTM D5262-07(2012), Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfined Tension Creep and Creep Rupture Behavior of Geosynthetics k. ASTM D6241-14, Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Strength of Geotextile and Geotextile-Related Products Using a 50mm Probe

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1694
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 3
Suspended Pavement System
l. ASTM D6637-11, Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Properties of Geogrids by the Single or Multi-Rib Tensile Method

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Prior to installation of the Silva Cell system and associated Work, meet with the Contractor, Silva Cell system installer and their field supervisor, manufacturer's technical representative, the Landscape Architect, and the Owner’s Representative, and other entities concerned with the Silva Cell system performance.

1. Provide at least 72 hours advance notice to participants prior to convening preinstallation conference.

2. Introduce and provide a roster of individuals in attendance with contact information.

3. The preinstallation conference agenda will include, but is not limited to the review of:
a. Required submittals both completed and yet to be completed. b. The sequence of installation and the construction schedule. c. Coordination with other trades.
d. Details, materials, and methods of installation.
1) Review requirements for substrate conditions, special details, if any, installation procedures.
2) Installation layout, procedures, means and methods.
e. Mock-up requirements.

B. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. General: Prior to beginning Work of this Section, prepare a detailed schedule of the Work involved for coordination with other trades.

2. Schedule utility installations prior to beginning Work of this Section.

3. Where possible, schedule the installation of the Silva Cell system after the area is no longer required for use by other trades and Work. Where necessary to prevent damage, protect installed system if Work must occur over or adjacent to the installed Silva Cell system.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Submit in accordance with Division 01:

1. Product Data: For each type of product, submit manufacturer's product literature with technical data sufficient to demonstrate that the product meets these specifications.

2. Test and Evaluation Reports:
a. Submit results of compaction testing required by the Specifications for approval. b. Include analysis of bulk materials including soils and aggregates, by a recognized laboratory that demonstrates that the materials meet the Specification requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1695
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 4
Suspended Pavement System

3. Samples:
a. One full size sample of an assembled Silva Cell (copy of manufacturers brochure with images of product may be accepted in lieu of product sample). b. Manufacturer's product data/specification sheet for geogrid. c. Manufacturer's product data/specification sheet for geotextile. d. Manufacturer’s product data/specification sheet for Water + Air System components (when specified as part of the system)

4. Manufacturer's Report: Submit Silva Cell system manufacturer's letter of review and approval of the Project, including Drawings and Specifications, Addenda, Clarifications and Modifications, and for compliance with product installation requirements.

5. Qualification Statements:
a. Manufacturer:
1) Submit list of completed projects demonstrating durability and longevity of inplace systems. a) Include project name, location, and date of completion. b. Installer:
1) Submit documentation of the qualifications of the Silva Cell system installer and their field supervisor, sufficient to demonstrate that both meet the requirements specified in GP-Section 11 Guarantee - QUALITY ASSURANCE. 2) Submit list of completed projects of similar scope and scale demonstrating capabilities and experience.

B. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with Division 01:

1. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty, fully executed.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary permits/approvals from these authorities.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. A manufacturer whose product is manufactured in an ISO/TS 16949 compliant and ISO 9001 - 2008 registered factory.

2. A manufacturer with not less than 100 Silva Cell systems in-place, each system in use for not less than 7 years, confirming durability and longevity of the system.

3. A manufacturer with documented written approval of their product for use as a stormwater treatment device by a minimum of 3 governmental jurisdictions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1696
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 5
Suspended Pavement System

4. A manufacturer with an established and demonstrated utility service and repair process, including written procedure and photographs demonstrating work.

5. A manufacturer with a published operating and maintenance manual C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with not less than 5 years of successful experience installing Silva Cell systems or related products and materials, and whose work has resulted in successful installation of underground piping, chambers and vault structures, planting soils, and planter drainage systems of a similar scope and scale in dense urban areas.

D. Installer's Field Supervisor: A full-time supervisor employed by the installer with not less than 5 years of successful experience similar to that of the installer and present at the Project site when Work is in progress. Utilize the same field supervisor throughout the Project, unless a substitution is submitted to and approved in writing by the Landscape Architect.

E. Mock-Up: Prior to the installation of the Silva Cell system, construct a mock-up of the complete installation at the Project site in the presence of the Landscape Architect.

1. Size and Extent: Minimum of 100 sq. ft. (10 sq. m.) in area and including the complete Silva Cell system installation with subbase, aggregate subbase, drainage installation, Silva Cell decks, posts, and bases, base course aggregate, geotextile, geogrid, backfill, planting soil, and necessary accessories.

2. The mock-up area may remain as part of the installed Work at the end of the Project provided that it remains undamaged and meets the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Silva Cell System: Protect Silva Cell system components from damage during delivery, storage and handling.

1. Store components on smooth surfaces, free from dirt, mud and debris. Store under tarp to protect from sunlight when time from delivery to installation exceeds one week.

2. Perform handling with equipment appropriate to the size (height) of Silva Cells and site conditions; equipment may include, hand, handcart, forklifts, extension lifts, or small cranes, with care given to minimize damage to Silva Cell bases, posts, decks and adjacent assembled Silva Cells.

B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers indicating weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with State and Federal laws, if applicable. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while on the Project site.

1. Do not deliver or place backfill, soils, or soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

2. Provide protection including tarps, plastic and/or matting between bulk materials and finished surfaces sufficient to protect the finish material.

3. Bring planting soil to the site using equipment and methods that do not overly mix and further damage soil peds within the soil mix.

D. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties, water conveyance

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1697
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 6
Suspended Pavement System
systems, and walkways. Provide additional sediment control to retain excavated material, backfill, soil amendments and planting mix within the Project limits as needed.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions: Do not proceed with Work when subgrades, soils and planting soils are in a wet, muddy or frozen condition.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant the Silva Cell system to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by manufacturer's written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship as follows:

1. DeepRoot® warrants to the original purchaser of its Silva Cell™ product that such product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship, and perform to DeepRoot's written specifications for the warranted product, when installed and used as specifically provided in the product's installation guidelines for a period of 20 years from the date of purchase.

This warranty does not cover wear from normal use, or damage caused by abuse, mishandling, alterations, improper installation and/or assembly, accident, misuse, or lack of reasonable care of the product. This warranty does not apply to events and conditions beyond DeepRoot's control, such as ground subsidence or settlement, earthquakes and other natural events, acts of third parties, and/or Acts of God. If this warranty is breached, DeepRoot® will provide a replacement product. Incurred costs, such as labor for removal of the original product, installation of replacement product, and the cost of incidental or other materials or expenses are not covered under this warranty.

2. Deeproot® makes no other warranties, express or implied, and specifically disclaims the warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Deeproot® shall not be liable either in tort or in contract for any direct, incidental or consequential damages, lost profits, lost revenues, loss of use, or any breach of any express or implied warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers, or approved equal:

DeepRoot Green Infrastructure, LLC
101 Montgomery Street, Suite 2850
San Francisco, CA, 94104
Phone: 415.781.9700
Toll Free: 800.458.7668
Fax: 415.781.0191
www.deeproot.com
B. Substitutions: Manufacturers seeking approval of their products are required to comply with the Owner's Instructions to Bidders, generally contained in the Project Manual.

2.02 DESCRIPTION
A. The term Silva Cell shall be used to refer to a single Silva Cell.

B. Silva Cells shall be designed for the purpose of growing healthy trees and providing stormwater management.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1698
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 7
Suspended Pavement System
C. Silva Cells shall be modular, structural systems.

D. Each Silva Cell shall be structurally-independent from all adjacent Silva Cells for incorporating utilities and other site features as well as for future repairs.

E. Silva Cells shall be capable of supporting loads up to and including AASHTO H-20 when used in conjunction with approved pavement profiles.

F. Silva Cells shall be open on all vertical faces and horizontal planes and shall have no interior walls or diaphragms.

G. Silva Cells shall be capable of providing a large, contiguous, continuous volume of planting soil that does not inhibit or prevent the following:

1. Placement of planting soil

2. Walk through compaction

3. Compaction testing of planting soil, once in place

4. Movement and growth of roots

5. Movement of water within the provided soil volume, including lateral capillary movement

6. Installation and maintenance of utilities placed within, adjacent to, or below the Silva Cell.

H. Silva Cells shall be able capable of being filled with a variety of soil types and soils that include peds 2 inches (50 mm) or larger in diameter as is appropriate for the application, location of the installation, and tree species.

2.03 SILVA CELL MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Silva Cell System Components: Each "Silva Cell" soil cell module (hereafter Silva Cell or "cell") is composed of one base, 6 post assemblies, and one deck. Use the following as required for the indicated dimensions of the system:

1. 1x Silva Cell System:
a. Components: One base, six 1x posts, and one deck.
b. Assembled Dimensions (Each Cell): 47.2 inches long by 23.6 inches wide by 16.7 inches high (1200 mm long by 600 mm wide by 424 mm high).

B. Silva Cell Materials and Fabrication:

1. Bases and Posts: Homopolymer polypropylene.

2. Decks: Fiberglass reinforced, chemically-coupled, impact modified polypropylene.

C. Manufacturer's Related Silva Cell Installation Accessories:

1. Strongbacks: An accessory designed to stabilize the Silva Cell posts temporarily, during soil placement, and removed for reuse prior to placing decks.

2. Anchoring Spikes: 10” landscape spike for securing assembled Silva Cells to subbase.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1699
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 8
Suspended Pavement System

2.04 RELATED PRODUCTS
A. Root Barrier: Recyclable, black, injection molded panels manufactured with a minimum 50 percent post-consumer recycled polypropylene plastic with UV inhibitors, and integrated zipper joining system which allows instant assembly by sliding one panel into another; for redirecting tree roots down and away from hardscapes.

1. Panel Sizes:
a. No. UB12-2: 24 inches long by 12 inches deep by 0.080 inches thick (61 cm long by 30 cm deep by 2.03 mm thick); for use with 1x systems and for pavement profiles less than 12 inches (30 cm) deep.
b. No. UB18-2: 24 inches long by 18 inches deep by 0.080 inches thick (61 cm long by 46 cm deep by 2.03 mm thick); for use with 2x and 3x systems, and for pavement profiles 12 inches or more in depth.

2. Products meeting this specification:
a. DeepRoot Tree Root Barrier (DeepRoot Green Infrastructure, LLC), or approved equal.

B. Geogrid: Net-shaped woven polyester fabric with PVC coating, uniaxial or biaxial geogrid, inert to biological degradation, resistant to naturally occurring chemicals, alkalis, and acids; used to provide a stabilizing force within soil structure as the fill interlocks with the grid.

1. Tensile strength at ultimate (ASTM D6637):
a. 1850 lbs/ft (27.0 kN/m) minimum

2. Creep reduced strength (ASTM D5262):
a. 1000 lbs/ft (14.6 kN/m) minimum

3. Long term allowable design load (GRI GG-4):
a. 950 lbs/ft (13.9 kN/m) minimum

4. Grid aperture size (MD):
a. 0.8 inch (20 mm) minimum

5. Grid aperture size (CD):
a. 1.28 inch (32 mm) maximum

6. Roll size: 6-foot (1.8-m) width is preferred, up to 18-foot (5.4-m).

7. Products meeting this specification, or approved equal:
a. Stratagrid SG 150; http://www.geogrid.com
b. Miragrid 2XT; http://www.tencate.com
c. Fortrac 35 Geogrid; (http://www.hueskerinc.com

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1700
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 9
Suspended Pavement System
d. SF 20 Biaxial Geogrid; http://www.synteen.com
C. Geotextile: composed of high tenacity polypropylene yarns which are woven into a network such that the yarns retain their relative position and is inert to biological degradation and resistant to naturally encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.

1. Tensile strength at ultimate (ASTM D4595):
a. 4800 lbs/ft (70.0 KN/m) MD minimum
b. 4800 lbs/ft (70.0 KN/m) CD minimum

2. Tensile strength at 5% strain (ASTM D4595)
a. 2400 lbs/ft (35.0 KN/m) MD minimum
b. 3000 lbs/ft (43.8 KN/m) CD minimum

3. Flow rate (ASTM D4491):
a. 30 gal/min/ft2 (2648 l/min/m2) minimum

4. Apparent opening size (ASTM D4751):
a. 30 sieve (0.60 mm)

5. UV Resistance (at 500 hours):
a. 80 percent strength retained

6. Products meeting this specification, or approved equal:
a. Mirafi HP570; http://www.tencate.com
b. Geolon PP40; http://www.tencate.com
c. Nilex Woven 2044 (Nilex); http://www.nilex.com
D. Plastic Cable Ties: A tensioning device or tool used to tie similar or different materials together with a specific degree of tension.

2.05 OTHER RELATED MATERIALS
A. Wood Blocking: Nominal dimensioned untreated lumber used for spacing assembled Silva Cells.

B. Drain and Distribution Pipes:

C. Aggregate Subbase (Below Silva Cell Base):

1. Aggregate meeting one of the following specifications:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1701
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 10
Suspended Pavement System
a. Complying ASTM D1241, Type I, Gradation B; Type I mixtures shall consist of stone, gravel, or slag with natural or crushed sand and fine mineral particles passing a No. 200 sieve.

Sieve Percent Passing
1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) 100
1 inch (25 mm) 75 to 95
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 40 to75
No 4 (4.75 mm) 30 to 60
No 10 (2 mm) 20 to 45
No 40 (425 μm) 15 to 30
No 200 (75 μm) 5 to 15
b. Caltrans Class 2 Aggregate Base.

D. Backfill Material (Adjacent to Silva Cells): Clean, compactable, coarse grained fill soil free of organic material, trash and other debris, and free of toxic material injurious to plant growth.

E. Planting Soil: Refer to Section 32 93 00 - Planting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the conditions under which the Silva Cells are to be installed.

1. Carefully check and verify dimensions, quantities, and grade elevations.

2. Carefully examine the Drawings to become familiar with the existing underground conditions before digging. Verify the location of aboveground and underground utility lines, infrastructure, other improvements, and existing trees, shrubs, and plants to remain including their root system.

3. Notify the Contractor and the Landscape Architect in writing in the event of conflict between existing and new improvements, of discrepancies, and other conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the installation.

4. Obtain written approval of changes to the Work prior to proceeding. Proceed with installation only after changes have been made and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Take proper precautions as necessary to avoid damage to existing improvements and plantings.

B. Prior to the start of Work, layout and stake the limits of excavation and horizontal and vertical control points sufficient to install the complete Silva Cell system.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1702
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 11
Suspended Pavement System
C. Coordinate installation with other trades that may impact the completion of the Work.

3.03 TEMPORARY PROTECTION
A. Protect open excavations and Silva Cell system from access and damage both when Work is in progress and following completion, with highly visible construction tape, fencing, or other means until related construction is complete.

B. Do not drive vehicles or operate equipment over the Silva Cell system until the final surface material has been installed.

3.04 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate to the depths and shapes indicated on the Drawings. Provide smooth and level excavation base free of lumps and debris.

B. Confirm that the depth of the excavation is accurate and includes the full section of materials required to place the subbase aggregate, Silva Cell, and pavement profile as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Over-excavate beyond the perimeter of the Silva Cell to allow for:

1. The extension of aggregate subbase beyond the Silva Cell layout as shown on the Drawings.

2. Adequate space for proper compaction of backfill around the Silva Cell system.

D. If unsuitable subgrade soils are encountered, consult the Owner's geotechnical consultants for directions on how to proceed.

E. If conflicts arise during excavation, notify the Landscape Architect in writing and make recommendations for action. Proceed with Work only when action is approved in writing.

3.05 SUBGRADE COMPACTION
A. Compact subgrade to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method, or as approved by the Owner’s geotechnical representative.

B. Do not exceed 10 percent slope for subgrade profile in any one direction. If the 10 percent slope is exceeded, contact manufacturer's representative for directions on how to proceed.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE OVER SUBGRADE
A. Install geotextile over compacted subgrade.

1. Lay geotextile flat with no folds or creases.

2. Install the geotextile with a minimum joint overlap of 18 inches (450 mm).

3.07 INSTALLATION OF AGGREGATE SUBBASE BELOW SILVA CELL BASES A. Install aggregate subbase to the depths indicated on the Drawings.

B. Extend subbase aggregate a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) beyond the base of the Silva Cell layout.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1703
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 12
Suspended Pavement System
C. Compact aggregate subbase to a minimum of 95 percent of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method.

D. Do not exceed 10 percent slope on the surface of the subbase. Where proposed grades are greater than 10 percent, step the Silva Cells to maintain proper relation to the finished grade.

3.08 INSTALLATION OF SILVA CELL BASE
A. Install the Silva Cell system in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein; where requirements conflict or are contradictory, follow the more stringent requirements.

B. Layout and Elevation Control:

1. Provide layout and elevation control during installation of the Silva Cell system to ensure that layout and elevations are in accordance with the Drawings.

C. Establish the location of the tree openings in accordance with the Drawings. Once the trees are located, mark the inside dimensions of the tree openings on the prepared subbase.

D. Locate and mark other Project features located within the Silva Cell layout (e.g. light pole bases, utility pipes). Apply marking to identify the extent of the Silva Cell layout around these features.

Follow the layout as shown on the Drawings to ensure proper spacing of the Silva Cell bases.

Refer to the Drawings for offsets between these features and the Silva Cells.

E. Check each Silva Cell component for damage prior to placement. Reject cracked or chipped units.

F. Place the Silva Cell bases on the compacted aggregate subbase. Start at the tree opening and place Silva Cell bases around the tree openings as shown on the Drawings.

G. Working from tree opening to tree opening, place Silva Cell bases to fill in the area between tree openings.

1. Maintain spacing no less than 1 inch (25 mm) and no more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart, assuming geotextile covering the decks meets the specifications in section 2.04 paragraph C.

H. Follow the Silva Cell layout plan as shown on the Drawings.

I. Install Silva Cell bases around, over, or under existing or proposed utility lines, as indicated on the Drawings.

J. Level each Silva Cell base as needed to provide full contact with subbase. Adjust subbase material, including larger pieces of aggregate, so each base sits solidly on the surface of the subbase. Silva Cell bases that rock or bend over any stone or other obstruction protruding above the surface of the subbase material are not allowed. Silva Cell bases which bend into dips in the subbase material are not allowed. The maximum tolerance for deviations in the plane of the subbase material under the bottom of the horizontal beams of each Silva Cell base is 1/4 inch in 4 feet (6 mm in 1200 mm).

K. Anchor Silva Cell base with 2 anchoring spikes per base.

1. For applications where Silva Cells are installed over waterproofed structures, use wood blocking or similar spacing system consistent with requirements of the waterproofing system to maintain required spacing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1704
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 13
Suspended Pavement System

3.09 INSTALLATION OF SILVA CELL POSTS
A. 1x Silva Cell System:

1. Attach 1x posts to the installed Silva Cell base. Each base will receive six 1x posts.

Place the end of the post with tabs into the base. Rotate post clockwise to snap in place.

B. 2x Silva Cell System:

1. Attach 2x posts to the installed Silva Cell base. Each base will receive six 2x posts.

Place the end of the post with tabs into the base. Rotate post clockwise to snap in place.

C. 3x Silva Cell System:

1. Attach 2x posts to the installed Silva Cell base. Each base will receive six 2x posts.

Place the end of the post with tabs into the base. Rotate post clockwise to snap in place.

2. Following the placement of backfill and planting soil within the 2x posts, add a 1x post extension as described herein. A 2x post, used in combination with a 1x post is considered a 3x post assembly.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF STRONGBACKS, GEOGRID, BACKFILL AND PLANTING SOIL A. Install strongbacks on top of the Silva Cell posts by snapping into place over installed posts prior to installing planting soil and backfill.

1. Strongbacks are required only during the placement and compaction of the planting soil and backfill.

2. Move strongbacks as the Work progresses across the installation.

3. Remove strongbacks prior to the installation of the Silva Cell decks.

B. Install geogrid around the perimeter of the Silva Cell system where the compacted backfill and planting soil interface.

1. Do not place geogrid between the edge of the Silva Cells and adjacent planting areas.

2. Cut the geogrid to allow for a 6-inch (150-mm) overlap at the Silva Cell base and a 12-inch (300-mm) overlap at the Silva Cell deck.

3. Provide a minimum 12-inch (300-mm) overlap between adjacent sheets of geogrid.

4. Secure geogrid with cable ties below the top of the posts, along the post ridges.

C. Place the first lift of backfill material loosely around the perimeter of the Silva Cell system, between the geogrid and the sides of the excavation. Place backfill to approximately the midpoint of the Silva Cell post. Do not compact.

D. Place the first lift of planting soil in the Silva Cell system to approximately the midpoint of the Silva Cell post.

1. Level the planting soil throughout the system.

2. Walk-through the placed planting soil to remove air pockets and settle the soil.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1705
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 14
Suspended Pavement System
a. Lightly compact soils by walking through the soil following placement. b. Walk through compaction shall result in 75-85 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method. Do not exceed root limiting compaction for the given soil type.

E. Compact the first lift of backfill material, previously spread, to 95 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method or in accordance with Project Specifications for hardscape areas, whichever is greater.

F. Add and compact additional backfill material so that the final finished elevation is at approximately the same level of the placed planting soil within the Silva Cells.

1. Maintain the geogrid between the Silva Cell system and the backfill material at all times.

G. Place the second lift of backfill material loosely around the perimeter of the Silva Cell system, between the geogrid and the sides of the excavation so that the material is 2 to 3 inches below the top of the posts. Do not compact.

H. Place the second lift of planting soil inside of the Silva Cell to the bottom of the strongbacks.

Walk through compact.

I. Remove strongbacks, place one 1x posts into each of the previously-installed 2x posts. Rotate clockwise to snap in place, forming a 3x post assembly.

J. Immediately reinstall strongbacks on top of the post assembly.

K. Repeat process of alternately placing backfill and planting soil so that elevation of the compacted backfill and the walked-through compacted planting soil are just below the level of the strongbacks.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. Install irrigation system in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. Remove only the minimum number of strongbacks needed to accommodate the Work and reinstall them immediately upon completion to maintain alignment of posts.

3.12 INSTALLATION OF SILVA CELL DECK
A. Obtain final approval by the Landscape Architect of planting soil installation prior to installation of the Silva Cell decks.

B. Remove strongbacks, level out the planting soil, and immediately install decks over the posts below. Place deck over the top of the posts. Push decks down until the deck clips lock into the posts, snapping the deck into place.

C. Fold the 12 inches (300 mm) of geogrid onto the top of the decks.

3.13 FINAL BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION
A. Place and compact final lift of backfill material to 95 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method, such that the backfill is flush with the top of the installed deck. Do not allow compacting equipment to come in contact with the decks.

3.14 INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE AND AGGREGATE BASE COURSE OVER THE DECK

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1706
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 15
Suspended Pavement System
A. Ensure geotextile meets the specifications in section 2.04 paragraph C.

B. Place geotextile over the top of the deck and extend to the edge of the excavation. Overlap joints a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm). Leave enough slack in the geotextile for the aggregate base course to push the geotextile down in the gaps in between the decks.

C. Install the aggregate base course (including aggregate setting bed if installing unit pavers) over the geotextile immediately after completing the installation of the fabrics. Work the aggregate from one side of the layout to the other so that the fabric and aggregate conform to the Silva Cell deck contours.

D. Maintain equipment used to place aggregate base course completely outside the limits of the Silva Cell excavation area to prevent damage to the installed system.

E. For large or confined areas, where aggregate cannot easily be placed from the edges of the excavated area, obtain approval for the installation procedure and types of equipment to be used in the installation from the Silva Cell manufacturer.

F. Compact aggregate base course(s) to 95 percent of maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D698, Standard Proctor Method. Utilize a vibration or plate compactor with a maximum weight of 800 lbs (362.87 kg).

G Do not drive vehicles or operate equipment over the completed aggregate base course.

3.15 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE CURBS AT TREE OPENINGS, AGGREGATE SUBBASE AND

PAVEMENT ABOVE THE SILVA CELL SYSTEM
A. Place concrete curbs along planting areas and tree openings as shown on the Drawings to retain the aggregate base course from migrating into the planting soil.

B. When staking concrete forms (e.g. curbs around the tree openings), prevent stakes from penetrating the Silva Cell decks.

C. Turn down edge of concrete paving to the Silva Cell deck along the edges of tree openings or planting areas to retain the aggregate base course material.

D. When paving type is a unit paver or other flexible material, provide a concrete curb under the paving at the edge of the Silva Cell deck to retain the aggregate base course material at the tree opening.

E. Place paving material over Silva Cell system in accordance with the Drawings.

1. The Silva Cell system does not fully meet loading strength until the final paving is installed.

Do not operate construction equipment on top of the Silva Cell system until paving installation has been completed.

F. Use care when placing paving or other backfill on top of Silva Cell system to prevent damage to the Silva Cell system or its components.

3.16 INSTALLATION OF ROOT BARRIERS
A. Install root barrier in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

3.17 INSTALLATION OF PLANTING SOIL WITHIN THE TREE PLANTING AREA

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1707
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 329451 - 16
Suspended Pavement System
A. Remove rubble, debris, dust and silt from the top of the planting soil within the tree opening that may have accumulated after the initial installation of the planting soil within the Silva Cells.

B. Install additional planting soil within the tree openings, to the depths indicated on the Drawings.

1. Use the same soil used within the Silva Cells for planting soil within the tree openings.

C. Compact planting soil under the tree root ball as needed to prevent settlement of the root ball.

D. Place trees in accordance with the Drawings.

3.18 PROTECTION
A. Keep construction traffic away from the limits of the Silva Cells until the final pavement profile is in place. The Silva Cell system does not fully meet loading strength until the final paving is installed.

1. Do not operate equipment directly on top of the Silva Cell system until paving installation has been completed.

2. Provide fencing and other barriers to prevent vehicles from entering into the Silva Cell area.

B. When the Silva Cell installation is completed and the permanent pavement is in place, limit traffic and construction related activities to only loads less than the design loads.

3.19 CLEAN UP
A. Perform clean up during installation and upon completion of the Work. Maintain the site free of soil, sediment, trash and debris. Remove excess soil materials, debris, and equipment from the site following completion of the Work of this Section.

B. Repair damage to adjacent materials and surfaces resulting from installation of this Work using mechanics skilled in remedial work of the construction type and trades affected.

END OF SECTION 329451

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1708
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 1
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 330500 – UTILITY STRUCTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for the furnishing and installing of cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete structures for utilities as indicated.

B. The work includes: Catch basins, curb and gutter inlets, manholes, valve boxes, handholes, pull boxes, vaults, covers and the related cast iron, aluminum and steel products required for gratings, covers, and manhole steps and ladders, channel inserts, pulling eyes, and electrical grounding.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312000 - Earthmoving
B. Section 321123 - Aggregate Base

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36/A36M Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A108 Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality ASTM A123 Specifications for Zinc Coated (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A153 Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A536 Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM B3 Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B26/B26M Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings ASTM C33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C150 Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C260 Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1709
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 2
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
ASTM C478 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C618 Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C789 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers
ASTM C850 Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less Than 2 Feet of Cover Subjected to Highway Loadings ASTM C858 Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures ASTM C891 Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures
ASTM F 436 Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
C. California Water Service Company District Standard Specifications - Latest Edition D. City of San Carlos Standard Details and Specifications – Latest Edition E. PG&E Standard Specifications - Latest Edition
F. California Uniform Plumbing Code - Latest Edition
G. Caltrans Standard Specifications and Drawings - Latest Edition

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
When not indicated on the Contract Drawings in sufficient detail or definition, submit detailed drawings of cast-in-place and precast concrete utility structures and related metal work.

B. Product Data
Submit manufacturer’s product data for standard manufactured precast concrete utility boxes and structures, area drains and for metal gratings and covers and other related miscellaneous metal items.

C. Certification
Submit certification or other acceptable evidence that covers and grates to be provided for roadways and parking areas meet proof testing requirements for H20 loadings in accordance with Caltrans Bridge Design Specifications Manual, Section 3.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1710
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 3
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. Materials

1. Portland Cement
ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali.

2. Admixtures
a. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. Provide six percent air entrainment, plus or minus one percent.
b. Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. Provide pozzolan of 10 percent by weight of the cement content.

3. Aggregates
ASTM C33, fine aggregate and Size No. 67 (3/4 inch maximum size) coarse aggregate.

B. Mix Design
Incorporate the following requirements:

1. Concrete Strength: Class 4000 minimum

2. Maximum water-cement plus pozzolan ratio: 0.45.

3. Maximum slump: Four inches.

2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES
A. General
The Contractor may provide precast concrete structures which conform to the general configuration, capacities, and inverts indicated.

B. Materials
Provide fine and coarse aggregates conforming to ASTM C33, in size commensurate with structure and reinforcement clearances.

C. Portland Cement Concrete
Class 4000 minimum Concrete may be polymer or latex modified to achieve higher strengths and denser concrete. Concrete shall not deteriorate from chemical attack of sanitary waste.

D. Precast Covers
Precast covers shall have the utility identification, such as “PG&E Gas Valve,” stamped into the cover.

E. Quality Control

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1711
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 4
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1. Quality Assurance and Control: The Engineer shall perform such inspections and tests as required to verify compliance with these Specifications.

2. Furnish samples of materials and their handling as needed by the Engineer for analyses of materials.

2.3 AREA DRAIN INLETS
A. General

1. Scope: Provide and install plastic area drains for surface drainage in landscaped areas only.

2. Standards Compliance: Drains shall conform to ASTM D1784 (PVC compounds), ASTM D4101 (polypropylene), and California Building Code standards.

B. Materials

1. Body: Injection-molded high-impact PVC or polypropylene, UV-stabilized, resistant to chemicals, salts, and freeze-thaw cycles.

2. Grate: Heavy-duty structural plastic. Grates shall comply with ADA heel-proof requirements when installed in pedestrian areas.

3. Color: Black or green, UV-stabilized to prevent fading.

C. Sizes and Configuration

1. Nominal Sizes: 6", 9", 12", and 18" square or round openings as shown on plans.

2. Outlet Connection: Compatible with SDR-35 PVC and Schedule 40 PVC pipe (solventweld or gasketed joint). Reducers/adapters as required.

3. Depth: Sump depth minimum 6" below grate to collect sediment.

D. Grates

1. Openings: Slot width shall not exceed 1/2".

2. Fastening: Grates shall lock to the drain body using corrosion-resistant stainless steel screws or snap-lock devices.

2.4 METAL COVERS, GRATES, AND INLETS
A. Ferrous Castings

1. Metal used in manufacture of castings shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35B for Gray Iron, or ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 for Ductile Iron.

2. Castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, shrinkage, distortion or other defects. Castings shall be smooth and cleaned by shot blasting.

3. Minimum tensile strength shall be 35,000 psi.

4. Castings shall be manufactured true to pattern; component parts shall fit together in a satisfactory manner. Round frames and covers shall have continuously machined bearing surfaces to prevent rocking and rattling. Covers shall be of a type that overlaps box edges.

5. Where castings will be subjected to loads of H20 or greater, as indicated, provide ductile iron castings.

B. Aluminum Castings
Where required to reduce weights of larger covers for ease of handling, such covers may be manufactured of aluminum castings conforming to ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy No. 713.0. Minimum tensile strength shall be 32,000 psi. All covers with an opening four feet or larger shall be Bilco Type JAL-H20 or equivalent and shall have slip resistant surface (course) that meets ADA, NFPA, ASTM D-2047, F-1679 and C-1028. Coatings shall be Traxplate by Jensen or equivalent.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1712
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 5
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
C. Manhole Covers
Provide cast, manufactured manhole covers and frames with heavy duty solid cover (lid) or vented cover (lid) as indicated. Covers shall be embossed or engraved with nonslip diamond or square cross-hatched pattern. Provide covers with embossed or engraved word identification, as indicated or appropriate, for the enclosed or underground utility.

D. Grates
Cast Ferrous Grates: Grates for area drains and catch basins shall be heavy duty, bicycle safe inlet grates and frames of size and configuration indicated. Grates in roadways and parking areas shall withstand H20 loadings when proof-tested in accordance with Caltrans Bridge Design Specifications Manual, Section 3.

E. Curb and Gutter Inlets
Provide cast, manufactured curb inlet frame, grate, and curb box of size and configuration indicated. Curb and gutter inlets shall conform to the contour and profile of the concrete curb and gutter. Grates shall be heavy duty and bicycle safe and shall withstand H20 loading.

F. Cast Iron Manhole Steps
Provide cast, manufactured manhole steps with cross-hatched treads and with anchor configuration appropriate for cast-in-place concrete or precast concrete as indicated. Provide steps for installation 16 inches on center in vertical alignment.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
A. Requirements
Provide channel inserts, pulling eyes, ladders, and electrical grounding rods for electrical manholes and pull boxes as indicated.

B. Steel Materials
Standard structural sections, shapes, plates, bars, and rods, as indicated, conforming with ASTM A36/A36M. Bars conforming with ASTM 108 will be acceptable.

C. Anchors and Bolts
ASTM A 307, A449, A563, and F436, as applicable. Bolts and studs, nuts, and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153
D. Ladders
Provide standard manufactured or custom fabricated steel ladders as required to meet the conditions indicated. Steel ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Grounding and Bonding Materials
Conform with UL 467 and the following requirements:

1. Grounding Rods: Medium carbon steel core, copper-clad by the molten weld casting process, 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long size.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1713
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 6
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

2. Bare Conductors: ASTM B3, No. 1/0 AWG, Class B stranded, annealed copper conductor.

F. Fabrication
Form and fabricate the work as indicated. Include anchors, fasteners, and accessories to anchor and secure the work in place.

G. Galvanizing
All items shall be galvanized after fabrication by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A123. Weight of the zinc coating shall conform with the requirements specified under “Weight of Coating” in ASTM A123.

2.6 MORTAR
A. Cement mortar for the sealing of openings for pipe penetrations, for cementing of joints of component parts of precast structures, for providing of flow characteristics for the bottoms of drainage structures, and other features as indicated shall conform with the California Building Code, Chapter 21, Type S (without Lime), with a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 1,800 psi.

B. Mortar shall comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C270, including measurement, mixing, proportioning and water retention. Ten percent by volume of the cement content of the mortar shall be fly ash or pozzolanic material confirming with ASTM C618.

C. Use mortar within 90 minutes after mixing. Discard mortar which has been mixed longer or which has begun to set. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Requirements
Construct manholes, junction chambers, catch basins, curb and gutter inlets, trench drains, culverts, headwalls, wingwalls, pull boxes, utility boxes and vaults, and related utility structures in connection with the installation of pipe, conduits, ductbanks, and utility trenches, as indicated and per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Excavation and Backfill
Provide excavation, prepared subgrade and aggregate base, and backfill as specified in Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

C. Cast-In-Place Concrete Structures
Provide formwork, steel reinforcement, and concrete in accordance with applicable requirements of Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1714
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 330500 - 7
Utility Structures
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
D. Precast Concrete Structures
Install as indicated. Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM C891. Provide such appurtenances and installation accessories, including cement mortar and sealants, as required for a complete installation.

E. Metal Components
Install manhole covers, grates and frames, curb and gutter inlets, metal steps, ladders, channel inserts, pulling eyes, and electrical grounding rods as indicated and in accordance with the respective manufacturer’s instructions. Covers and grates in roadways, parking areas, and concrete walks shall be installed flush with adjacent, abutting pavement.

END OF SECTION 330500

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1715
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 1
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 331116 – WATER DISTRIBUTION UTILTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for providing water service and distribution and modification to existing water mains and services as indicated. The extent of water distribution is indicated on the Contract Drawings and includes furnishing, installing, testing, and disinfecting permanent water supply piping and services as indicated.

B. Provide fire hydrants and services as indicated.

C. The jurisdictional water utility district shall provide water services to the water meters’ points of connection for facilities and landscape irrigation systems, and modifications to their existing water mains, as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all such arrangements. All work on the jurisdictional agency’s facilities shall be in accordance with the agency’s adopted standards and performed by the agency or their representative.

D. Domestic and Fire service facilities and their appurtenances are not to be sized and/or installed until that time the domestic and fire system requirements have been confirmed by the building designers and reviewed and approved by the jurisdictional Water Utility District.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 312300 - Trenching and Backfilling
B. Section 328000 – Irrigation

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36/ Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel
A36M
ASTM A126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A123 Specifications for Zinc Coated (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A197 Specifications for Cupola Malleable Iron
ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM C33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1716
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 2
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
ASTM D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping System
ASTM D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F439 Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, three inches through 48 inches (75mm Through 1200mm), for Water and Other Liquids
AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids AWWA C503 Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants
AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, four inches-12 inches AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 14 inches-48 inches C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS) MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
D. Water Utility District Standards
California Water Service Company District Standard Specifications - Latest Edition

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
B. Manufacturer’s product data for manufactured materials and equipment, including all valves and fire hydrants.

C. Shop drawings showing piping layout and pipe, valves, hydrants, and locations of tie-ins, buttresses, and thrust blocks.

D. Manufacturer’s product data for manufactured materials and equipment, including all valves and fire hydrants.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1717
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 3
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Excavations in which products will be buried shall be dry.

B. Coordinate the installation of water supply system with the jurisdictional water utility owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Requirements
Provide the types, sizes, and configurations of pipe, fittings, and miscellaneous materials and installation accessories as indicated.

B. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Three Inches and Smaller

1. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, Type 1, Grade 1.

2. Fittings: ASTM D1784, socket weld, same material and schedule as pipe, or meeting requirements of ASTM F439, as applicable.

3. Joints: Socket welded with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM D564.

C. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Four Inches and Larger

1. Pipe: AWWA C900, SDR 18, Class 235 (AWWA C905, Class 235 for 14" and Larger) polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pipe with bell and spigot ends and flexible ring joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D1784, Type 1, Grade 1, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, Class 305, or meeting requirements or ASTM F439, as applicable.

3. Joints: ASTM D3139, gasketed bell joints with ASTM F477 gaskets.

D. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)

1. Piping: AWWA C151, thickness Class 50.

2. Fittings: AWWA C110.

3. Joints: Field Lok gaskets as manufactured by US Pipe, or equal, with copper jumper to provide electrical continuity. Mechanical, where indicated, in accordance with AWWA C111, with copper jumper to provide electrical continuity.

4. Polyethylene encasement for protection of pipes, valves, and fittings shall be furnished and installed in accordance with AWWA C105.

5. Provide inside pipe and fittings with 1/16 inch thick cement-mortar lining and an asphaltic seal coat in accordance with AWWA C104.

2.2 VALVES
A. Gate Valves
150 pound bronze, non-rising stem, wedge disc, threaded connection, conforming with MSS SP80. (AWWA C509 and AWWA C550) B. Pressure Reducing Valves
All bronze construction, spring-loaded, single-seated, suitable for tight shutoff under dead-end conditions. Provide with renewable composition seat discs, nylon inserted diaphragm, bolted spring chamber, and threaded connection. (AWWA C512)

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1718
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 4
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
C. Backflow Preventer
Provide device which is approved by the jurisdictional water utility company. As a minimum, backflow preventer shall be a reduced pressure principle assembly with two rising stem gate shutoff valves, two resilient seat ball-valve test cocks, and two replaceable resilient seat check valves.

Backflow preventer shall be suitable for 175 psig operating pressure and 140 degrees F operating temperature and shall be of bronze construction with screwed inlet and outlet for three inch and smaller sizes and cast iron, epoxy coated construction with 150 pound flanged inlet and outlet for four inch and larger sizes. (AWWA C510 and C511)

2.3 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Provide fire hydrants and related appurtenances as indicated. Fire hydrants shall comply with jurisdictional water utility district, as applicable.

B. Fire hydrants shall meet requirements of AWWA C503, as applicable, and shall be provided with a minimum of two discharge nozzles and additional pumper connection, meeting the nozzle sizes and pumper requirements of the jurisdictional fire department.

2.4 CONCRETE FOR THRUST BLOCKS
A. Provide Class 3000, 3/4 inch aggregate, concrete for all thrust blocks, with reinforcement where indicated or required.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL
A. Tie Rods
Stainless Steel, Type 316, threaded ANSI standard bolt thread both ends, diameter as required.

B. Rod Couplings
Malleable iron, ASTM A197, turnbuckle design, female threaded to mate with tie rods, 5/8 inch sizes to mate with both rods and mechanical joint bolts.

C. Pipe Clamps
For sizes 4 inches and larger, provide with malleable iron rod sockets. Provide washers in lieu of rod sockets where authorized conforming with ASTM A126, Class A, cast iron. Bolts and bolting shall conform with ASTM A307.

D. Exposed Metal
All exposed metal (bends, bolts, glands, rings) shall be wrapped with six inch pipe wrap (tape coat HD 30).

E. Bolt and Nuts
All bolt and nuts shall be Stainless Steel, Type 316, unless noted otherwise.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1719
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 5
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MAINTAINING WATER SERVICE
A. Maintain water service and conduct operations at times selected to minimize duration and inconvenience of service interruption.

B. Water valves in service owned by the jurisdictional water utility Owner shall be operated only by personnel of that jurisdictional water utility district.

C. Except as specified otherwise herein, and where applicable, materials and construction methods shall be in accordance with the provisions of the jurisdictional water utility district standard drawings and specifications.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Requirements

1. Excavating and backfilling, including bedding and compacting requirements, shall conform to Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

2. Provide concrete thrust blocks for elbows, tees, valves, and appurtenances of buried piping. Thrust blocks shall be constructed as indicated

3. Install piping true to line and grade, supported and guided to assure alignment under all conditions.

4. Install unions at each connection to valves.

5. Make change in line with fittings. Do not spring joints to effect change of direction.

6. Do not field cut pipe unless necessary. Make such necessary cuts by means of equipment designed for the purpose, ensuring a smooth square end.

7. For connection to existing pipe, provide pipe with suitable ends or adapters, after verification of size and type of existing pipe.

B. Valves

1. Install valves in accordance with the valve manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Where valves are provided by the jurisdictional water utility Owner, provide suitable access for operation of valves.

3. If directed by Owner, alter typical valve manhole to suit actual conditions. Any alterations in valve manholes shall be operable from the street level. All operator nuts shall be plumb to the valve manholes.

C. Fire Hydrants (Private)

1. Provide fire hydrant installations as indicated. Installation shall conform with requirements of the jurisdictional fire department.

2. Provide necessary appurtenances and accessories as required to complete the installation.

D. Thrust Blocks and Harnessing

1. Provide for counteracting thrust caused by static and dynamic forces, including water hammer at bends, tees, reducers, valves, and dead-ends by installing harnessing as indicated or required. For other methods, submit details for approval of the Owner prior to use.

2. Provide concrete thrust blocks as indicated where harnessing is not practicable.

E. Water Service Connectors

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1720
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 6
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
Make water service connections, as indicated, in accordance with California Plumbing Code and the installation instructions of the service pipe and fittings manufacturer.

F. Acceptance Requirements
After installation of pipes, ends of pipes shall be either capped or plugged. No piping shall be buried before being inspected and tested.

3.3 TESTS
A. Protection from Flooding
Provide positive measures to protect exposed, installed pipe and compacted pipe bedding from flooding during testing.

B. Notice of Testing

1. Give two days notice of intention of testing to the City. The Contractor will furnish, install, and operate pumps, gages, meters, and individual pipe connections to test openings.

2. Designate largest sections feasible for testing and sterilizing.

C. Testing Requirements

1. Prior to backfilling, isolate system by use of approved valves, caps and plugs, or other means.

2. Maintain such isolation throughout the performance of leakage and pressure testing.

3. Where valves are used for isolation, eliminate leakage through such valves if it occurs.

Maintain new work isolated from existing water mains, except for test connections, until testing and sterilization have been completed.

4. For hydrostatic tests, provide approved caps and plugs in sections to be tested and remove them after testing.

5. Prevent leakage in pipes and fittings at openings. Temporarily block plugged and capped ends to prevent displacement.

6. Install water source connection for testing and isolated section.

7. Provide labor and materials required for leakage testing, including excavation for installation and removal of pumps, gages, meters, and water source connections.

8. Where leakage exceeds the Owner’s standards, perform necessary corrective measures.

9. Remove and replace defective pipes, joints, fittings, valves and appurtenances. Reset such items if displaced.

D. Hydrostatic Tests

1. Perform hydrostatic tests in accordance with the Owner’s requirements. All such tests shall be witnessed by the representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all such arrangements.

2. Test the potable water system hydrostatically in sections to a pressure of at least 225 psi for not less than 15 minutes. Pressure test pipe before backfilling. Repair leaks and retest the system until the system is leak free. Use instruments calibrated by a quality laboratory.

Test sequence shall be as follows:
a. Lines shall be fully flushed.
b. Lines shall be hydrostatically tested.
c. Lines shall be fully flushed.
d. Lines shall be fully disinfected.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1721
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 331116 - 7
Water Distribution Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3.4 SYSTEM DISINFECTION
A. Before final acceptance of the water supply system, each section of the new line shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651. One of the following sources of disinfection shall be used:

1. Mixture of water and chlorine gas

2. Direct application of chlorine

3. Mixture of water and calcium hypochlorite or

4. Mixture of water and calcium chloride
B. Before disinfecting, flush the line thoroughly to remove dirt and extraneous material. Clean each section of the line between valves independently.

C. Retain the disinfectant solution in the pipe for at least 24 hours. Following this sterilization period, the residual chlorine content at the ends of the section and at other representative points shall be not less than five parts per million. Then, the line shall be drained and thoroughly flushed with water until the residual chlorine content is similar to that obtained from the existing water distribution system.

D. Take water samples and test in accordance with AWWA C651.

3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING MAINS
A. Following testing and sterilization, new water distribution lines shall be connected to existing mains as indicated. Each connection shall be made at a time and in a manner which will result in the least interruption of service.

B. All connections involving shut down of jurisdictional water utility’s existing facilities shall be made under the immediate supervision of the jurisdictional water utility district. No member of the Contractor’s forces may operate any valve controlling the flow of water in the water utility’s existing system.

C. The Contractor shall make tie-ins to the existing system at a time which is convenient to jurisdictional water utility district, which may be in the evenings and on weekends.

D. All piping to be abandoned, as shown on the plans, is abandoned only when the pipe has been taken out of service, physically disconnected from the active water system, and has been sealed by the Contractor.

E. The Contractor shall seal all cut ends of the existing piping that are not connected to the new system by either installing temporary fittings on the existing pipe or by plugging the cut end with concrete extending two pipe diameters into the pipe. After the concrete placement, the pipe end shall be blocked with a two-inch thick redwood block.

END OF SECTION 331116

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1722
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 333000 - 1
Sanitary Sewerage System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 333000 - SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for furnishing, installing, testing the sanitary sewerage system in the ground and to a point outside the building wall as indicated.

1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 312333 – Trenching and Backfilling

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D1784 Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D2564 Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping System
ASTM D3139 Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F477 Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, four inch through 12 inch for Water Distribution
C. Sanitary Utility Standards
Note that all work shall be performed and completed in accordance with the City of San Carlos sanitary utility standard drawings and specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all such standards as applicable.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings showing piping layouts, sizes, types, and cleanouts.

B. Respective manufacturer’s product data for manufactured materials and equipment.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1723
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 333000 - 2
Sanitary Sewerage System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
C. Equipment manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions consisting of detailed parts list, recommended spare parts list, and complete operation and maintenance procedures.

D. Certified test reports of equipment, as applicable.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Excavations shall be dry immediately before and after products are installed. Provide surfaces and structures to, and on, which sewerage products will be installed.

B. Coordinate the installation of the sewerage system with the jurisdictional sanitary district or utility owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BURIED PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Requirements
Provide the types, sizes, and configurations of pipe, fittings, and miscellaneous materials and installation accessories as indicated and required.

B. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Three Inches and Smaller

1. Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ASTM D1785, Schedule 80, Type 1, Grade 1.

2. Fittings: ASTM D1784, socket weld, same material and schedule as pipe.

3. Joints: Socket welded with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM D564.

C. PVC Pipe and Fittings, Four Inches and Larger
Pipe: ASTM D3034 (SDR 26), polyvinyl chloride (PVC) water pipe with bell and spigot ends and flexible ring joints.

2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. At grade, cleanouts shall have adjustable sleeve-type housing, threaded plug adapter, and frame and cover shall be Christy Type F08 Valve Box with F08R Lid or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Excavations shall be free of water and extraneous material immediately before sanitary sewerage products are installed or placed. Bottoms of trenches shall have a six inch sand bed and shall be formed to support the bottom quadrant of the pipe and fittings. Should rock be encountered or should bedding material be unsuitable to support the products at design elevation, continue excavation to an elevation eight inches below the design elevation and backfill with clean sand.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1724
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 333000 - 3
Sanitary Sewerage System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
B. Interior of pipe, pipe fittings, valves, drains, and cleanouts shall be cleaned of foreign substances before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products where indicated. Remove and reinstall products that are disturbed after installation. Ends of products to which future connections will be made shall be either valved, plugged, or capped, and anchored.

B. Connections to existing facilities shall be made with fittings and short bends to suit the actual conditions; connect products in accordance with the product manufacture’s installation instructions.

C. Pipe and fittings shall be set to line and grade as shown on the Construction Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLING PIPE
A. Protect pipe and fittings during handling to prevent damage.

B. Place, shape, and compact bedding material to receive barrel of pipe.

C. Start laying pipe at lowest point; lay true to line and grade indicated.

D. Install pipe to bear on bedding material along entire length.

E. Do not place the pipe on blocking material of any type.

F. Do not use wedges while installing the pipe.

G. Install pipe so that bells and grooves are on upstream end.

H. Align each section of pipe with adjoining section with uniform annular space between bell and spigot and so as to prevent sudden offsets in flow line.

I. As each section of pipe is laid, place sufficient bedding and backfill to hold it firmly in place.

J. Apply lubricant to rubber gasket (o-rings) immediately before joining pipe sections.

K. Keep interior of sewer clean as work progresses. Where small pipe sizes make cleaning difficult, keep suitable swab or drag in pipe and pull through each joint immediately after joining is completed.

L. Keep trenches and excavations free of water during construction and until backfilled.

M. When work is not in progress, securely plug ends of pipe and fittings to prevent extraneous matter from entering pipes and fittings.

N. Cut pipe ends which project into a sewer structure flush with the inside face of the structure and cover exposed pipe reinforcement with grout.

O. Where length of stub is not shown, install four foot length and seal free end with brick masonry bulkhead or approved stopper.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1725
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 333000 - 4
Sanitary Sewerage System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
P. Obtain Engineer’s approval before covering pipe.

Q. Where indicated, place additional bedding material around and over the pipe in lifts not exceeding six inches loose. Compact each lift before placement of next lift.

R. Accomplish compaction by methods which will avoid damage to pipe and which will not disturb its alignment and grade. The use of vibratory rollers is prohibited until compacted cover over pipe has reached three feet or half diameter, whichever is greater.

S. Connect sanitary sewerage system to existing public sanitary sewers in accordance with requirements of the jurisdictional authority.

3.4 PIPE CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe up to and including four inches, and shall be four inches minimum for pipe sizes six inches and larger. Cleanouts for drainage pipe shall consist of a longsweep 1/4 bend or one or two 1/8 bends extended to the place indicated. Wall or accessible piping cleanouts shall be T-pattern, 90 degree branch drainage fittings having screw plugs.

Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of each riser and shall consist of a wye pattern fitting with a screw plug.

3.5 TESTS
A. Testing Requirements

1. Conduct a mandrel test to ensure that the line is free of obstructions subsequent to the placing of intermediate backfill material over the line.

2. Upon completion of the test and determination that the line is free of obstructions, plug, cap or otherwise close the open end or ends of the installed piping to prevent the entrance of debris into the lines.

3. Supply all tools, equipment, and water necessary to make all tests.

4. Flush all sewer lines prior to testing and accumulated materials shall be removed at each manhole and no materials shall be allowed to enter the existing sewer system.

5. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all necessary arrangements with the jurisdictional sanitary utility owner for performing and witnessing the required tests.

B. Sanitary Sewer Pipeline Tests

1. Perform air test on all installed sanitary sewer pipes upon completion of backfill.

2. Perform vacuum test on all manholes.

3. Hydrostatically test all installed sanitary sewer force mains.

4. Test all sewers 24” or less in diameter with low pressure.

5. Sewers with a diameter greater than 24 inches may be tested by visual inspection.

C. Low Pressure Air Test (Gravity Pipe)

1. Clean set sections of pipe to be tested before starting air test.

2. Plug pipe outlets with pneumatic plugs capable of resisting internal testing pressures without requiring external bracing.

3. Immediately following pipe cleaning and wetting, slowly supply air to plugged pipe until internal air pressure reaches 5 psi. Allow at least two minutes for temperature to stabilize before proceeding, except slowly add air to maintain a minimum of 4.5 psig but less than 5 psig pressure. While temperature is stabilizing, spray plugs, pipes, and hoses with soap solution and eliminate air leaks.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1726
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 333000 - 5
Sanitary Sewerage System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

4. After temperature has stabilized, measure time required (10 minute min.) for pressure to drop of 1 psig so that the pressure at the end of the test is at least 3.5 psig. If measured time exceeds allowable time, pipe will not be accepted.

5. Time, in seconds, for pressure to drop from 4.5 to 3.5 psig shall be not less than the following; time for intermediate lengths shall be interpolated:

Length Pipe Diameter, Inches
Pipe (Ft) 8 10 12 15 18 21 24
25 18 28 40 62 89 121 158
50 35 55 79 126 178 243 317
75 53 83 119 186 267 364 475
100 70 110 158 248 356 485 634
125 83 138 198 309 444 595 680
150 110 165 238 375 510 595 680
175 123 193 277 425 510 595 680
200 141 220 317 425 510 595 680
225 158 248 340 425 510 595 680
250 176 275 340 425 510 595 680
275 194 283 340 425 510 595 680
300 211 283 340 425 510 595 680
350 227 283 340 425 510 595 680
400 227 283 340 425 510 595 680
D. Vacuum Test (Manholes)

1. Clean set manholes to be tested before starting vacuum test.

2. Plug manhole outlets with pneumatic plugs capable of resisting internal testing pressures without requiring external bracing.

3. Vacuum test head shall be positioned at the top of the casing including grade rings.

4. Test shall be 10 lbs for 60 seconds. Measure time required for pressure to drop to 9 lbs. If measured time exceeds allowable time, manhole will not be accepted.

5. Manholes showing greater than the allowable leakage shall be repaired and retested until a satisfactory leakage result is obtained.

6. Time, in seconds, for pressure to drop from 10 lbs to 9 lbs shall be not less than the following; time for intermediate lengths shall be interpolated:

Depth Diameter
48” 54” 60”
<10’ 20 23 26
10’ 25 29 33
12’ 30 35 39
14’ 35 41 46

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1727
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 333000 - 6
Sanitary Sewerage System
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
E. Hydrostatic Tests (Force Mains)

1. Force main testing shall be done after intermediate backfill has been placed and compacted but before final paving has been placed.

2. Repair any leaks which may develop resulting from or caused by the tests.

3. Fill lines with water and increase pressure to a 120% of the Total Dynamic Head of the system or fifty (50) psi whichever is greater.

4. Test shall be applied for not less than two (2) hours with zero leakage.

5. Use of air to test force mains is not permitted.

F. Visual Test Method

1. Slowly pull a television camera through sewer and inspect for visual leaks and cracks in pipe. Repair leaks, then re-inspect pipe. Submit tape of entire length of system to owner for approval.

G. F. Joint Pressure Testing

1. Insert sealing packer with joint testing capability, into sewer line.

2. Place sealing packer around joint and pressure test joint. If a drop in air pressure occurs reseal the joint.

3. Repeat procedure for each joint.

H. Criteria for Acceptance

1. The section of sewer being tested will not be accepted if test results exceed allowable leakage to take less time than minimum holding time. If pipe proves to be unacceptable, immediately repair defective materials and workmanship. The Contractor will not be permitted to change to another test if original test method reveals system has failed.

END OF SECTION 333000

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1728
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334000 - 1
Storm Drainage Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 334000 – STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for storm drainage and area runoff collection system and connection to existing storm drainage system as indicated.

1.2 RELATED SECTION
A. Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling
B. Section 330500 - Utility Structures

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe
M252M
AASHTO Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300 1200 mm M294M
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM F667 Standard Specification for Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F405 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings ASTM C76 Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe C. City of San Carlos Standard Details – Latest Edition D. Caltrans Standard Specifications - Latest Edition

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings

1. Detailed drawings that indicate site drainage in plan and section, including relationship to other systems, interfaces, and drainage structures, connections, alignment, grade, bedding and backfill, and other pertinent data.

2. Provide plans, sections, and elevations, as well as site context to adjacent materials. a. Trench Grate and Frames, including relationship to tree grate and concrete support.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1729
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334000 - 2
Storm Drainage Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
B. Product Data

1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for pipe, pipe connection and trench drain materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Pipe Connection Requirements
Ends of pipe shall be bell and spigot, except PVC Perp., to assure continuous alignment of pipe and leakproof joints.

B. Concrete Pipe (RCP)
Reinforced Pipe: ASTM C76, Class III; for pipe 15 inches in diameter and larger. “O” ring rubber gasket (ASTM C443)
C. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
Pipe: HDPE pipe conforming to ASTM D3212, or ASTM 1417 for pipe sizes four inch - 60 inch (ADS N-12 1B WT pipe or equivalent)
D. PVC Pipe (PVC)
Pipe: PVC Pipe shall conform to AWWA C900, SDR 18, Class 150 (AWWA C905, Class 150), Bell and Spigot rubber joints for pipe sizes 6-inches through 12-inches.

E. PVC Perforated Pipe (PVC Perp)
Pipe: PVC Perforated Pipe shall conform to ASTM D-3034, SDR 26, solvent weld joints for pipe sizes 4”, 6” and 8”. Perforations shall be 2 rows of ½” holes on 5” centers, 120° apart.

F. Trench Drains
Trench drains: APT® PolyDrain®, or approved equivalent.

Trench grate: Rain 5” x 20” Trench Grate – Heel Proof grate, Raw iron, heel-proof and ADA compliant, or approved equal. heel-proof and ADA compliant. Provide shop drawings and include relationship to trench drain grate and concrete support.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Laying Pipe

1. Lay pipe to line and grade indicated. Bell and spigot type, lay bells in cross-cuts cut in trench. Lay pipe with the bell or grooved end uphill.

2. Prevent dirt from getting into pipe joints.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1730
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334000 - 3
Storm Drainage Utilities
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3. Remove pipe which is cracked, checked, spalled, or damaged from the work.

4. Clean interior of pipe of cement, dirt, and extraneous matte as the work progresses.

B. Pipe Joints

1. Pipe joints shall be made secure and watertight.

2. Employ appropriate equipment to draw the sections of the pipe tightly together.

C. Visual Test Method

1. Slowly pull a television camera through storm drain and inspect for visual leaks, separated joints and cracks in pipe and manholes. Repair leaks and joints. Replace cracked pipe.

Re-inspect pipe. Submit tape of entire length of system to owner for approval.

D. Backfilling

1. Piping shall not be covered with backfill material, until inspected, and approved by the Engineer.

2. After making up pipe joints, fill space between pipe and sides of trench with backfill material half-way up the pipe. Both sides shall be filled for full width of trench at same time and carefully compacted so as to hold the pipe in its proper position.

3. After pipe has been installed, inspected, and approved, place and compact backfill as specified in Section 312333 - Trenching and Backfilling.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TRENCH DRAIN
A. Trench Drain

1. Trench drain shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation.

END OF SECTION 334000

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1731
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 1
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 334727 - BIORETENTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes:

1. Bioretention Soil Mix

2. Aggregate Storage

3. Composted Wood Mulch

4. Streambed Cobbles

1.2 STANDARDS AND CODES
Caltrans Standard Specifications
San Carlos DPW Engineering Standard Specifications
ASTM Annual Book of ASTM Standards, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA, 1997 or latest edition.

US Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) & Compost Analysis Proficiency (CAP)
Test Method for The Examination of Composting and Compost (TMECC)

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Bioretention Soil Mix (BSM): A soil mix that has been specially blended and tested for use in bioretention facilities with the intent to meet the following objectives:

1. Infiltrate runoff at a minimum rate of 5 inches per hour throughout the life of the facility, and

2. By nature of its components be capable of the removal of certain suspended and dissolved stormwater pollutants, and

3. Have sufficient moisture retention and other agronomic properties to support healthy vegetation.

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1732
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 2
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer following a minimum of 20 calendar days (or as directed by the Engineer) prior to the construction of bioretention facilities.

1. BSM Submittals
a. One (1) one-gallon sample of the BSM for visual inspection, or one (1) five-gallon sample of the BSM if sieve analysis is required.
b. Source certificates for all BSM materials.
c. Sieve analysis of BSM per ASTM D422 or Caltrans Test Method (CTM) C202 performed within two (2) months of product delivery to site. d. Certification from the soil supplier or an accredited testing agency that the BSM, including sand and compost components, conforms to all industry or technical society reference standards specified in Sections 2.1.A, 2.1.B, and 2.1C. e. A description of the equipment and methods used to mix the sand and compost to produce BSM.
f. Organic content test results of the BSM, performed in accordance with Testing Methods for the Examination of Compost and Composting (TMECC) 05.07A, “LossOn-Ignition Organic Matter Method.” g. Permeability test results for BSM per ASTM D2434 (Modified). See SFPUC Modified ASTM D2434 Procedures for required modifications to test.

2. Sand Submittals
a. Sieve analysis of sand per ASTM D422 or CTM C202 performed within two (2) months of product delivery to site.

3. Compost Submittals
a. Quality analysis results for compost performed in accordance with Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) standards, as specified in Section 2.1.C, and performed within two (2) months of product delivery to site.
b. Sieve analysis of compost per TMECC 02.2 B performed within two (2) months of product delivery to site.

4. Other Submittals
a. Cut sheets of any media or soil admixes to enhance moisture retention properties, if used.
b. Testing agency qualifications as specified in Section 1.6.B.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Test and inspect bioretention materials and operations as Work progresses as described in this section. Failure to detect defective Work or materials at any time will not prevent rejection if a defect is discovered after installation, nor shall it constitute final acceptance.

B. Testing Agency Qualification:

1. General: Agencies that perform testing on bioretention materials, including permeability testing, shall be accredited by STA (USCC), ASTM, AASHTO, Caltrans or other designated recognized standards organization. All certifications shall be current. Testing agency shall be capable of performing all tests to the designated and recognized standards specified and shall provide test results with an accompanying Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. The following information shall be provided for all testing laboratories used:
a. Name of lab(s) and contact person(s)
b. Address(es) and phone number(s)
c. Email address(es)
d. Qualifications of laboratory and personnel including the date of current certification.

2. Compost: Laboratory that performs testing shall be independent, enrolled in the US Composting Council’s (USCC) Compost Analysis Proficiency (CAP) program, and perform testing in accordance with USCC Test Method for The Examination of Composting and

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1733
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 3
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
Compost (TMECC). The sample collection protocol can be obtained from the U.S.

Composting Council, 4250 Veterans Memorial Highway, Suite 275, Holbrook, NY 11741, 631 737 4931, www.compostingcouncil.org.

C. Responsibilities of Contractor

1. Submittals: Some of the tests required for this specification are unique, and BSM shall be considered a long-lead-time item. Under no circumstance shall failure to comply with all specification requirements be an excuse for a delay or for expedient substitution of unacceptable material(s). The requirements of Division 0 apply in their entirety.

Pre-Placement Conference: A mandatory pre-placement conference will take place, including at a minimum the Engineer, the Landscape Architect, the City Representative, Installer, and general Contractor, to review schedule, products, soil testing, permeability testing, and installation. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 2 working days prior to conference.

2. Testing: All testing specified herein is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be conducted by an independent testing agency, retained by the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to conduct additional testing on all materials submitted, delivered, or inplace to ensure compliance with Specifications.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect the BSM and mulch from contamination and all sources of additional moisture (e.g., rainfall, surface runoff, and other sources of moisture) at supplier site, during transport, and at the project site, until incorporated into the Work.

B. The Contractor is required to coordinate delivery of BSM and aggregates with bioretention facility excavation and soil installation. A written schedule shall be submitted for review as part of the submittal package. In no case shall BSM be stockpiled onsite for more than 24 hours without prior written approval by the Engineer. If stockpiling onsite for any length of time, BSM stockpiles shall meet the following requirements:

1. Locate stockpiles away from drainage courses, inlets, sewer cleanout vents, and concentrated stormwater flows

2. Place stockpiles on geotextile fabric (or on steel road plates for longer-term and highervolume stockpiles)

3. Cover stockpiles with polyethylene plastic sheeting, tarps, or comparable material

4. Contain eroded material from stockpiles (and prevent contamination from adjacent stockpiles) with temporary perimeter barrier (e.g., gravel bags, wattles, silt fence)

5. For longer-term and higher-volume stockpiles, contain stockpiles using precast concrete blocks, jersey barrier or similar materials to prevent contamination from adjacent stockpiles and ground surfaces and to provide a backstop for re-handling operations PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIORETENTION SOIL MIX (BSM)
A. General: BSM shall be a well-blended mixture of sand and compost, shall have sufficient moisture retention to support healthy plant growth, and shall meet the following criteria:

1. Mixture proportions: 30 to 40 percent Compost by volume and 60 to 70 percent Sand by volume

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1734
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 4
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

2. Organic matter content: 4 to 8 percent as determined by TMECC 05.07 A, Loss on Ignition Method.

3. Extraneous materials: BSM shall be free of all roots, plants, weeds, sod, stones, clods, pockets of coarse sand, construction debris, or other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

4. Permeability/Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: 10 inches per hour (minimum) tested in accordance with ASTM D2434 (Modified).

5. Acceptance of BSM quality and performance may be based on samples taken from stockpiles at supplier’s yard, submitted test results, and/or onsite and laboratory testing of installed material at the discretion of the Engineer. The point of acceptance will be determined in the field by the Engineer.

B. Sand: Sand in the BSM shall conform to the requirements for Sand, specified herein, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

1. Sand shall be free of wood, waste, coating, or any other deleterious material.

2. Sand material shall meet the following specifications for gradation.

Sieve Size1 Percent Passing by Weight2
3/8 inch 100
No. 4 90 to 100
No. 8 70 to 100
No. 16 40 to 95
No. 30 15 to 70
No. 50 5 to 55
No. 100 0 to 15
No. 200 0 to 5
1 Sieve provided in nominal size square openings or United States Standard Sieve Series sizes. 2 Sand conforming to ASTM C33 for Fine Aggregate satisfies the requirements of this specification for Sand.

3. All aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve shall be non-plastic.

4. Acceptance of grading and quality of the sand may be based on samples taken from stockpiles at supplier’s yard or a submitted gradation report at the discretion of the Engineer. The point of acceptance will be determined in the field by the Engineer.

C. Compost: Compost in the BSM shall be well decomposed, stable, weed free organic matter sourced from waste materials including yard debris, or wood wastes. Compost shall conform to California Code of Regulations Title 14, Division 7, Chapter 3.1 requirements, meet the PFRP (Process to Further Reduce Pathogens) standard to reduce weed seeds, pathogens, and deleterious materials under 14 CA Code of Regs §17868.3 (i.e., reaching the required minimum temperature of 55 degrees Celsius for the required length of time), be certified through the USCC Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) Program, and meet the criteria specified herein.

1. Feedstocks: Feedstock materials shall be specified and include one or more of the following: landscape/yard trimmings, grass clippings, food scraps, and agricultural crop

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1735
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 5
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
residues. Feedstock shall not include biosolids, manure, or post-consumer or postindustrial wood products.

2. Organic Matter Content: 35 to 75 percent by dry weight tested in accordance with TMECC

05.07 A (Loss on Ignition Organic Matter Method).

3. Carbon to Nitrogen Ratio: C:N between 15:1 and 25:1 when tested in accordance with TMECC 05.02 A.

4. Maturity/Stability: shall have a dark brown color and a soil-like odor. Compost exhibiting a sour or putrid smell, containing recognizable grass or leaves, or is hot (120°F) upon delivery or rewetting is not acceptable. In addition, any one of the following is required to indicate stability:
a. Specific Oxygen Uptake Rate (SOUR): 1.5 milligrams O2 per gram biodegradable volatile solids per hour (maximum) per TMECC 05.08 A.
b. Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate: 8 milligrams CO2 per gram volatile solids per day per TMECC 05.08-B.
c. Dewar Self Heating Test: 20°C temperature rise (maximum) per TMECC 05.08 D (Class IV or V).
d. Solvita®: Index value greater than 6 per TMECC 05.08 E.

5. Toxicity: Any one of the following measures is sufficient to indicate non-toxicity. a. Seed Germination: greater than 80 percent of control b. Vigor: greater than 80 percent of control per TMECC 05.05 A. c. Ammonium < 500 ppm, dry basis
d. Plant Trials > 80% of control

6. Nutrient Content: provide analysis detailing nutrient content including N P K, Ca, Na, Mg, S, and B.
a. Total Nitrogen: 0.9 percent (minimum).
b. Boron: Total shall be < 80 ppm

7. Salinity/Electrical Conductivity: less than 6.0 deciSiemen per meter (dS/m or mmhos/cm) per TMECC 04.10-A (1:5 Slurry Method, Mass Basis).

8. pH: 6.0 to 8.5 per TMECC 04.11-A (1:5 Slurry pH).

9. Gradation: Compost for BSM shall meet the following size gradation per TMECC 02.02-B (test shall be run on dry compost sample):

Sieve
Size Percent Passing by Weight
Min Max
2 inch 100 -
1 inch 99 100
5/8 inch 90 100
1/4 inch 75 100

10. Bulk density: 500 to 1,100 dry pounds per cubic yard.

11. Moisture content: 30 to 55 percent of dry solids.

12. Inerts: compost shall be relatively free of inert ingredients, including glass, plastic, and paper, less than 1 percent by weight or volume per TMECC 03.08A.

13. Weed seed/pathogen destruction: provide proof of process to further reduce pathogens (PFRP). For example, turned windrows must reach minimum 55°C for 15 days with at least 5 turnings during that period.

14. Select Pathogens: Must meet a or b
a. Salmonella: less than 3 Most Probable Number per 4 grams of total solids, dry weight per TMECC 07.02.
b. Coliform Bacteria: fecal coliform less than 1,000 Most Probable Number per gram of total solids, dry weight per TMECC 07.01.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1736
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 6
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

15. Trace Contaminants Metals (lead, mercury, etc.): Product must meet US EPA, 40 CFR 503 regulations.

2.2 AGGREGATE STORAGE LAYERS
A. Aggregate Storage shall consist of hard, durable, and clean, sand, gravel, or mechanically crushed stone, substantially free from adherent coatings. Materials shall be washed thoroughly to remove fines, organic matter, extraneous debris, or objectionable materials. Recycled materials are not permitted. The material shall be obtained only from a source(s) approved by the Engineer.

Written requests for source approval shall be submitted to the Engineer not less than ten (10) working days prior to the intended use of the Material. Should the proposed source be one that the Engineer has no history of Material performance with, the Engineer reserves the right to take preliminary samples at the proposed source, and make preliminary tests, to first determine acceptability of the new source and then perform the applicable Material approval testing.

Continued approval of a source is contingent upon the Materials from that source continuing to meet Contract requirements. Materials shall meet the Standard Specifications for grading and quality for use in the Work; however, allowable exceptions may be specified in the Contract.

B. Aggregate storage shall meet the following specifications for grading and quality.

1. Aggregate gradation testing in accordance with ASTM C136 at least once per 500 cubic yards.

Sieve1 Percent Passing by Weight
Caltrans Class 2 Permeable Aggregate
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90 to 100
1/2 inch –
3/8 inch 40 to 100
No. 4 25 to 40
No. 8 18 to 33
No. 16 –
No. 30 5 to 15
No. 50 0 to 7
No. 2002 0 to 3
1 Sieve provided in nominal size square openings or United States Standard Sieve Series sizes.

2. For projects proposing Caltrans Class 2 Permeable aggregate:
a. Refer to Caltrans Specification Section 68-2.02F for all requirements including but not limited to:
1) Durability index not less than 40,
2) Sand equivalent value of not less than 75, and
b. Material must consist of hard, durable, clean sand, gravel, or crushed stone and must be free from organic material, clay balls, or other deleterious substances.

2.3 COMPOSTED MULCH
A. See 329300 – Planting.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1737
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 7
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

2.4 STREAMBED COBBLES
A. Streambed Cobbles shall be clean, naturally occurring water rounded gravel material. Streambed Cobbles shall have a well-graded distribution of cobble sizes and conform to the following gradation:

Approximate
Size1
Percent Passing
by Weight
4” 99-100
3” 70-90
2”

1.5” 20-30
¾” 10 max.
1 Approximate size can be determined by taking the average dimension of the three axes of the rock, Length, Width, and Thickness, by use of the following calculation: (Length + Width + Thickness)/3 = Approximate Size Length is the longest axis, width is the second longest axis, and thickness is the shortest axis.

The grading of the cobbles shall be determined by the Engineer by visual inspection of the load before it is delivered, or, if so ordered by the Engineer, by dumping individual loads on a flat surface and sorting and measuring the individual rocks contained in the load. Cobbles must be washed before placement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Prevent runoff from adjacent pervious and impervious surfaces from entering the bioretention facility (e.g., gravel bag inlet curb cuts, stabilize adjacent areas, flow diversion) until authorization is given by the Engineer.

B. Exclude equipment from bioretention facilities. No equipment shall operate within the facility once bioretention facility excavation has begun, including during and after excavation, backfilling, mulching, or planting.

C. Prevent foreign materials and substances, such as silt laden run-off, construction debris, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid from entering or being stored in the facility at any point during construction.

D. Do not dump Materials or substances except the bioretention soil within the cell area.

3.2 GRADING
A. The Contractor shall not start bioretention facility grading until all areas draining to the facility are stabilized and authorization has been given by the Engineer/Landscape Architect.

B. Construct bioretention facility subgrade to +/- 3/4 inch of the grades and slopes specified on the Plans.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1738
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 8
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
C. Excavation within 6 inches of final native soil grade shall not be permitted if facility soils have standing water or have been subjected to more than 1/2 inch of precipitation within the previous 48 hours.

3.3 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND PROTECTION
A. Protect the bioretention excavation from over compaction and/or contamination.

1. Areas which have been over compacted by equipment or vehicle traffic or by other means and which need to be ripped, over excavated, receive additional scarification, or other restorative means shall be done at the Contractor’s expense and at the direction of the Engineer.

2. Excavated areas contaminated by sediment laden runoff prior to placement of BSM or Aggregate Storage material shall be remediated at the Contractor’s expense by removing the contaminated soil (top 3 inches minimum) and replacing with a suitable material, as determined by the Engineer.

B. Remove all trash, debris, construction waste, cement dust and/or slurry, or any other materials that may impede infiltration into prepared subgrade.

C. The subgrade shall be inspected and accepted by the Engineer/Landscape Architect prior to placement of any materials or final subgrade scarification.

D. Scarify the surface of the subgrade to a minimum depth of 3 inches immediately prior to placement of BSM or aggregate storage material. Acceptable methods of scarification include use of excavator bucket teeth or a rototiller to loosen the surface of the subgrade.

E. Place aggregate storage material, where shown on drawings with conveyor belt or with an excavator or loader from a height no higher than 6 feet unless otherwise approved by the Engineer (i.e., do not dump material directly from truck into cell).

F. Aggregate Storage areas contaminated by sediment-laden runoff prior to placement of BSM shall be remediated at the Contractor’s expense by removing the contaminated aggregate storage material (top 3 inches minimum or as directed by the Engineer) and replacing with clean aggregate storage material per Section 2.03, to the lines and grades on the Plans.

G. Aggregate Storage material shall be inspected and accepted for placement and finish grade by the Engineer/Landscape Architect prior to the installation of BSM. Any material that does not conform to this Specification shall be removed and replaced with acceptable material or remediated to the satisfaction of the Engineer/Landscape Architect, at the Contractor’s expense.

3.4 BIORETENTION SOIL MIX PLACEMENT
A. The Contractor shall not place BSM until the Engineer/Landscape Architect has reviewed and confirmed the following:

1. BSM delivery ticket(s): Delivery tickets shall show that the full delivered amount of BSM matches the product type, volume and manufacturer named in the submittals. Each delivered batch of BSM shall be accompanied by a certification letter from the supplier verifying that the material meets specifications and is supplied from the approved BSM stockpile.

2. Visual match with submitted samples: Delivered product will be compared to the submitted 1-gallon sample, to verify that it matches the submitted sample. The Engineer/Landscape Architect may inspect any loads of BSM on delivery and stop placement if the soil does not

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1739
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 9
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
appear to match the submittals; and require sampling and testing of the delivered soil to determine if the soil meets the requirements of Section 2.1 before authorizing soil placement.

3. Inspection of the aggregate storage layer, underdrain, cleanout, and overflow structure installation, where included on the plans.

B. BSM placement, grading and consolidation shall not occur if there is standing water in the excavation or when the BSM is excessively wet, or has been subjected to more than 1/2 inch of precipitation within 48 hours prior to placement. Excessively wet is defined as being at or above 22 percent soil moisture by a General Tools & Instruments DSMM500 Precision Digital Soil Moisture Meter with Probe (or equivalent). A minimum of three readings with the soil moisture probe will be used to determine the average percent soil moisture reading per each truck load.

There should be no visible free water in the material.

C. The Contractor shall place BSM loosely in even lifts no deeper than 9 inches unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, with a conveyor belt or with an excavator or loader from a height no higher than 6 feet, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer (i.e., do not dump material directly from truck into cell). After each lift, rake the surface to a uniform grade, consolidate as specified below, and rake again to scarify before placing subsequent lifts or planting.

D. Soil shall be placed upon a prepared subgrade in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, depth, and typical cross-section shown in the Drawings or as established by the Engineer.

E. Excessively dry BSM may be lightly and uniformly moistened, as necessary, to facilitate placement and workability.

F. Compact BSM using non-mechanical compaction methods (e.g., boot packing, hand tamping, or push type lawn roller) to 83 percent (+/- 2 percent) of the maximum dry density per modified Proctor test (ASTM D1557), or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. Determination of inplace density shall be made using a nuclear gauge per ASTM D6938. Moisture content determination shall be conducted on a soil sample taken at the location of the nuclear gage reading per ASTM D2216.

G. Grade BSM to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

H. Final soil depth shall be measured and verified only after the soil has been compacted. If after consolidation, the soil is not within +/- 3/4 inch of the grades and slopes specified on the Plans, add material to bring it up to final grade and raked.

I. The BSM shall be inspected and accepted for placement and finish grade by the Engineer prior to the installation of planting and mulch. Any BSM that does not conform to this Specification shall be remediated to the satisfaction of the Engineer, or removed and replaced with acceptable BSM, at the Contractor’s expense.

3.5 PLANTING AND MULCHING
A. Bioretention facilities shall be planted and mulched as shown on the Plans.

B. Bioretention facilities shall not be planted or mulched when soils are excessively wet as defined in Section 3.4.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1740
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 334727 - 10
Bioretention
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
C. Bioretention facility areas contaminated by sediment laden runoff prior to planting or placement of mulch shall be remediated at the Contractor’s expense by removing the contaminated BSM (top 3 inches minimum) and replacing with BSM per Section 2.01, to the lines and grades on the Plans.

D. All mulch shall be inspected and accepted by the Engineer to ensure appropriate depth and material prior to facility commissioning (e.g., unblocking of inlets).

E. At the conclusion of planting and mulching, the 90-day plant root-in period begins. During the 90- day plant root-in period the inlets shall be blocked to prevent runoff from adjacent pervious and impervious surfaces from entering the bioretention facility (e.g., gravel bag inlet curb cuts, stabilize adjacent areas, flow diversion) until authorization is given by the Engineer/Landscape Architect.

3.6 FLOW TESTING
A. Inlets shall be constructed per the Plans and free from all obstructions prior to commencing flow testing.

B. Initial testing shall take place immediately following the construction of curbs, walls, and/or inlet structures.

C. Final testing shall be conducted at the conclusion of the 90 day plant root-in period.

D. Prior to testing, broom sweep gutter and other impervious surfaces within the test area to remove sediments and other objectionable materials.

E. The Engineer shall be present during the demonstration. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer/Landscape Architect a minimum of 2 working days prior to testing.

F. The Contractor shall water test each facility to demonstrate that all inlet curb openings are capturing and diverting all water in the gutter to the facility, or diverting was per design intent.

Testing shall include application of water from a hydrant or water truck, at a minimum rate of 10 gallons per minute, into the gutter a minimum of 15 feet upstream of the inlet curb opening being tested. Each inlet shall be tested individually. If erosion occurs during final testing, restore soils, plants, and other affected materials.

G. Engineer will identify deficiencies and required corrections, including but not limited to relocating misplaced plants, adjusting streambed gravel, adjusting mulch, adjusting inlets, splash aprons, and forebays, removing and replacing inlets, and removing debris.

H. Once adjustments are made, the Contractor shall re-test to confirm all test-water flows into the facility from the gutter and correct any remaining deficiencies identified by Engineer.

I. Inlets, outlets, and other bioretention facility appurtenances shall not be accepted until testing and any required correction and retesting is complete and accepted by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION 334727

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1741
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 347113 - 1
Active Vehicular Barriers
SECTION 34 71 13 - ACTIVE VEHICLE BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Crash rated automated hydraulic retractable bollard.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
B. Section 091000 – Painting
C. Section 260500 – General Electrical

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)
B. EN124 (40T)

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Product Data: Provide for each type of barrier, component, finish, and accessory specified.

2. Shop Drawings and Calculation prepared by a Professional Engineer in the State of California. Include plans, sections, and elevations with surrounding site context.

3. Submittals will be reviewed by the City Fire Department.

4. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s field touch-up, cleaning, and maintenance instructions.

5. Warranty Documentation: Submit sample of manufacturer’s warranty.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. COMPLY WITH SECTION GP-Section 11 Guarantee – QUALITY ASSURANCE.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum of five years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1742
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 347113 - 2
Active Vehicular Barriers

1. Engage an experienced installer who has minimum five years of documented experience with projects of similar scope and complexity. Installer is an authorized representative of the vehicle barrier manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of the type of units required for this Project.

D. Source Limitations: Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing source to ensure uniformity.

E. Each Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1 is cycled in-house prior to shipment to ensure proper working order and calibration of limit switches.

F. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Product Storage and Handling Requirements.

B. The Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1 shall be packaged to protect the materials from damage during shipment.

C. While Sloan Security Group does not assume responsibility for injury to persons or property during loading, unloading, transporting or installation, verbal guidance and additional written instructions are available upon request.

D. Sloan Security Group does not assume responsibility for ensuring that the rigging and lifting gear is properly sized and attached when lifting heavy components. Equipment used shall be capable of handling product in an overhang position.

E. Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1 is coated to protect materials from the effects of exposure to all outdoor elements; however, when site storage is required Sloan Security Group recommends the following guidelines:

1. Short term storage (0-12 months): Store in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage. The storage location shall protect against damage, vandalism, and theft.

2. Long term storage (more than 12 months): In addition to the recommendations for short term storage, the Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard (non-crash rated) shall also be covered to prevent exposure to the elements prior to installation. The purpose of this recommendation is to preserve the aesthetic appearance of the coating finish. Long term exposure to the elements naturally degrades coating appearances; therefore, proper storage is essential for ensuring preservation of the material.

F. Upon delivery of Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1 control systems, the crate or pallets containing any electrical components shall be marked as such and stored in a covered location that ensures proper ventilation and drainage. The storage location shall protect against damage, vandalism and theft. Control cabinets may not be rated for outdoor exposure; therefore, higher storage measures should be taken.

G. Upon receipt at the job site, all materials shall be checked to ensure that no damage occurred during shipping or handling. Materials shall be stored in such a manner to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage, weather, vandalism, and theft.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1743
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 347113 - 3
Active Vehicular Barriers

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Sloan’s active vehicle barrier products carry a standard warranty against defects in material and workmanship on fabricated components for one year when installed by a Sloan authorized installer. Warranty begins at the ship date of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERES
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sloan Security Group, Phone: (888) 382-8370, Website:
www.sloansg.com, Email: [email protected], or approved equal.

2.2 VEHICLE BARRIERS
A. Basis of Design: Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1, Model: HB-3430 as manufactured by Sloan Security Group, or approved equal.

1. ASTM F2656 Crash Rating C730/7200 (Class 7 Cabover 15,873 lbs. (7,200kg) @ 30mph (50kph))

2. Penetration Rating: P1

3. Hydraulic retractable bollard 230 VAC

4. 35” (900mm) in height, with cylinder thickness 0.4” (10mm)

5. Cataphoresis treatment and “Graphite Black” painting or cover in brushed AISI316 stainless steel

6. The hydraulic retractable bollard system shall include an operable bollard with controls, cabling and obstruction detection devices. The barrier shall comply with Sloan’s System Drawings.

7. Raising and lowering time shall be 4.5 seconds

8. The emergency function E.F.O. (Emergency Fast Operation) is available upon request and allows a fast raising in 1.5 seconds

9. Cylinder with built-in LED lights, the control unit can manage 2 bollards at the same time

10. Foundation box complying with the EN124 (40T) regulation and independent hydraulic pump for each bollard, laterally positioned to avoid any damage in the event of an impact and facilitate the maintenance

11. Heating for the foundation box, buzzer and pressure switch for obstacle detection available as accessories

12. Control panel for 1 or 2 hydraulic bollards:
a. 230 Vac 50/60 Hz power supply

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1744
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 347113 - 4
Active Vehicular Barriers
b. Integrated 433.92 MHz 64-code receiver with 3 encoding systems (Advanced Rolling Code, Rolling Code, Fixed Code)
c. Removable terminal boards
d. Parameter and operation logic regulations through integrated LCD display e. Automatic, semi-automatic and deadman’s logic
f. Programming access password
g. Equipped with step-by-step command inputs separate for each bollard and centralized command inputs ALL UP and ALL DOWN for the raising and the lowering of both bollard
h. Version with built-in board to manage buzzer/LED lights available i. Separate limit switch inputs for each motor
j. Control inputs for loop detectors and protection devices k. 2 outputs configurable as bollard status indicator or command of the optional board l. Designed for the connection of the optional board to manage signal lights and the warning buzzer
m. Protection level IP54

13. Traffic light type indicators/lighting can be provided per the customer requirements

14. Operating temperature -40°C to +60°C [Heater available as option for temperatures lower than -10°C]

15. In the event of a power failure, the bollard will remain in the raised position (manual release)

16. Control panels are provided per customer specification. Basic Open/Close controls are provided as a standard, unless specified otherwise. All control cables to be used between control panels shall not be provided by Sloan, unless specified.

17. Control Panels are customizable per customer specification

18. Site work materials to include concrete footings, drains or conduit not provided by Sloan.

2.3 MATERIAL
A. Foundation box shall conform to the EN124 (40T) regulation B. Stainless steel finish AISI 316
C. Sloan will provide material certifications with each order upon request.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1745
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 347113 - 5
Active Vehicular Barriers

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication of the members shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, the plan details, and this specification.

B. Provide Shop drawings for site specific locations of each barrier.

C. All Sloan products are coated to the customer specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE EXAMINATION
A. The purchaser shall indicate the location of all products with suitable means.

B. The purchaser shall indicate all underground utility locations, USC&G benchmarks, property monuments, and other underground structures that interfere with installation.

C. Before installing the Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1, all necessary site clearing and grading shall be performed by the purchaser. An adequate clearance on both sides of the bollard is required.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine and verify foundation suitability for product installation.

B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best results for substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. The Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1 shall be installed per Sloan’s System Drawing.

Construct concrete foundations to the dimensions specified by the plans. Excavate a properly sized area for bollard foundations and in accordance with the plans. Place the concrete, install the barrier, and plumb. Use a 100mm diameter PVC tube to connect to a water drainage system for sufficient water drainage. Refer to contract or submittal plans for more installation details.

B. Sloan’s hydraulic retractable bollard M30/P1 are warranted against defects in material and workmanship on structural components for one year from ship date, when installed by a Sloan authorized installer.

C. Engage an experienced installer who has minimum five years of documented experience with projects of similar scope and complexity.

D. Suggested Installer: Sloan Security Group Phone: (888) 382-8370, Website: www.sloansg.com, Email: [email protected], or approved equal.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1746
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 347113 - 6
Active Vehicular Barriers

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean hydraulic retractable bollards M30/P1 in accordance with the manufacture’s recommendations to remove dust, dirt, adhesives, and other foreign materials.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

C. The contractor shall clean the jobsite thoroughly to ensure it is left neat and free of any debris caused by the installation of the active vehicle barrier system.

3.5 CONTINUED SERVICE AND DOCUMENTATION
A. General maintenance of the Sloan Hydraulic Retractable Bollard M30/P1 System shall consist of removing foreign materials from frame or sub-grade frame as debris may cause damage to the barrier and may cause safety concerns. Refer to the owner’s manual for more details on the system maintenance.

B. Sloan will supply an operator manual that contains recommended maintenance intervals, procedures, and replacement parts lists.

C. Maintenance instructions shall include routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns, and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. The instructions shall include piping layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring, and control diagrams of the systems as installed.

D. Suggested Maintenance Contractor: Sloan Security Group, Phone: (888) 382-8370, Website:
www.sloangsg.com, email: [email protected], or approved equal.

END OF SECTION 347113

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1747
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

APPENDICES

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1748
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1749
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

APPENDIX
A. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS – AUG 2025

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1750

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
HARRINGTON PARK – LAUREL STREET PLAZA
759 LAUREL STREET
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
Prepared for
CSWST2
303 Twin Dolphin Drive, 6th Floor
Redwood City, California 94065
August 2025
Project No. 6962-1

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1751
August 5, 2025
6962-1
CSWST2
303 Twin Dolphin Drive, 6th Floor
Redwood City, California 94065
RE: GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

HARRINGTON PARK/PUBLIC PLAZA
759 LAUREL STREET

SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA
Attention: Mr. Robert Stevens
Ladies and Gentlemen:

In accordance with your request, we have performed a geotechnical investigation for the proposed public plaza to be constructed along the 700 block of Laurel Street and improvements to Harrington Park located at 759 Laurel Street in San Carlos, California.

The accompanying report summarizes the results of our field exploration, laboratory testing, and engineering analysis, and presents our geotechnical recommendations for the proposed improvements.

We refer you to the text of our report for specific recommendations.

Thank you for the opportunity to work with you on this project. If you have any questions or comments about the findings or recommendations from our investigation, please call.

Very truly yours,
ROMIG ENGINEERS, INC.

Darren J. Donlon Coleman K. Ng, P.E.

Copies: Addressee (via email)
CN:DD:pf
1390 El Camino Real, Second Floor | San Carlos, CA 94070 | (650) 591-5224 | www.romigengineers.com

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1752

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION

HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA
759 LAUREL STREET
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94065
PREPARED FOR:

CSWST2
303 TWIN DOLPHIN DRIVE, 6TH FLOOR
REDWOOD CITY, CALIFORNIA 94065
PREPARED BY:

ROMIG ENGINEERS, INC.
1390 EL CAMINO REAL, SECOND FLOOR
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
AUGUST 2025

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1753

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.

Letter of transmittal
Title Page

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................1 Project Description ................................................................................................1 Scope of Work .......................................................................................................1 Limitations .............................................................................................................2 SITE EXPLORATION AND RECONNAISSANCE ...................................................3 Surface Conditions ................................................................................................3 Subsurface Conditions ...........................................................................................3 Ground Water ........................................................................................................4 GEOLOGIC SETTING .................................................................................................4 Faulting and Seismicity .........................................................................................5 Table 1. Earthquake Magnitudes and Historical Earthquakes .....................5 Earthquake Design Parameters ..............................................................................6 Table 2. 2022 CBC Seismic Design Criteria ...............................................6 Liquefaction Evaluation ........................................................................................6 CONCLUSIONS............................................................................................................7 FOUNDATIONS ...........................................................................................................8 Mat Foundation .....................................................................................................8 Basement Water Proofing ......................................................................................9 Lateral Loads for Mat ............................................................................................9 Spread Footings ...................................................................................................10 Lateral Loads for Footings ..................................................................................11 Settlement for Mat/Footings ................................................................................11 RETAINING WALLS .................................................................................................11 SLABS-ON-GRADE ...................................................................................................13 General Slab Considerations ...............................................................................13 Subsurface Drainage ............................................................................................13 Exterior Flatwork .................................................................................................14 VEHICLE PAVEMENTS ...........................................................................................14 Asphalt Concrete Pavement ................................................................................14 Table 3. Minimum Asphalt Concrete Pavement Sections .........................15 Concrete Pavers ...................................................................................................15 Pervious Pavements .............................................................................................16 Rigid Concrete Pavements ..................................................................................16 Table 4. Rigid Concrete Pavement Design .................................................17 EARTHWORK ............................................................................................................17 Clearing and Subgrade Preparation .....................................................................17 Percolation Rates .................................................................................................18 Compaction ..........................................................................................................18 Table 5. Compaction Recommendations ...................................................18 Material For Fill ..................................................................................................19

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1754
Temporary Slopes and Excavations ....................................................................19 Finished Slopes ....................................................................................................20 Surface Drainage .................................................................................................20 FUTURE SERVICES ..................................................................................................20 Plan Review .........................................................................................................20 Construction Observation and Testing ................................................................21

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(Continued)

REFERENCES
FIGURE 1 - VICINITY MAP
FIGURE 2 - SITE PLAN
FIGURE 3 - VICINITY GEOLOGIC MAP
FIGURE 4 - REGIONAL FAULT AND SEISMICITY MAP
FIGURE 5 - SUBSLAB DRAINAGE DETAIL

APPENDIX A - FIELD INVESTIGATION
Figure A-1 - Key to Exploratory Boring Logs
Exploratory Boring Logs EB-1 and EB-2

APPENDIX B - SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TESTS
Figure B-1 - Plasticity Chart

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1755

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
FOR

HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA
759 LAUREL STREET

SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA

INTRODUCTION
We are pleased to present this geotechnical investigation report for the proposed public plaza to be constructed along the 700 block of Laurel Street and improvements to Harrington Park located at 759 Laurel Street in San Carlos, California. The location of the site is shown on the Vicinity Map, Figure 1. The purpose of this investigation was to evaluate subsurface conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical design and construction recommendations for the proposed improvements.

Project Description
The project consists of constructing site improvements at Harrington Park and along the 700 block of Laurel Street in San Carlos. The first phase of the project includes a new restroom and storage building near the north corner of Harrington Park. The restroom may include a below-grade basement component for water foundation equipment and storage that will extend to a depth of less than 3 feet below ground surface. The second phase of work will include a new open-air canopy/pavilion structure with a stage platform along the intersection of Harrington Park and Laurel Street, and a new water fountain sculpture southwest of the canopy. In addition, the 700 block of Laurel Street (between Cherry Street and Olive Street) will be converted into a public plaza with various hardscape and landscape improvements and five new bio-retention basin areas.

Structural loads are expected to be relatively light as is typical for this type of construction.

Scope of Work
Our scope of work for this investigation was presented in detail in our agreements with CSWST2 dated May 29 and May 30, 2025. In order to complete our investigation, we performed the following work.
• Reviewed readily available geologic and geotechnical literature pertinent to the general area of the site.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1756
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 2 of 21 • Subsurface exploration consisting of drilling, sampling, and logging of two exploratory borings near the proposed improvements.
• Laboratory testing of selected sample to aid in soil classification and to help evaluate their engineering properties of the soils encountered at the site. • Engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface data to develop geotechnical design criteria for the project.
• Preparation of this report presenting our findings and geotechnical recommendations for the proposed improvements.

Limitations
This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the CSWST2 for specific application to developing geotechnical design criteria for the public plaza to be constructed along the 700 block of Laurel Street and restroom building and improvements to be constructed at Harrington Park located at 759 Laurel Street in San Carlos, California. We make no warranty, expressed or implied, except that our services were performed in accordance with geotechnical engineering principles generally accepted at this time and location. This report was prepared to provide engineering opinions and recommendations only. In the event there are any changes in the nature, design or location of the project, or if any future improvements are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report should not be considered valid unless 1) the project changes are reviewed by us, and 2) the conclusions and recommendations presented in this report are modified or verified in writing.

The analysis, conclusions, and recommendations presented in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of our investigation; the currently planned improvements; review of previous reports relevant to the site conditions; and laboratory test results. In addition, it should be recognized that certain limitations are inherent in the evaluation of subsurface conditions, and that certain conditions may not be detected during an investigation of this type. Changes in the information or data gained from any of these sources could result in changes in our conclusions or recommendations. If such changes occur, we should be advised so that we can review our report in light of those changes.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1757
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 3 of 21

SITE EXPLORATION AND RECONNAISSANCE
Site reconnaissance and subsurface exploration were performed on June 26, 2025.

Subsurface exploration was performed using portable Minuteman drilling and sampling equipment. Two exploratory borings were advanced to depths of 16 and 20 feet. The approximate locations of the borings are shown on the Site Plan, Figure 2. The boring logs and the results of our laboratory tests are attached in Appendices A and B, respectively.

Surface Conditions
Harrington Park is located in a commercial area along the northeast side of Laurel Street.

A concrete walkway extended through the park providing access from Laurel Street to the alley at the northeast side. An elevated concrete stage/platform with a covered awning was located at the north side of the park (in the area of the proposed restroom/storage structure). The 700 block of Laurel Street (between Cherry Street and Olive Street) in the area of the proposed public plaza is also generally bordered by dozen of commercial properties along the northeast and southwest sides.

At the time of our investigation, the site was a relatively flat public park and commercial area. Laurel Street was paved with asphalt concrete with perimeter concrete public sidewalks. The sidewalks were constructed with a brick trim, and a brick paver crosswalk (between the sidewalks of Harrington Park and Bank of America parking lot) was located in the general vicinity of the planned open-air canopy structure and water fountain feature. The park was landscaped with lawn and native grass, small to medium shrubs, and small to medium trees.

Subsurface Conditions
At the location of our Boring EB-1, which was advanced in Laurel Street near the location of the proposed new open-air canopy structure, we encountered about 12.5 feet of very stiff to hard sandy lean clay of moderate plasticity (below the asphalt concrete pavement) underlain by dense clayey sand to the maximum depth explored of 16 feet.

In Boring EB-2, which was advanced in the area of the proposed restroom/storage structure in Harrington Park, we encountered about 12 feet of stiff to hard sandy lean clay of moderate plasticity underlain by medium dense to dense/stiff to hard sandy lean clay/clayey sand to the maximum depth explored of 20 feet.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1758
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 4 of 21 We note that portions of the medium dense sands encountered in our borings are susceptible to liquefaction during a moderate to strong earthquake. Details of our liquefaction evaluation are discussed in a later section of this report.

A Liquid Limit of 35 and a Plasticity Index of 19 were measured on a sample of nearsurface soil. These test results indicate that the surface and near-surface soils at the site have a moderate plasticity and a moderate potential for expansion.

Ground Water
Ground water was encountered at a depth of approximately 9 feet in Boring EB-1 and 10 feet in Boring EB-2 during drilling. The borings were backfilled with grout shortly after drilling and sampling was completed; therefore, the borings may not have been open long enough to respond to seasonally perched or local long term stabilized ground water conditions. Information presented in the Seismic Hazard Zone Report 111 for the San Mateo Quadrangle (California Geological Survey, 2018) indicated the historic high ground water level in the areas of the site is less than 10 feet below the ground surface.

Please be cautioned that fluctuations in the level of ground water can occur due to variations in rainfall, landscaping, underground drainage patterns, and other factors.

Based on the findings from this investigation, nearby data available on the “Geotracker” website, and our local experience, it is our opinion that the highest projected ground water level at the site is approximately 3 feet below the ground surface.

Dewatering during construction of the basement may required depending on the depth of the basement excavation and the ground water level at the time of excavation. This information may be confirmed with a deep test pit or exploratory boring extending 2 feet below the deepest portion of the basement excavation a short time prior to construction.

GEOLOGIC SETTING
As part of our investigation, we briefly reviewed our local experience and geologic information in our files pertinent to the general area of the site. Geologic information for the area indicates the site is underlain by Holocene-age coarse-grained, young alluvial fan deposits, Qyf (Harlan Tait, 1996). The alluvial fan deposits are expected to generally consist of poorly consolidated deposits of gravel, sand, silt, and clay. The geology of the site vicinity is shown on the Vicinity Geologic Map, Figure 3.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1759
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 5 of 21 The lot and immediate site vicinity are located in an area that slopes gently to the north and northeast (approximately 10 feet vertically per 1,000 feet laterally, although locally the topography may be steeper). The site is located at an elevation of approximately 30 feet above sea level (see Figure 1).

Faulting and Seismicity
There are no mapped through-going faults within or adjacent to the site and the site is not located within a State of California Earthquake Fault Zone (formerly known as a Special Studies Zone), an area where the potential for fault rupture is considered probable. The closest active fault is the San Andreas Fault, located approximately 3.5 miles southwest of the property. Thus, the likelihood of surface rupture occurring from active faulting at the site is low.

The San Francisco Bay Area is, however, an active seismic region. Earthquakes in the region result from strain energy constantly accumulating because of the northwestward movement of the Pacific Plate relative to the North American Plate. On average about

1.6-inches of movement occur per year. Historically, the Bay Area has experienced large, destructive earthquakes in 1838, 1868, 1906 and 1989. The faults considered most likely to produce large earthquakes in the area include the San Andreas, San Gregorio, Hayward, and Calaveras faults. The San Gregorio Fault is located approximately 12 miles southwest of the site. The Hayward and Calaveras faults are located approximately 15 and 22 miles northeast of the site, respectively. These faults and significant earthquakes that have been documented in the Bay Area are listed in Table 1 below and are shown on the Regional Fault and Seismicity Map, Figure 4.

Table 1. Earthquake Magnitudes and Historical Earthquakes Harrington Park – Laurel Street Plaza
San Carlos, California
Maximum Historical Estimated
Fault Magnitude (Mw) Earthquakes Magnitude
San Andreas 7.9 1989 Loma Prieta 6.9
1906 San Francisco 7.9
1865 N. of 1989 Loma Prieta Earthquake 6.5
1838 San Francisco-Peninsula Segment 6.8
1836 East of Monterey 6.5
Hayward 7.1 1868 Hayward 6.8
1858 Hayward 6.8
Calaveras 6.8 1984 Morgan Hill 6.2
1911 Morgan Hill 6.2
1897 Gilroy 6.3
San Gregorio 7.3 1926 Monterey Bay 6.1

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1760
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 6 of 21 In the future, the subject property will undoubtedly experience severe ground shaking during moderate and large magnitude earthquakes produced along the San Andreas Fault or other active Bay Area fault zones. Using information from recent earthquakes, improved mapping of active faults, ground motion prediction modeling, and a new model for estimating earthquake probabilities, a panel of experts convened by the U.S.G.S. have concluded there is a 72 percent chance for at least one earthquake of Magnitude 6.7 or larger in the Bay Area before 2043. The Hayward Fault has the highest likelihood of an earthquake greater than or equal to magnitude 6.7 in the Bay Area, estimated at 33 percent, while the likelihood on the San Andreas and Calaveras faults is estimated at approximately 22 and 26 percent, respectively (Aagaard et al., 2016).

Earthquake Design Parameters
The State of California currently requires that buildings and structures be designed in accordance with the seismic design provisions presented in the 2022 California Building Code and in ASCE 7-16, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.” Based on site geologic conditions and on information from our subsurface exploration at the site, the site may be classified as Site Class D, stiff soil, in accordance with Chapter 20 of ASCE 7-16. Spectral Response Acceleration parameters and site coefficients may be taken directly from the SEAOC/OSHPD website based on the longitude and latitude of the site. For site latitude (37.5046), longitude (-122.2586) and Site Class D, design parameters are presented on Table 2 below.

Table 2. 2022 CBC Seismic Design Criteria
Harrington Park – Laurel Street Plaza
San Carlos, California
Spectral Response
Acceleration Parameters Design Value
Mapped Value for Short Period - SS 1.821
Mapped Value for 1-sec Period - S1 0.745
Site Coefficient - Fa 1.0
Site Coefficient - Fv 1.7
Adjusted for Site Class - SMS 1.821
Value for Design Earthquake - SDS 1.214
Liquefaction Evaluation
Severe ground shaking during an earthquake can cause loose to medium dense granular soils to densify. If the granular soils are below ground water, their densification can cause increases in pore water pressure, which can lead to soil softening, liquefaction, and ground deformation.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1761
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 7 of 21 Soils most prone to liquefaction are saturated, loose to medium dense, silty sands and sandy silts with limited drainage, and in some cases, sands and gravels that are interbedded with or that contain seams or layers of impermeable soil.

The medium dense clayey sand encountered at the site below the highest projected ground water depth, which is estimated to be about 3 feet below the ground surface, was considered in our liquefaction analysis. Soils with normalized standard penetration test, (N1)60, greater than 30 blows per feet were considered too dense to liquefy.

To evaluate the potential for earthquake-induced liquefaction of the soils at the site, we performed a liquefaction analysis of the boring data from our investigation following the methods described in the 2008 publication by Idriss and Boulanger titled “Soil Liquefaction During Earthquakes”.

Based on our analysis, the medium dense clayey sands encountered between depths of 16 to 18 feet in Boring EB-2 could liquefy when subjected to a peak ground acceleration (PGA) of 0.862, the PGAM for maximum considered earthquake based on ASCE 7-16.

Based on the results of our analysis, we estimate that total dynamic settlement of about ½ -inch may occur at the ground surface from liquefaction during a design level earthquake.

In our opinion, differential dynamic settlement of about ½-inch is possible from the above estimated settlement during seismic shaking. It should be noted that our exploration was limited to relatively shallow boring depths and it is possible that liquefiable soils and additional liquefaction related settlement could occur below the depth of our investigation of 20 feet.

CONCLUSIONS
From a geotechnical viewpoint, the site is suitable for the proposed public plaza planned on Laurel Street and restroom building to be constructed at Harrington Park provided the recommendations presented in this report are followed during design and construction.

Specific recommendations are provided in the following sections of this report.

The primary geotechnical concerns are: 1) the presence of medium dense sands underlying the site that are potentially susceptible to liquefaction-induced dynamic differential settlement; 2) the potential for relatively shallow ground water conditions during the design life of the basement structure that may be subject to buoyancy uplift pressure; 3) the presence of moderately expansive surface and near-surface soils; and 4) and the likelihood of severe ground shaking due to moderate to large earthquakes in the area.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1762
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 8 of 21 As discussed previously, the highest projected ground water level at the site is estimated to be about 3 feet below the existing ground surface. However, we understand that the basement finished floor elevation will be shallower than 3 feet below the ground surface.

In our opinion, the basement and basement walls of the restroom/storage building may be supported on a reinforced mat foundation bearing on stiff/dense native soils. If the basement will extend deeper than 3 feet, we should be contacted to provide supplemental recommendations. Due to the expansive soils and potential for some dynamic related settlement, any at-grades areas of the restroom/storage building, the stage/pavilion structure, and miscellaneous landscape features should be supported on a series of continuous footings with added reinforcing to provide a stiffer foundation more capable of tolerating differential soil movement. Sites that are underlain by expansive soils will likely be subject to differential movement due to significant volume changes within the highly expansive soils during seasonal fluctuations in moisture content.

Providing adequate waterproofing of the basement mat and walls is essential for the success of the basement. Please note however, providing water proofing recommendations is outside our scope of services and expertise. We also note that dewatering during construction may be required depending on the depth of the basement excavation and ground water level at the time of excavation/construction.

Because subsurface conditions may vary from those encountered at the location of our borings, and to observe that our recommendations are properly implemented, we recommend that we be retained to: 1) review the grading and foundation plans for conformance with the recommendations presented in this report and; 2) observe and test during earthwork and foundation and slab construction.

FOUNDATIONS
Mat Foundation
In our opinion, the lower level and basement walls of the restroom/storage structure may be supported on a mat foundation bearing in undisturbed stiff native soil. The mat may be designed for an average allowable bearing pressure of 2,000 pounds per square foot for combined dead plus live loads, with maximum localized bearing pressures of 3,000 pounds per square foot at column or wall loads. These pressures may be increased by one-third for total loads including wind or seismic forces. These pressures are net values; the weight of the mat may be neglected in design.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1763
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 9 of 21 The mat should be reinforced to provide structural continuity and to permit spanning of local irregularities. A water-proofing system designed by others should be installed below and around the edges of the mat foundation (and behind the basement walls). A modulus of subgrade reaction (Kv1) of 120 pounds per cubic inch may be assumed for a 1-foot square bearing area, which should be scaled to account for mat foundation size effects in accordance with NAVFAC Design Manual 7.02. Alternatively, based on the anticipated building load and differential static settlement, a modulus of subgrade reaction (Kv) of 30 pounds per cubic inch (pci) may be assumed for the mat subgrade.

The bottom of the excavation for the mat should be cleaned of any loose or soft soil, or debris. Our representative should observe the excavation to confirm that it exposes still native soil and to evaluate whether scarification and compaction of the subgrade is needed. If firm/loose soils are encountered across the mat excavation, further excavation likely will be required.

We understand that the basement portion of the restroom will have a finished floor elevation shallower than 3 feet below the existing grade. If a deeper basement is planned, the basement may be subject to buoyancy uplift pressure, and we should be contacted to provide updated recommendations.

Basement Water Proofing
We have not provided recommendations regarding the method or details for below grade slab and retaining wall water-proofing since design of water-proofing systems is outside of our scope of services and expertise. Installing adequate water-proofing below and behind the edges of the floor and behind the walls is essential for the success of the structure. Placing concrete with a low water cement ratio should be considered as one step of good water-proofing as discussed in the Slab-On-Grade section below. The water-proofing system below the basement mat slab may be placed directly on the compacted soil subgrade, a 4- to 6-inch section of crushed rock or virgin Class 2 aggregate base, or on a thin working slab, as determined by the water-proofing consultant.

Lateral Loads for Mat
Lateral loads may be resisted by friction between the damp proofing membrane below the mat and the supporting subgrade and by passive soil pressure acting against the sides of foundations elements and basement walls. The structural engineer should consult with the membrane manufacturer for the coefficient of friction to be assumed for design.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1764
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 10 of 21 Lateral resistance may also be provided by passive soil pressure acting against the sides of the mat foundation provided the mat is cast neat in a foundation excavation or shored excavation. We recommend assuming an equivalent fluid pressure of 350 pounds per cubic foot for passive soil resistance, where appropriate. The upper foot of passive soil resistance should be neglected where soil adjacent to the mat foundation will be landscaped or subject to softening from rainfall and/or surface water runoff, rather than covered with a concrete slab or pavement. The ultimate passive soil resistance acting on the mat foundation should be limited to 3,000 pounds per square foot. This passive pressure assumes lateral deflection at the top of the mat foundation on the order of ¼- to ½-inch.

Spread Footings
In our opinion, the proposed stage/pavilion structure, and at-grade portions of the restroom (if any), or other miscellaneous features such as the water fountain feature, may be supported continuous spread footings bearing on undisturbed stiff native soil.

Footings should have a width of at least 15 inches, and should extend at least 26 inches below exterior grade, at least 20 inches below the bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade, whichever is deeper.

Footings with at least these minimum dimensions may be designed for an allowable bearing pressure of 2,500 pounds per square foot for dead plus live loads with a one-third increase allowed when considering additional short-term wind or seismic loading. The weight of the footings may be neglected for design purposes.

All footings located adjacent to utility lines should be embedded below a 1:1 plane extending up from the bottom edge of the utility trench. We recommend that all continuous foundations be reinforced with sufficient top and bottom steel to provide structural continuity and to permit spanning of local irregularities. From a geotechnical viewpoint, continuous footing preferably should be reinforced with at least two No. 5 bars, top and bottom, or more as determined by the structural engineer.

A member of our staff should observe all footing excavations prior to placement of reinforcing steel to confirm that they expose suitable material, have at least the recommended minimum dimensions, and have been properly cleaned. If fill, soft, or loose soils are encountered in the foundation excavations, our field representative will require these materials to be removed and a deeper footing embedment depth before the reinforcing steel and concrete is placed.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1765
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 11 of 21 Lateral Loads for Footings
Lateral loads may be resisted by friction between the bottom of the footings and the supporting subgrade. A coefficient of friction of 0.35 may be assumed. In addition to friction, lateral resistance may be provided by passive soil pressure acting against the sides of foundations cast neat in footing excavations within the stiff/medium dense native soils. We recommend assuming an equivalent fluid pressure of 350 pounds per cubic foot for passive soil resistance, where appropriate. The upper foot of passive soil resistance should be neglected where soil adjacent to the footing is not covered with a slab or pavement.

Settlement for Mat/Footings
Thirty-year post-construction differential settlement due to static loads is not expected to exceed about 1-inch across the proposed stage/pavilion structure supported on new spread footing foundations and the restroom structure supported on a mat foundation, provided that the foundations are designed and constructed as recommended.

In addition, we estimate that differential dynamic settlement up to about ½-inch could occur across the proposed structures from liquefaction following major earthquake shaking and should be considered during the design.

RETAINING WALLS
Retaining walls should be designed to resist lateral pressures from adjacent native material, fill, and backfill. We recommend retaining walls with level backfill that are not free to deflect or rotate, such as building retaining walls, be designed to resist an equivalent fluid pressure of 45 pounds per cubic foot, plus an additional uniform lateral pressure of 8H pounds per square foot, where H is the height of the wall in feet.

Retaining walls with level backfill that are free to rotate, such as site retaining walls structurally separated from the residence, may be designed to resist an equivalent fluid pressure of 45 pounds per cubic foot.

If building retaining walls will be designed as undrained and subject to ground water pressure, they should be designed to resist an equivalent fluid pressure of 80 pounds per cubic foot plus an additional uniform lateral pressure of 8H pounds per square foot.

The basement walls should be properly water-proofed in areas where wall dampness and efflorescence would be undesirable.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1766
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 12 of 21 Walls with sloping backfill should be designed for an additional equivalent fluid pressure of 1 pound per cubic foot for every 1.25 degree of slope inclination. Where retaining walls will be subjected to surcharge loads, such as from adjacent foundations, vehicle loads, or construction, the walls should be designed for an additional uniform lateral pressure equal to one-half of the surcharge pressure.

Based on the site peak ground acceleration (PGA), on Sitar and Wagner (2015), seismic loads on retaining walls that can yield, such as site retaining walls, may be simulated by a line load of 10H2 (in pounds per foot, where H is the wall height in feet). Seismic loads on walls that cannot yield, such as building retaining walls, may be subjected to a seismic load as high as about 20H2. This seismic surcharge line load should be assumed to act at 1/3H above the base of the wall (in addition to the active wall design pressure of 45 or 80 pounds per cubic foot for drained or undrained conditions, respectively, with additional 1 pound per cubic foot for every 1.25 degree of slope inclination for sloping backfill).

If the retaining walls are designed for drained conditions, to prevent buildup of water pressure from surface water infiltration or water seepage, a subsurface drainage system could be installed behind the retaining wall to prevent buildup of water pressure from surface water infiltration. The drainage system should consist of a perforated pipe (perforations placed down) behind the wall. The perforated pipe should be embedded in a 12-inch-wide section of ½- to ¾-inch clean crushed rock. The crushed rock should be compacted with vibratory equipment in 12-inch-thick lifts. The free-draining crushed rock backfill should extend up to within 18 inches of finished grade. A filter fabric, such as TC Mirafi 140N, should be wrapped around the crushed rock to protect it from infiltration of the adjacent soil. The upper 18 inches of the wall backfill should consist of compacted on-site clayey soil. The perforated pipe should discharge to a suitable outlet point. Damp-proofing should be installed behind the back of the retaining wall if formation of efflorescence on the face of the wall would be undesirable.

Miradrain, Enkadrain or other drainage panels approved by our office may be used for wall drainage as an alternative to the crushed rock drainage system described above. If used, the drainage panels should extend from a depth of about 1 foot below the top of the wall backfill down to the drain pipe at the base of the wall. A minimum 12-inch-wide section of ½- to ¾-inch clean crushed rock surrounded by filter fabric should be placed around the drainpipe, as recommended previously.

Backfill behind the wall should be compacted to at least 88 to 93 percent relative compaction, using light compaction equipment. If heavy compaction equipment is used, the wall may need to be temporarily braced.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1767
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 13 of 21 The basement retaining walls may be supported on a mat foundation designed in accordance with the recommendations presented previously.

SLABS-ON-GRADE
General Slab Considerations
The near surface soils at the site have a moderate expansion potential. Expansive soils have a tendency to expand due to increases in moisture content and shrink as they dry.

This can result in some differential settlement, slab cracking and heave regardless of the geotechnical measures implemented. Our recommendations below will help reduce the impacts of the expansive soils beneath slabs-on-grade, but will not eliminate the risk entirely.

To reduce the potential for movement of the slab subgrade, at least the upper 6-inches of expansive soil should be scarified and compacted at a moisture content at least 2 to 3 percent above the laboratory optimum. The native soil subgrade should be kept moist up until the time the non-expansive fill, crushed rock and vapor barrier, and/or aggregate base is placed. Slab subgrades and non-expansive fill should be prepared and compacted as recommended in the section of this report titled “Earthwork.” Exterior flatwork and interior slabs-on-grade should be underlain by a layer of non-expansive fill as discussed below. The non-expansive fill should consist of aggregate base rock or a clayey soil with a plasticity index of 15 or less.

Considering the potential for expansive soil movements of the surface soils, we expect that a reinforced slab will perform better than an unreinforced slab. Consideration should also be given to using a control joint spacing on the order of 2 feet in each direction for each inch of slab thickness for exterior flatwork.

Subsurface Drainage
In our opinion, an optional subsurface drain system could be installed below the restroom/storage basement mat to reduce the possibility of water pressure developing below the mat and floor damp-proofing system. If installed, the perforated pipes for the basement drainage system should be installed at the bottom of the basement excavation.

The basement drainage system should include a minimum 4-to 6-inch-thick blanket of free-draining gravel, such as 1/2- or 3/4-inch crushed rock with no more than 5 percent passing the ASTM No. 200 sieve, below the basement mat.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1768
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 14 of 21 Prior to placing the gravel blanket, the subgrade below the gravel layer should be surface compacted and covered with a filter fabric, such as TC Mirafi 140N. The gravel drain should extend up and around the sides of the mat and basement walls.

Drain pipes around the basement walls should consist of 4-inch diameter perforated PVC pipes with perforations placed down installed at bottom of the wall excavation. The perforated pipes should discharge to a suitable sump and pump system or daylight to a landscaping area by gravity flow. To minimize vapor transmission through the basement mat, a high-quality water-proof membrane should be placed over the crushed rock and around the edges of the mat foundation. A conceptual schematic sketch of the basement drainage system is presented in Figure 5.

Exterior Flatwork
Concrete walkways and exterior flatwork for pedestrian traffic should be at least 4 inches thick and should be constructed on at least 8 inches of Class 2 aggregate base. We recommend that exterior slabs-on-grade be constructed with a thickened edge to improve edge stiffness and to reduce the potential for water seepage under the edge of the slabs. In our opinion, the thickened edges should be at least 8 inches wide and ideally should extend at least 4 inches below the bottom of the underlying aggregate base layer.

VEHICLE PAVEMENTS
Asphalt Concrete Pavement
We understand that portions of the existing pavements will be replaced as a future phase of the project. Based on the anticipated composition of the surface soils, and an estimated traffic index for the proposed pavement loading conditions, we developed the minimum pavement sections presented in Table 3 on the following page based on Procedure 630 of the Caltrans Highway Design Manual.

The Traffic Indices used in our pavement thickness calculations are considered reasonable values for this development and are based on engineering judgment rather than on detailed traffic projections. Asphalt concrete and aggregate base should conform to and be placed in accordance with the requirements of the Caltrans Standard Specifications, latest edition, except that compaction should be based on ASTM Test D1557.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1769
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 15 of 21 Table 3. Minimum Asphalt Concrete Pavement Sections
Harrington Park – Laurel Street Plaza
San Carlos, California
Traffic Design Asphalt Aggregate Total
Loading Traffic Concrete Base* Thickness
Condition Index (inches) (inches) (inches)
Automobile Access 4.5 3.0 8.0 11.0
Occasional Truck Traffic 5.0 3.0 10.0 13.0
Moderate Truck Traffic 6.0 4.0 12.0 16.0
Frequent Truck Traffic 7.0 4.0 16.0 20.0 _____________________________________________________________________________________________________ *Caltrans Class 2 Aggregate Base (minimum R-value = 78).

We recommend that measures be taken to limit the amount of surface water that seeps into the aggregate base and subgrade below vehicle pavements, particularly where the pavements are adjacent to landscape areas. Seepage of water into the pavement base material tends to soften the subgrade, increasing the amount of pavement maintenance that is required and shortening the pavement service life. Deepened curbs extending 4-inches below the bottom of the aggregate base layer are generally effective in limiting excessive water seepage. Other types of water cutoff devices or edge drains may also be considered to maintain pavement service life.

Concrete Pavers
We understand that pavers or paving stones may be used on portions of the site. We recommend that pavers for vehicle traffic have a thickness of at least 3 inches (or per manufacturer’s guidelines based on the expected traffic volume), have sufficient edge restraint, such as provided by a concrete curb, and be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and instructions.

In our opinion, the pavers should be underlain by a thin section of bedding sand over a section of Class 2 aggregate base; the thickness of the aggregate base may be determined using Table 3 above based on the anticipated traffic volume. If it is desired to increase the service life of the paving stones and decrease the potential for differential movements, the subgrade below the aggregate base layer may be reinforced with a woven stabilization fabric, such as TC Mirafi 500X, or a geogrid, such as Tensar BX1100. Geogrids have a higher tensile strength and usually provide greater subgrade reinforcement promoting longer pavement service life than do geotextiles.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1770
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 16 of 21 If paving stones will be used in areas that will be driven on by trash collection vehicles, consideration should be given to supporting the paving stones on a concrete pavement section to reduce the possibility of irregular movement and distress to the paving stone surfacing.

Pervious Pavements
We understand that pervious pavements will be installed across a portion of the site. The pervious pavements could consist of paving stones, grass-crete, pervious asphalt/concrete, or other types of pervious surfacing materials. Because the native clayey soils underlying the site are expected to have a very low rate of infiltration, a permeable layer of Class 2 Permeable or clean crushed gravel encapsulated in filter fabric may need to be installed below the pervious surfacing to provide temporary storage of surface water runoff. The minimum required thickness of the aggregate base layer below the pervious pavement will depend on the required water storage capacity and the type and intensity of traffic loading on the pavement surface. As discussed above, the minimum thickness of the aggregate base layer may be determined using Table 3 above based on the anticipated traffic volume. Stabilization fabric and/or geogrid could be installed below the base layer to increase pavement service life. We can consult with the design team to review and evaluate the requirements and the preferred options for pervious pavements.

Rigid Concrete Pavements
The minimum thickness of the concrete pavements at the site should be based on the anticipated traffic loading, the modulus of rupture of the concrete used for pavement construction, and the composition and supporting characteristics of the subgrade below the pavement section. If rigid concrete pavement is planned for the proposed parking lot and driveway, the pavement section may be designed and constructed in accordance with American Concrete Institute (ACI) 330R-08 – Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots.

Based on the variable clayey soils we encountered at the project site, a low subgradesubbase support strength value of 100 pci was assumed in our analysis. In addition, our design assumes that pavements are restrained laterally by a concrete shoulder or curb, and we understand that the concrete pavement will be reinforced with sufficient steel reinforcement. If the pavement will not have sufficient steel reinforcement, the concrete should have a compressive strength, f ’c, of at least 4,500 psi and a flexural strength, MR, of at least 600 psi. In addition, maximum spacing should be provided between contraction joints in both directions. Our recommendations for minimum rigid pavement sections and maximum spacing between joints are presented in Table 4.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1771
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 17 of 21 Table 4. Rigid Concrete Pavement Design
Harrington Park – Laurel Street Plaza
San Carlos, California
Traffic
Categories
Maximum
ADTT*
Concrete
Thickness
(inches)
Aggregate
Base
(inches)
Total
Section
(inches)
Maximum
Spacing between
Joints (feet)
Car Parking and
Access Lanes 1 5.0 8.0 13.0 12.5
Truck Parking
and Access
25 6.0 10.0 16.0 15.0
*ADTT = Average daily truck traffic in both directions (excludes panel trucks, pickup trucks, and other four-wheel vehicles)

EARTHWORK
Clearing and Subgrade Preparation
All deleterious materials, such as existing slabs, soft surface soils, pavements, utility lines, vegetation, roots, topsoil, existing fill, etc., should be cleared from areas of the site to be built on or paved. The actual stripping depth should be determined by a member of our staff in the field at the time of construction. Excavations that extend below finished grade should be backfilled with structural fill that is water-conditioned, placed, and compacted as recommended in the section of this report titled “Compaction.” After the site has been properly cleared and stripped, and excavations to proposed grade have been made, exposed soil surfaces in areas to receive structural fill, foundations, slabs-on-grade, and pavements should be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, moisture conditioned, and compacted as recommended for structural fill in the section of this report titled "Compaction."
On-site soils, foundation and trench excavations, and slab and pavement subgrades should be kept in a moist condition throughout the construction period to help reduce the potential effects of the expansive on-site soils on the proposed improvements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1772
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 18 of 21 Percolation Rates
The upper 10 feet of soils at the site were classified as primarily moderately expansive clayey soils that have low permeability. Based on the consistency and plasticity of the surface and near-surface soils, the rate of surface water infiltration in the upper 10 feet of the soil at the site is estimated to be no greater than about 0.05 inches per hour. A site specific infiltration rate could be developed by performing an onsite field infiltration test at the planned infiltration areas by an experienced civil engineer or contractor providing this service. Overflow drains may need to be provided for infiltration basins that direct water to an appropriate outlet as required by the civil engineer.

Compaction
Scarified surface soils and all structural fill should be compacted in uniform lifts no thicker than 8-inches in uncompacted thickness, conditioned to the appropriate moisture content, and compacted as recommended for structural fill in Table 5 below. The relative compaction and moisture content recommended in Table 5 is relative to ASTM Test D1557, latest edition.

Table 5. Compaction Recommendations
Harrington Park – Laurel Street Plaza
San Carlos, California
General Relative Compaction* Moisture Content*
• Scarified subgrade in areas 88-93 percent 2 to 3 percent to receive structural fill. above optimum
• Structural fill composed 88-93 percent 2 to 3 percent of native soil. above optimum
• Structural fill composed 90 percent Above optimum
of non-expansive fill.
• Fills below a depth 92 percent 2 to 3 percent
of 4 feet. above optimum
Pavement Areas
• Upper 6-inches of soil 88-93 percent 2 to 3 percent
below baserock. above optimum
• Aggregate baserock. 95 percent Near optimum
Utility Trench Backfill
• On-site soil. 88-93 percent 2 to 3 percent
above optimum
• Imported sand 95 percent Near optimum
* Relative to ASTM Test D1557, latest edition.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1773
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 19 of 21 At the start of site grading and earthwork construction, and prior to subgrade preparation and placement of non-expansive fill, representative samples of on-site soil and import material will need to be collected in order for a laboratory compaction test to be performed for use during on-site density testing. Sampling of on-site soil and proposed import material should be requested by the contractor at least 5 days prior to when our staff will be needed for density testing to allow time for soil sampling and laboratory testing to be performed prior to our on-site compaction testing.

Material For Fill
All on-site soil containing less than 3 percent organic material by weight (ASTM D2974) may be suitable for use as structural fill (but not for non-expansive fill). Structural fill should not contain rocks or pieces larger than 6 inches in greatest dimension and no more than 15 percent larger than 2.5 inches. Imported non-expansive fill should have a Plasticity Index no greater than 15, should be predominately granular, and should have sufficient binder so as not to slough or cave into foundation excavations and utility trenches. Recycled aggregate base should not be used for non-expansive fill at building interior. A member of our staff should approve proposed import materials prior to their delivery to the site.

Temporary Slopes and Excavations
The contractor should be responsible for the design and construction of all temporary slopes and any required shoring or dewatering. Shoring and bracing should be provided in accordance with all applicable local, state, and federal safety regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards.

Due to the potential for variation of the on-site soil, field modification of temporary cut slopes may be required. Unstable materials encountered on excavations and slopes during and after excavation should be trimmed off even if this requires cutting the slopes back to a flatter inclination. Slopes located below the ground water level may require flatter inclinations.

Please note that our scope of work and site visits do not (and will not) include reviewing the adequacy of the contractor’s safety measures or the stability of temporary cuts, and the contractor should be solely and completely responsible for the safety of people and properties at and near the excavations. Support of the existing adjacent structures and improvements without distress should also be the contractor's responsibility. In our experience, a preconstruction survey is generally performed to document existing conditions prior to construction, with intermittent monitoring of the structures during construction.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1774
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 20 of 21 Finished Slopes
We recommend that any new finished slopes be cut or filled to an inclination no steeper than 2.5:1 (horizontal:vertical). Exposed slopes may be subject to minor sloughing and erosion that would require periodic maintenance. We recommend that all slopes and soil surfaces disturbed during construction be planted to with erosion resistant vegetation.

Surface Drainage
Finished grades should be designed to prevent ponding and to drain surface water away from foundations and edges slabs and pavements, and toward suitable collection and discharge facilities. Slopes of at least 2 percent are recommended for flatwork and pavement areas with 5 percent preferred in landscape areas within 10 feet of the structures, where possible. Preferably, downspout drainage should be collected in a closed pipe system that is routed to the City’s storm drain system or other suitable discharge outlet.

Drainage facilities should be observed to verify that they are adequate and that no adjustments need to be made, especially during the first two years following construction.

We recommend preparing an as-built plan showing the locations of surface and subsurface drain lines and clean-outs. The drainage facilities should be periodically checked to verify that they are continuing to function properly. It is likely the drainage facilities will need to be periodically cleaned of silt and debris that may build up in the lines.

FUTURE SERVICES
Plan Review
Romig Engineers should review the completed grading and foundation plans for conformance with the recommendations contained in this report. We should be provided with these plans as soon as possible upon completion in order to limit the potential for delays in the permitting process that might otherwise be attributed to our review process.

In addition, it should be noted that many of the local building and planning departments now require “clean” geotechnical plan review letters prior to acceptance of plans for their final review. Since our plan reviews typically result in recommendations for modification of the plans, our generation of a “clean” review letter often requires two iterations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1775
CSWST2 Harrington Park - Laurel Street Plaza Page 21 of 21 At a minimum, we recommend the following note be added to the plans:
“Earthwork, foundation construction, basement and subgrade preparation, basement wall drainage and backfilling, slab and pavement subgrade and non-expansive fill preparation, utility trench backfill, and site drainage should be performed in accordance with the geotechnical report prepared by Romig Engineers, Inc., dated August 5, 2025. Romig Engineers should be notified at least 48 hours in advance of any earthwork and should observe and test during earthwork and foundation construction as recommended in the geotechnical report. Romig Engineers should be notified at least 5 days prior to earthwork, trench backfill, and subgrade preparation work to allow time for sampling of on-site soil and laboratory compaction curve testing to be performed prior to on-site compaction density testing.”
Construction Observation and Testing
The earthwork and foundation phases of construction should be observed and tested by us to 1) establish that subsurface conditions are compatible with those used in the analysis and design; 2) observe compliance with the design concepts, specifications and recommendations; and 3) allow design changes in the event that subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated. The recommendations in this report are based on a limited amount of subsurface exploration. The nature and extent of variation across the site may not become evident until construction. If variations are exposed during construction, it will be necessary to reevaluate our recommendations.
    

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1776

REFERENCES
Aagaard, B.T., Blair, J.L., Boatwright, J., Garcia, S.H., Harris, R.A., Michael, A.J., Schwartz, D.P., and DiLeo, J.S., 2016, Earthquake outlook for the San Francisco Bay region 2014–2043 (ver. 1.1, August 2016): U.S. Geological Survey Fact Sheet 2016–3020, 6 p., http://dx.doi.org/10.3133/fs20163020.

American Society of Civil Engineers, 2016, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, ASCE Standard 7-16.

California Building Standards Commission, and International Code Council, 2022 California Building Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.

California Geological Survey, 2018, Seismic Hazard Zone Report for the San Mateo 7.5- Minute Quadrangle, Santa Clara, Alameda, and San Mateo Counties, California, Seismic Hazard Zone Report 111.

California Geological Survey, 2018, Seismic Hazard Zones Map of the San Mateo Quadrangle.

California Geological Survey, 2011, Probabilistic Seismic Hazards Mapping Ground Motion Page, http://redirect.conservation.ca.gov/cgs/rghm/pshamap/pshamap.asp/ Harlan Tait Associates, 1996, Geologic Map, City of San Carlos, California, Project. No. 2008.640, February 22, 1995, Scale 1:6,000.

Idriss, I.M., and Boulanger, R.W., 2008, Soil Liquefaction During Earthquakes, Earthquake Engineering Research Institute (EERI), Oakland, California.

SEAOC/OSHPD, 2025, Seismic Design Maps, http://seismicmaps.org/ Sitar, N, and Wagner, N., 2015, On Seismic Response of Stiff and Flexible Retaining Structures, 6th International Conference on Earthquake Geotechnical Engineering, 1-4 November 2015, Christchurch, New Zealand.
    

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1777
Insert map here and add line around picture - size 1 in black Scale: 1 inch = 2000 feet
Base is United States Geological Survey San Mateo and Woodside 7.5 Minute Quadrangles, dated 1997.

VICINITY MAP FIGURE 1
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
SITE

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1778
LEGEND
EB-2 Approximate Locations of Exploratory Borings.

Approximate Scale: 1 inch = 60 feet.

Base is site plan prepared by Ware Associates Inc, dated May 21, 2025.

SITE PLAN FIGURE 2
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
EB-2

LAUREL STREET
Harrington Park
Restroom & Storage
Buildling
EB-1
Open-Air
Stage/Pavilion

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1779
Insert map here and add line around picture - size 1 in black Geological contact; approximately located;
queried where uncertain; dotted where
concealed.

Qof 19' Generalized stratigraphic profile inferred
Kjf from subsurface data show geologic units
and thickness.

Scale: 1 inch = 2000 feet
Base is Geologic Map, City of San Carlos, (Harlan Tait Associates, 1996).

VICINITY GEOLOGIC MAP FIGURE 3
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
Existing fill
Colluvial deposits
Coarse-grained younger alluvial fan deposits
Coarse grained older fan deposit
Franciscan Complex
Qf
QC
Qyf
Qof
KJf
SITE

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1780
Insert map here and add line around picture - size 1 in black Earthquakes with M5+ from 1900 to 1980, M2.5+ from 1980 to January 2015. Faults with activity in last 15,000 years.

Based on data sources from Northern California Earthquake Data Center and USGS Quaternary Fault and Fold Database, accessed May 2015.

REGIONAL FAULT AND SEISMICITY MAP FIGURE 4
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
SITE
Magnitude Year
0 3 6 12 miles

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1781
SUBSLAB DRAINAGE DETAIL FIGURE 5
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
Water Proofing Membrane as Determined
by Water Proofing Consultant
Filter Fabric
18" - 24" Clayey Soil Cap
1/2" - 3/4" Clean
Crushed Rock
8" Minimum
About 30 Feet Typical
4" Perforated Pipe, sloped
@ 1% to Sump Pump
Basement Slab/Mat
12" Minimum
4" Minimum
Filter Fabric
Basement Retaining Wall
8" Minimum

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1782

APPENDIX A

FIELD INVESTIGATION
The soils encountered during hand-sampling were logged by our representative and the sample was obtained at a depth appropriate to the investigation. The samples were taken to our laboratory where they were evaluated and classified in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System. The log of our borings, as well as a summary of the soil classification system (Figure A-1), are attached.

The locations of the borings were established by pacing using the site plan, prepared by Ware Associates, Inc., dated May 21, 2025. The locations of the borings should be considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used.

The boring logs and related information depict our interpretation of subsurface conditions only at the specific location and time indicated. Subsurface conditions and ground water levels at other locations may differ from conditions at the locations where sampling was conducted. The passage of time may also result in changes in the subsurface conditions.     

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1783

USCS SOIL CLASSIFICATION
SOIL
TYPE
CLEAN GRAVEL GW Well graded gravel, gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines.

COARSE GRAVEL (< 5% Fines) GP Poorly graded gravel or gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines.

GRAINED GRAVEL with GM Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixtures, non-plastic fines.

SOILS FINES GC Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures, plastic fines. (< 50 % Fines) CLEAN SAND SW Well graded sands, gravelly sands, little or no fines.

SAND (< 5% Fines) SP Poorly graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines.

SAND SM Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures, non-plastic fines.

WITH FINES SC Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures, plastic fines.

ML Inorganic silts and very fine sands, with slight plasticity.

FINE SILT AND CLAY CL Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, lean clays.

GRAINED Liquid limit < 50% OL Organic silts and organic clays of low plasticity.

SOILS MH Inorganic silt, micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandy or silty soil. (> 50 % Fines) SILT AND CLAY CH Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays.

Liquid limit > 50% OH Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts.

HIGHLY ORGANIC SOILS Pt Peat and other highly organic soils.

BEDROCK BR Weathered bedrock.

RELATIVE DENSITY CONSISTENCY
SAND & GRAVEL BLOWS/FOOT* SILT & CLAY STRENGTH^ BLOWS/FOOT* VERY LOOSE 0 to 4 VERY SOFT 0 to 0.25 0 to 2
LOOSE 4 to 10 SOFT 0.25 to 0.5 2 to 4
MEDIUM DENSE 10 to 30 FIRM 0.5 to 1 4 to 8
DENSE 30 to 50 STIFF 1 to 2 8 to 16
VERY DENSE OVER 50 VERY STIFF 2 to 4 16 to 32
HARD OVER 4 OVER 32

GRAIN SIZES

BOULDERS COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT & CLAY

COARSE FINE COARSE MEDIUM FINE
12 " 3" 0.75" 4 10 40 200
SIEVE OPENINGS U.S. STANDARD SERIES SIEVE
Classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System; fines refer to soil passing a No. 200 sieve. * Standard Penetration Test (SPT) resistance, using a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches on a 2 inch O.D. split spoon sampler; blow counts not corrected for larger diameter samplers. ^ Unconfined Compressive strength in tons/sq. ft. as estimated by SPT resistance, field and laboratory tests, and/or visual observation.

KEY TO SAMPLERS
z Modified California Sampler (3-inch O.D.)
y Mid-size Sampler (2.5-inch O.D.)
x Standard Penetration Test Sampler (2-inch O.D.)
KEY TO EXPLORATORY BORING LOGS FIGURE A-1
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1

PRIMARY DIVISIONS SECONDARY DIVISIONS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1784
DRILL TYPE: Minuteman with 3-1/4" Continuous Flight Auger LOGGED BY: AV DEPTH TO GROUND WATER: 9 feet SURFACE ELEVATION: NA DATE DRILLED: 6/26/25

CLASSIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION

SOIL CONSISTENCY/
DENSITY or ROCK

HARDNESS
Q (Figure A-2)

SOIL TYPE

SOIL SYMBOL

DEPTH (FEET)

SAMPLE INTERVAL
PEN. RESISTANCE (Blows/ft)
WATER CONTENT (%)
SHEAR STRENGTH (TSF)*
UNCONFIN. COMP. (TSF)*
AC 0
CL 13
medium grained sand, trace fine to coarse sub-angular gravel, z moderate plasticity, trace roots. z
z 32 13 3.3
z
z
5 z
z 39 9 4.5
z
y
y
y 23 13 3.3
y
y
t
y 31 15 2.5
10 y
y
y
y 60 15 2.5
y
x
x
x 15 15 1.3
x
SC x
15 x
x 36 12
x
transition may be gradual.
20 *Measured using Torvane and Pocket Penetrometer devices.

EXPLORATORY BORING LOG EB-1 BORING EB-1
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
Dense
Very
Stiff
Hard
to
10 inches of aspahlt concrete over 6 inches aggregate base.

Dark brown, Sandy Lean Clay, moist to very moist, fine to Increase in sand content.
t Ground water measured at 9 feet after drilling.

Brown, Clayey Sand, very moist to wet, fine to coarse grained Note: The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil and rock types, the actual
Bottom of Boring at 16 feet.
sand, fine to coarse sub-angular to sub-rounded gravel, low plasticity fines.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1785
DRILL TYPE: Minuteman with 3-1/4" Continuous Flight Auger LOGGED BY: AV DEPTH TO GROUND WATER: 10 feet SURFACE ELEVATION: NA DATE DRILLED: 6/26/25

CLASSIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION

SOIL CONSISTENCY/
DENSITY or ROCK

HARDNESS
Q (Figure A-2)

SOIL TYPE

SOIL SYMBOL

DEPTH (FEET)

SAMPLE INTERVAL
PEN. RESISTANCE (Blows/ft)
WATER CONTENT (%)
SHEAR STRENGTH (TSF)*
UNCONFIN. COMP. (TSF)*
CL 0 z
z
z 15 13
z
z
z
n 34 13 >4.5
z
z
5 z
z 29 13 >4.5
z
y
y
y 32 16 3.0
y
y
y
y 24 10 1.8
10 t
y
y
y 61 17
y
SC/ x
CL x
x 32 12
x
x
15 x 14
x 32
x 15
x
x
l 19 17
x 15
x
x 18
x 66
20 x 12
EXPLORATORY BORING LOG EB-2 BORING EB-2
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1
Bottom of Boring at 20 feet.
l 21% Passing No. 200 Sieve.

Hard
Dense/
Stiff
to
sub-angular to sub-rounded gravel, low plasticity. to
Brown, interbedded Clayey Sand/Sandy Lean Clay, very Medium moist to wet, fine to coarse grained sand, fine to coarse Dense t Ground water encountered during drilling at 10 feet.
n Liquid Limit = 35, Plasticity Index = 19.

Brown, Sandy Lean Clay, moist to very moist, fine to medium Stiff grained sand, moderate plasticity, trace roots. to
Hard

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1786

APPENDIX B

LABORATORY TESTS
The sample from our subsurface exploration was selected for tests to establish the physical and engineering properties of the soils. The test performed is briefly described below.

The natural moisture content was determined in accordance with ASTM D2216 on nearly all of the soil samples recovered from the borings. This test determines the moisture content, representative of field conditions at the time the samples were collected. The results are presented on the boring logs at the appropriate sample depths.

The Atterberg Limits were determined on one sample of soil in accordance with ASTM D4318. The Atterberg limits are the moisture content within which the soil is workable or plastic. The results of this test are presented in Figure B-1 and on the boring log EB-2 at the appropriate sample depth.

The amount of silt and clay-sized material present was determined on one sample of soil in accordance with ASTM D422. The results are presented on the log of Boring EB-2 at the appropriate sample depth.
    

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1787
Passing USCS
Chart Boring Sample Water Liquid Plasticity Liquidity No. 200 Soil Symbol Number Depth Content Limit Index Index Sieve Classification (feet) (percent) (percent) (percent) (percent) (percent) EB-2 2-4 13 35 19 -16 CL
PLASTICITY CHART FIGURE B-1
HARRINGTON PARK - LAUREL STREET PLAZA AUGUST 2025
SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA PROJECT NO. 6962-1

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1788
ROMIG ENGINEERS, INC.
1390 El Camino Real, 2
nd Floor
San Carlos, California 94070
Phone: (650) 591-5224
www.romigengineers.com

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1789
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

APPENDIX
B. C AND D INFORMATION HANDOUT

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1790
Construction,
Deconstruction,
and Demolition
Information
A Guide for Contractors and Home Owners
reuse • recycling • hazardous waste • disposal
MARCH 2017
Consider Deconstruction over Demolition! See page 4.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1791
WHAT DOES C&D STAND FOR?
Construction and Demolition.

WHY IS IT IMPORTANT THAT CONSTRUCTION WASTE BE RECYCLED? A lot of natural resources can be saved by recycling C&D waste, which makes up 29% of the trash going into the landfi ll.

DO ALL THE CITIES HAVE THE SAME RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS? No. All cities require a minimum of California Green Building Standards Code (CALGreen) detailed below. A local ordinance may have more stringent requirements and may have different penalties. Refer to the chart on pages 2-3 for details on a specifi c city.

WHAT ARE THE CALGreen REQUIREMENTS?
CALGreen Required Projects:
• Renovations, remodels or additions to an existing structure that increases the building’s conditioned area, volume, or size
• The construction of a new permitted structure
CALGreen Recycling Requirements:
• Recycle and/or salvage for reuse a minimum of 65% of the nonhazardous C&D debris For more information or other specifi c requirements visit www.bsc.ca.gov/Home/CALGreen.

WHY AM I ASKED WHAT CITY MY WASTE CAME FROM?
The State requires each city and unincorporated county to reduce waste through recycling, composting or other diversion activities. Landfi ll and transfer station gatekeepers ask where the waste is coming from to gather information to report to the cities or county.

WHAT ARE INERT MATERIALS?
Inert solids or aggregates include asphalt, brick, concrete, dirt, fi nes, rock, sand, soil and stone.

WHAT IS A MIXED C&D RECYCLING FACILITY?
At a mixed C&D recycling facility, different recyclables are sorted from a load of mixed debris. A load of mixed C&D generally includes drywall, metal, untreated wood, yard trimmings and small amounts of inert materials. Large amounts of inerts should go into “rock boxes.” WHAT DOES OX MOUNTAIN LANDFILL ACCEPT FOR RECYCLING?
Ox Mountain Landfi ll accepts loads of certain materials for reuse on site. These materials are: asphalt, bricks, concrete, dirt, fi nes, rock, sand, soil, stone, untreated wood and yard waste. Loads with untreated wood and/ or green waste mixed with inerts (asphalt, brick, concrete, dirt, fi nes, rock, sand, soil and stone) will not be sorted and therefore not recycled. However a load with mixed inerts only (asphalt, brick, concrete, dirt, fi nes, rock, sand, soil and stone) or mixed green waste only (untreated wood and yard trimmings) will be accepted for Alternative Daily Landfi ll Cover.

HOW DO I MAKE SURE MY RECEIPTS SHOW THAT I RECYCLED MATERIALS? First, you must make sure that you are taking your load to a facility that can recycle the materials you have.

When you are at the gate of any facility, be sure to tell them that you would like to recycle the material and the name of the city or unincorporated county location it is from. You will need a receipt that refl ects this information. The receipt will indicate that the material was either recycled or disposed.

WHAT IF A DEBRIS BOX COMPANY HANDLES ALL MY WASTE?
To meet local recycling requirements, you will need to request that the debris box company take your waste to an approved recycling facility and provide you with appropriate receipts from those facilities.

WHAT DO I DO ABOUT THE WASTE GENERATED BY MY SUBCONTRACTORS? The general contractor or applicant is responsible for ensuring that the recycling requirements are met for all waste generated on site, including waste generated by the subcontractors.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS REQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1792

UNDERSTAND CITY C&D RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS
Most cities in San Mateo County have a recycling ordinance that requires contractors to recycle most waste generated on the job. Some cities may limit building contractors to a few approved recycling facilities and debris box companies. According to the CALGreen State Code, where a local jurisdiction does not have a construction and demolition waste management ordinance, a construction waste management plan shall be submitted for approval to the enforcing agency.

See pages 2-3 to view San Mateo County and city requirements.

DECONSTRUCTION, SALVAGE & REUSE
Many items such as wood fl oors, doors, windows, electrical equipment, and bathroom fi xtures can be salvaged from a building before it is demolished. You can take these usable materials to a salvage yard, where they will be resold to local builders. See page 4 to determine if salvage is appropriate at your site.

IDENTIFY HAULING OPTIONS
You may either haul your own recyclable materials or hire a debris box company and request that the material be recycled. Note that in some cities you may be required to use a certain debris box company. See page 2-3 to view city requirements and page 5 for a list of debris box companies.

RECYCLING
Waste generated at a construction site can be recycled in two ways. One option is to separate recyclables by material, such as cardboard, metal, clean wood, etc. into individual bins.

Separating recyclables allows you to take advantage of lower dumping fees. The second option is to put recyclable materials into one bin and take it to a recycling facility that specializes in sorting materials. See pages 6-7 for a list of C&D recycling facilities in the Bay Area.

HAZARDOUS AND UNIVERSAL WASTE
Many types of hazardous and universal waste are found at construction and demolition sites.

These materials must be identifi ed and handled correctly prior to demolition and during construction. See pages 8-9 to fi nd a list of potential wastes and where to take them.

DISPOSAL
Any waste that cannot be reused or recycled is disposed. See page 10 for disposal locations.

RECYCLING HOTLINES FOR ALL BAY AREA COUNTIES
This guide is brought to you by the County of San Mateo Offi ce of Sustainability, which offers recycling and reuse information to the residents and businesses of the County. See page 8 for recycling hotlines in other Bay Area counties.
2-3
4 5
6-7
8-9
10 10

INTRODUCTION & CONTEN ION & CONTENTS
1 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1793

CITY

DEPOSIT REQUIRED
CALGREEN REQUIRED PROJECTS:
• The renovation, remodel or addition
to an existing structure that
increases the building’s conditioned
area, volume, or size
• The construction of a new permitted
structure
See below for additional required projects

CALGREEN RECYCLING
REQUIREMENTS:
• Salvage or recycle 65%
A = Alterations or Addition
C = New Construction
D = Demolition
R = Roofi ng
See below for additional recycling
requirements

DEBRIS BOX

REGULATIONS
See below for cities
with exclusive
contracts with specifi c
debris box companies.

NAME OF FORM
Contractors must fi ll out
a form detailing their
recycling plan. Upon
completion of the project,
copies of recycling and
disposal receipts must be
submitted.

ATHERTON
650-752-0560 yes Any project over $50,000 or generating more than 10 tons of debris • Must allow 10 working days for
salvage prior to demolition
• A, C or D: recycle 75% of total
waste
• Shingle/shake roofi ng: recycle
75% of total waste
Open to all haulers Construction, Demolition,
Recycling Calculator

BELMONT
650-595-7450 no** Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards
Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards Open to all haulers
Construction and
Demolition Recycling and
Waste Reduction Plan

BRISBANE
415-508-2120 yes
Demolition over 200 ft2
, remodel or new
construction over 1,000 ft2 or $75,000,
and re-roofi ng over 500 ft2
• Must allow 5 working days for
salvage prior to demolition.
• D: recycle 100% of inert solids*,
recycle or salvage 65% of other
construction debris
• R: recycle 65% of total waste
South San Francisco
Scavenger Company
Construction and
Demolition Recycling and
Waste Reduction Plan

BURLINGAME
650-558-7260 yes All permitted projects with a valuation greater than $50,000 • Inert solids can’t be counted for
more than 25% of the diversion
• Alternative daily cover is not
counted as recycled material
Open to all haulers
Construction and
Demolition Recycling and
Waste Reduction Form
COLMA
650-757-8888 yes All demolition, remodel, or construction projects • Must salvage if possible
• R: recycle 65% of total waste
Republic Services
of Daly City
Construction and
Demolition Recycling
Forms

DALY CITY
650-991-8061 yes
All complete demolitions, all
alterations over $15,000, all new
construction over $25,000, all roofi ng
tear-offs over 100 ft 2
• R: recycle 65% of total waste
• All projects over $30,000 must
submit Waste Management Plan
Republic Services
of Daly City Waste Management Plan

EAST PALO ALTO
650-853-3129 yes All demolition, new single-family, multifamily and commercial Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards Open to all haulers Waste Management Plan

FOSTER CITY
650-286-3227 yes
All demolition and new construction
projects, specifi ed residential and
commercial alterations, roofi ng projects
• Reuse and salvage to the greatest
extent feasible
• A, C, D or R: recycle a minimum of
50% of total waste
Open to all haulers Waste Management Plan

HALF MOON BAY
650-726-8284 no** Projects over $5,000 Specifi cations according to CALGreen Building Standards Open to all haulers Waste Management Plan

HILLSBOROUGH
650-375-7436 no** All demolition, alteration, and new
construction projects
• If hauling mixed debris, must use
approved mixed processing facility
• ADC is not counted as recycled
material
Must use a hauler
from the approved list.

Recycling and Waste
Reduction Plan
Compliance Report

UNDERSTANDING C&D RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS
2 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1794
CITY

CALGREEN RECYCLING
REQUIREMENTS:
• Salvage or recycle 65%
A = Alterations or Addition
C = New Construction
D = Demolition
R = Roofi ng
See below for additional recycling
requirements

DEBRIS BOX

REGULATIONS
See below for cities
with exclusive
contracts with specifi c
debris box companies.

NAME

OF FORM
Contractors must fi ll out
a form detailing their
recycling plan. Upon
completion of the project,
copies of recycling and
disposal receipts must be
submitted.

MENLO PARK
650-330-6704 yes Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards
• Must allow 7 working days for
salvage prior to demolition
• Alternative daily cover is not
counted as recycled material
Open to all haulers
Construction and
Demolition Recycling
Deposit Refund Request
Form

MILLBRAE
650-259-2444 yes Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards
Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards
South San Francisco
Scavenger Company
Construction and
Demolition Waste
Management Plan

PACIFICA
650-738-7344 no Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards
Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards Recology of the Coast Waste Management Plan

PORTOLA VALLEY
650-851-1700 x 211 yes
Any permitted construction, demolition
or re-roofi ng projects; Non-res additions/
alterations larger than 1,000 ft2
or
greater than $200,000
• Must allow 5 working days for
salvage prior to demolition
• A, C, D or R: recycle 75% of total
waste
Open to all haulers Waste Management Plan

REDWOOD CITY
650-780-7350 yes
All demolitions, new construction, all tear
off roofi ng permits and any construction
valuation of $50,000 or greater
• A, C or D: recycle 100% of inert
solids*, recycle or salvage 65% of
total waste
Open to all haulers Waste Management Plan

SAN BRUNO
650-616-7074 yes Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards
Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards Recology San Bruno
Construction and
Demolition Waste
Reduction Form

SAN CARLOS
650-802-4261 yes Any project over $50,000 or generating more than 5 tons of debris
Specifi cations according to
CALGreen Building Standards Open to all haulers
Construction and
Demolition Waste
Management Plan
Agreement

SAN MATEO
650-522-7346 yes Any demolition, construction, or remodel over $50,000 • Salvage as much as possible Open to all haulers Construction and
Demolition Recycling and
Waste Reduction Plan

SOUTH SAN

FRANCISCO
650-829-6670
yes
Demolition over $500, construction or
remodel over $50,000, or size equal or
greater than 2000 ft2
, roofi ng projects
over 100 ft2
.
• A, C or D: recycle 100% of inert
solids*, minimum of 65% of all
non-inert solids
South San Francisco
Scavenger Company
Construction and
Demolition Waste
Management Plan

WOODSIDE
650-851-6796 yes Any project over$10,000 or generating
more than 10 tons of debris
• Must allow 5 working days for
salvage prior to demolition
• D: recycle 65% of total waste,
at least 15% must be non-inert
material*
Open to all haulers Waste Management Plan

UNINCORPORATED

SAN MATEO
COUNTY
888-442-2666
no** All demolition projects
• A, C or D: Recycle or salvage 65%
of total waste and recycle all inert
solids*
Open to all haulers
except El Granada,
Miramar, Montara,
Moss Beach, Pillar
Point and Princeton
must use Recology of
the Coast.

Waste Management Plan
* Inert solids include asphalt, brick, concrete, dirt, fi nes, rock, sand, soil and stone. ** Fines or penalties may apply for non-compliance.
3 UNDERSTANDING C&D RECYCLING REQUIREMENTS 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1795

DECONSTRUCTION

APPRAISER

GREEN EARTH APPRAISALS
525 Broadway
Millbrae, CA 94030
650-455-6683
http://greenearthappraisals.com
Full service building material
appraisal and consulting fi rm.

DECONSTRUCTION

SERVICES

GREENWORX/THOR
2240 Revere Avenue
San Francisco, CA 94124
888-714-7444
www.greenworxusa.com

MARCAN ENTERPRISE
1155 Broadway Street # 105
Redwood City, CA 94063
650-366-3066
www.marcanenterprise.com

REBUILD GREEN
2625 Middlefi eld Road # 106
Palo Alto CA, 94306
650-720-1301
www.rebuildgreen.net
SCOTT’S DEMOLITION
San Mateo
650-593-7799
www.abetterearthsite.net

TNT DEMOLITION
161 Glenn Way
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-341-9423
www.tntdemo.com

PENINSULA HAULING AND

DEMOLITION
839 Cherry Lane
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-596-8105
www.peninsulahauling.com

DECONSTRUCTION

SERVICES AND

SALVAGE YARDS

FIREWOOD FARMS
551 San Mateo Road (HWY 92)
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
650-726-3266
www.fi rewoodfarms.com
Deconstructs old barns and sells
fl ooring and other salvaged
wood products.

PLACEMAKERS, INC.
1062 Center Street
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-273-7530
www.placemakersinc.com
Accepts and sells salvaged
materials. Provides
deconstruction service.

REUSABLE LUMBER

COMPANY
La Honda
650-529-9122
www.reusablelumber.com
Will deconstruct homes for
usable wood or pick up wood
from construction sites.

THE REUSE PEOPLE
9235 San Leandro Street
Oakland, CA 94603
888-588-9490
www.thereusepeople.org
Accepts and sells a wide variety
of salvaged building materials.

Provides deconstruction services.

WHOLE HOUSE BUILDING

SUPPLY & SALVAGE
San Mateo
650-218-8596
www.driftwoodsalvage.com
Accepts and sells used building
materials and runs salvage sales
at individual homes they are
deconstructing.

SALVAGE YARDS

BUILDING RESOURCES
701 Amador Street
San Francisco, CA, 94124
415-285-7814
www.buildingresources.org
Accepts and sells a wide variety
of salvaged building materials.

C & K SALVAGE
10115 Denny Street
Oakland, CA, 94603
510-569-2070
Accepts and sells salvaged
building supplies. Focuses
mostly on lumber.

HABITAT FOR HUMANITY

GREATER SAN FRANCISCO

RESTORE
1411 Industrial Road
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-847-4000
www.habitatgsf.org/restore
Accepts and sells new and gently
used building materials.

OHMEGA SALVAGE
2407 San Pablo Avenue
Berkeley, CA 94702
510-204-0767
www.ohmegasalvage.com
Accepts and sells vintage
architectural salvage mid-century
and older.

URBAN ORE
900 Murray Street
Berkeley, CA 94710
510-841-7283
www.urbanore.com
Accepts and sells a wide variety
of salvaged building materials.

KNOW YOUR WASTE
4 DECONSTRUCTION, also
referred to as SALVAGE or
SOFT DEMOLITION, is a
cost-effective and
environmentally responsible
alternative to conventional
building demolition.

In a deconstruction, hazardous
materials are removed, reusable
building materials are salvaged,
demolition materials are recycled and
only a small portion of waste ends up
in the landfi ll.

To successfully deconstruct a building
for salvage, you may have a soft
demolition contractor identify and
remove the usable material or you may
extract the material and drop it off at
a salvage yard. Please take special care
to identify and remove any electrical
components that may contain mercury
such as lights, thermostats, and
switches. These must be treated as
hazardous waste.

Examples of reusable building
materials:
• Architectural details (columns,
fi replace mantels, moulding)
• Brick & block
• Doors & windows
• Electrical equipment
• Heating ducts
• Light fi xtures
• Lumber
• Plumbing fi ttings
• Plumbing fi xtures (faucets, toilets &
bathtubs)
• Siding
• Steel beams & studs
• Wainscoting

DECONSTRUCTION, SALVAGE & REUSE ECONSTRUCTION, SALVAGE & REUSE

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1796

HAULING AND DEBRIS BOX COMPANIES

HAULING COMPANIES
1-800-GOT-JUNK
1800 Duane Avenue
Santa Clara, CA 95054
1-800-GOT-JUNK (468-5865)
www.1800gotjunk.com

JOHNSTON HAULING SERVICE
Woodside
650-327-4285

KUNZ VALLEY TRASH
17355 Bear Creek Road
Boulder Creek, CA 95006
831-338-9050
www.kunzvalleytrash.com

PENINSULA HAULING AND

DEMOLITION
839 Cherry Lane
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-596-8105
www.peninsulahauling.com

HAULING AND

DEBRIS BOX COMPANIES

AMERICAN DEBRIS BOX
Half Moon Bay
650-712-8229 or
866-DEBRIS-1 (332-7471)

ASSOCIATED TRUCKING
1065 San Mateo Avenue
San Bruno, CA 94066
650-652-3960
www.associatedtruckinginc.com

BAKER BROTHERS
501 Bragato Road
San Mateo, CA 94403
650-458-8999

ECO-DUMPSTER
2397 Spring Street
Redwood City, CA 94063
650-367-7644
http://ecodumpster.com

GREENWORX
2240 Revere Avenue
San Francisco, CA 94124
888-714-7444
www.greenworxusa.com

HALF MOON BAY BUILDING

AND GARDEN SUPPLY
119 Main Street
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
650-726-6696
http://hmbbg.com

JD SERVICES
Burlingame
888-534-2857
650-458-6356
www.jdhauling.com

JUNK KING
389 Oyster Point Blvd. #6
South San Francisco, CA 94080
650-394-7484
www.junk-king.com

DEBRIS BOX COMPANIES

CITYWIDE DEBRIS BOX
AND RECYCLING*
1151 Quesada Ave
San Francisco, CA 94158
415-822-3688
www.citywidedebrisbox.com
CERTIFIED BLUE RECYCLING*
2075 Williams Street
San Leandro, CA 94577
510-904-3929
www.certifi ed-blue-recycling.com

FERMA CORPORATION
GREEN BOX SERVICE*
1265 Montecito Avenue
Mountain View, CA 94043
877-337-6211
www.fermacorp.com

GREENWASTE RECOVERY
1500 Berger Drive
San Jose, CA 95112
650-568-9900
www.greenwaste.com
Serves Woodside, Portola Valley,
East Palo Alto, Atherton, Menlo
Park and Redwood City.

PENINSULA DEBRIS BOX
1726 Leslie Street
San Mateo, CA 94402
800-799-1737
www.pdbs.us

PREMIER RECYCLE
348 Phelan Avenue
San Jose, CA 95112
408-297-7910
www.premierrecycle.com

RECOLOGY OF THE COAST
2305 Palmetto Avenue
Pacifi ca, CA 94044
650-355-9000
www.recology.com
Serves Pacifi ca through
Miramar only.

RECOLOGY PENINSULA

SERVICES
1356 Marsten Road
Burlingame, CA 94010
650-558-9575
www.recologypeninsulaservices.com
Serves Burlingame through East
Palo Alto.

RECOLOGY SAN BRUNO
101 Tanforan Avenue
San Bruno, CA 94066
650-583-8536
www.recologysanbruno.com
Serves San Bruno only.

REDWOOD DEBRIS BOX

SERVICE
350 Lang Road
Burlingame, CA 94010
650-872-2310
www.rdsredwood.com

REPUBLIC SERVICES OF

SAN MATEO COUNTY
1680 Edgeworth Avenue
Daly City, CA 94015
650-592-2411
www.republicservices.com

SOUTH SAN FRANCISCO
SCAVENGER CO.
500 East Jamie Court
South San Francisco, CA 94080
650-589-4020
www.ssfscavenger.com
Serves South San Francisco,
Brisbane and Millbrae.

VALLEY SERVICES
1615 B South 7th Street
San Jose, CA 95112
408-297-5352
www.valleyservices.biz
When you use a debris box company, you need to request that your C&D materials be recycled and receipts can be provided. Key questions to ask when selecting a company are:
• What recyclable materials are you willing to pick-up? • Do you offer a reduced fee if recyclables are separated from other waste? • What are your requirements for separating recyclable materials? • How much contamination do you allow?
The following areas have exclusive contracts with specifi ed debris box companies or only allow registered debris box companies:

Brisbane, Colma, Daly City, Hillsborough, Millbrae, Pacifi ca, San Bruno, South San Francisco and certain Unincorporated San Mateo County areas (El Granada, Miramar, Montara, Moss Beach, Pillar Point and Princeton). All other cities may use any of the following companies that haul mixed loads and sorted materials in San Mateo County. * Also has debris boxes for hazardous waste.

IDENTIFY HAULING OPTIONS
5 8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1797
A SORTING FACILITY specializes in sorting
recyclable construction material. Mixed C&D loads
can include all the materials listed below, and the
majority of it will be recycled. Large quantities of
inert solids (asphalt, concrete, dirt) should be kept
separate from mixed C&D loads.

RECYCLING FACILITIES

SORTING FACILITIES
mixed inertsasphaltbrickscarpetcardboardconcretedirtdrywall (unpainted)metalpalletsporcelainrockroofi ng (composite)wood (untreated) yard trimmings

SAN MATEO COUNTY
Andreini Brothers. Inc.
151 Main Street
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
650-726-2065 www.andreinibrothers.com
✔ ✔✔ ✔
Blue Line Transfer, Inc.
500 East Jamie Court
South San Francisco, CA 94080
650-589-4020 www.ssfscavenger.com
✔✔✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Brisbane Recycling Company
5 Beatty Road
Brisbane, CA 94005
415-467-5050
✔✔
CEMEX
775 Seaport Boulevard
Redwood City, CA 94063
650-369-9189 www.cemex.com
✔✔ ✔
Graniterock
195 Seaport Boulevard
Redwood City, CA 94063
650-482-3840 www.graniterock.com
✔✔
Half Moon Bay Building
and Garden Supply
119 Main Street
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
650-726-6696
www.halfmoonbaybuildingandgarden.com
✔✔ ✔
Ox Mountain Sanitary Landfi ll
12310 San Mateo Road (HWY 92)
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
650-726-1819 www.republicservices.com
✔✔✔ ✔✔ ✔ ✔✔ ✔ ✔✔
Pescadero Transfer Station
Bean Hollow Road at Artichoke
Pescadero, CA 94060
650-592-2411
✔✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Recology of the Coast
1046 Palmetto Avenue
Pacifi ca, CA 94044
650-355-9000 www.recology.com
✔✔ ✔ ✔
Shoreway Environmental Center
333 Shoreway Road
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-802-8355 www.sbrecycling.net
✔✔✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Unless you are taking your recycling to a sorting facility, the following materials must be separated and brought in as loads of only one material type. Some facilities accept MIXED INERTS (mixed loads of crushed asphalt, concrete, dirt) for recycling. Mixed inert loads will cost more than separated loads.

Offers portable crushing services.

KNOW YOUR WASTE
6 RECYCLING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1798

RECYCLING FACILITIES

SORTING FACILITIES
mixed inertsasphaltbrickscarpetcardboardconcretedirtdrywall (unpainted)metalpalletsporcelainrockroofi ng (composite)wood (untreated) yard trimmings Sims Metal
699 Seaport Boulevard
Redwood City, CA 94063
650-369-4161 www.simsmm.com
✔
SRDC
199 Seaport Boulevard
Redwood City, CA 94063
650-961-2742 www.SRDCrecycling.com
✔✔✔ ✔ ✔

ALAMEDA COUNTY
Davis Street Recycling Center
2615 Davis Street
San Leandro, CA 94577
510-638-2303 http://davisstreet.wm.com
✔✔✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Inner City Recycling
9009 Railroad Ave.

Oakland, CA 94063
510-568-7625
✔✔ ✔
Hayward Transfer Station
3458 Enterprise Way
Hayward, CA 94545
510-606-1548 http://haywardtransfer.com
✔ ✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔ ✔✔✔✔
Vasco Road Landfi ll
4001 North Vasco Road
Livermore, CA 94551
925-447-0491 www.republicservices.com
✔✔✔✔ ✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔ ✔✔

SAN FRANCISCO COUNTY
Recology San Francisco
501 Tunnel Avenue
San Francisco, CA 94134
415-330-1400 www.recology.com
✔✔✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔

SANTA CLARA COUNTY
Guadalupe Landfi ll
15999 Guadalupe Mines Road
San Jose, CA 95120
408-268-1670 http://guadalupe.wm.com
✔✔✔✔ ✔ ✔✔ ✔ ✔✔✔ ✔✔✔✔
Newby Island Landfi ll
1601 Dixon Landing Road
Milpitas, CA 95035
1-408-262-1401 http://newbyislandfacts.com
✔✔✔✔ ✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Valley Services
1615 B South 7th Street
San Jose, CA 95112
408-297-5352 www.valleyservices.biz
✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Zanker Recycling
675 Los Esteros Road
San Jose, CA 95134
408-263-2384 www.zankerrecycling.com
✔✔✔✔
✔
& foam
padding
✔✔ ✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔✔
Offers portable crushing services.

KNOW YOUR WASTE
7 RECYCLING ECYCLING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1799

KNOW YOUR WASTE
8 PROPER DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE

SAN MATEO COUNTY HAZARDOUS WASTE -

VERY SMALL QUANTITY GENERATOR (VSQG) PROGRAM
A VSQG (per state law) is any business that generates less than 100 kilograms (about 220 pounds or 27 gallons) of hazardous waste per month. The VSQG Program is designed to provide an inexpensive hazardous waste disposal option to eligible businesses, non-profi ts, and other government agencies. See the list of accepted materials to the left.

Visit www.smchealth.org/vsqg for details. Call 800-207-8222 to make an appointment at the next collection event. Minimal fees.

TRANSPORTING HAZARDOUS WASTE
Legally, you can only transport up to 10 gallons of hazardous waste at one time without a special license and permit. Qualifi ed VSQG businesses may legally carry up to 27 gallons or 220 pounds of a hazardous waste for disposal to the VSQG Facility.

You may also select a hazardous waste management company to collect and haul hazardous waste for you.

IF YOU DO NOT QUALIFY FOR THE VSQG PROGRAM
If your business generates more than 100 kilograms of hazardous waste per month, you will need to fi nd the appropriate commercial hazardous waste management company to handle your material. Companies that provide this service may be found by visiting www.smchealth.org/vsqg or by contacting the County’s Hazardous Materials Program at 650-372-6200.

PAINT RECYCLING
Paint (interior/exterior), primers, stains, sealers and clear coatings (e.g., shellac and varnish) can be recycled at many locations throughout the Bay Area. For a complete list of products that can be recycled and the locations to bring it to, visit:
www.paintcare.org or call toll free 888-442-2666.

LOCATIONS IN THE BAY AREA TO DISPOSE OF:
• Asbestos
• Pressure-treated wood
• Railroad ties
• Telephone poles

ALTAMONT LANDFILL
10840 Altamont Pass Road
Livermore, CA 94551
Call First 925-455-7300
(Friable and non-friable asbestos)

KIRBY CANYON RECYCLING &

DISPOSAL FACILITY
910 Coyote Creek Golf Drive
Morgan Hill, CA 95037
Call fi rst 559-834-9151
(Non-friable asbestos only)

NEWBY ISLAND LANDFILL
1601 Dixon Landing Road
Milpitas, CA 95035
Call fi rst 800-204-4242
(Non-friable asbestos only)

OX MOUNTAIN SANITARY

LANDFILL
12310 San Mateo Road
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
Call fi rst 800-204-4242
(Non-friable asbestos only)

HAZARDOUS WASTE AZARDOUS WASTE
At a construction site it is
very important to be aware of

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
so you can separate it from
other waste and properly
dispose of it.

Prior to a demolition, it is necessary
to identify and remove hazardous
wastes. You should also be prepared to
manage hazardous waste generated
during construction and at the end of
the project.

HAZARDOUS WASTE ACCEPTED

BY THE VSQG PROGRAM
• Ballasts
• Caulk containing PCBs
• Cleaning supplies
• Fluorescent light bulbs and tubes
• Garden chemicals
• Glues, mastics, adhesives
• Oils
• Paint chips (Paint removed from
projects conducted before 1980 contain
lead)
• Paints, thinners, stains
• Pesticides, herbicides
• Pool chemicals

HAZARDOUS WASTE NOT

ACCEPTED BY THE VSQG

PROGRAM
• Appliances
• Asbestos
• Pressure-treated wood
• Railroad ties
• Telephone poles
For more information on where to
recycle items that are not accepted by
the VSQG program call our toll free
hotline at 1-888-442-2666.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1800

KNOW YOUR WASTE
9 UNIVERSAL WASTE NIVERSAL WASTE

PROPER DISPOSAL OF UNIVERSAL WASTE
Hazardous waste regulations designate a category of hazardous wastes called universal waste. California’s Universal Waste Rule allows individuals and businesses to transport, handle and recycle certain common hazardous wastes, termed universal wastes, in a manner that differs from the requirements for most hazardous wastes.

The more relaxed requirements for managing universal wastes were adopted to ensure that they are managed safely and are not disposed of in the trash.

WHAT ARE UNIVERSAL WASTES?
Universal wastes are hazardous wastes that are widely produced by households and many different types of businesses. Universal wastes include televisions, computers and other electronic devices as well as batteries, fl uorescent lamps, mercury thermostats, and other mercury containing equipment. See complete list in the column to the left. For more information visit www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ universalwaste.

LOCATIONS IN THE BAY AREA THAT WILL RECYCLE
UNIVERSAL WASTE FOR A FEE:

AERC
30677 Huntwood Avenue, Hayward
www.aerc.com
510-429-1129
• Batteries
• Electronic devices
• Fluorescent light bulbs and tubes
• HID lamps

CROWN COMPUTER RECYCLING
520 Bragato Road, San Carlos
www.crowncomputerrecycling.com
650-591-0600
• Electronic devices

E-CYCLE ENVIRONMENTAL
1937 Davis Street, San Leandro
www.ecycleenvironmental.com
510-865-9137
• Batteries
• Electronic devices
• Fluorescent light bulbs and tubes
• HID lamps

GREEN CITIZEN
1831 Bayshore Highway, Suite 2
Burlingame
www.greencitizen.com
650-493-8700 x103
• Electronic Devices
At a construction site it is
very important to be aware of

UNIVERSAL WASTE
so you can separate it from
other waste and properly
dispose of it.

Prior to any renovation, it is necessary
to identify and remove universal
wastes. You should also be prepared
to deal with universal waste generated
during construction and at the end of
the project.

If a nonresidential project is ≥ 1000
sq. ft. or ≥ $200,000, be prepared
to report on how the waste was
managed.

UNIVERSAL WASTE ACCEPTED BY

THE VSQG PROGRAM FOR A FEE
• Batteries
• Fluorescent light bulbs and tubes
• High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lamps:
metal halide lamps, sodium vapor
lamps and electric lamps that
contain added mercury
• Non-empty aerosol cans that
contain hazardous waste
• Any mercury waste:
thermometers, pressure or
vacuum gauges, dilators and
weighted tubing, rubber fl ooring,
gas fl ow regulators,
counterweights and dampers
switches and thermostats

UNIVERSAL WASTE NOT

ACCEPTED BY THE VSQG

PROGRAM
• Electronic Devices:

Televisions, VCR and DVD Players,
computers, computer monitors,
cathode ray tubes (CRTs), and
cellphones
For more information on where to
recycle items that are not accepted by
the VSQG program call our toll free
hotline at 1-888-442-2666.

QUICK LIGHT RECYCLING, LLC
Brisbane
www.quicklightrecycling.com
415-596-2305
• Batteries
• Fluorescent light bulbs and tubes
• HID lamps

REVOLT RECYCLING
657 143rd Avenue, San Leandro
www.revoltrecycling.com
510-352-2665
• Batteries
• Electronic devices
• Fluorescent light bulbs and tubes
• HID lamps
• Mercury containing devices
ZARC
26 South Linden Avenue
South San Francisco
www.zarcrecycling.com
650-871-7327
• Electronic devices

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1801
sustainability.smcgov.org
888-442-2666

KNOW YOUR WASTE
10 DISPOSAL ISPOSAL
Materials that are NOT
RECYCLABLE and NOT
HAZARDOUS should be taken to
a DISPOSAL facility.

Examples of disposable materials may
include:

Bagged waste
Damaged fl exible ductwork
Dirty drop cloths
Foam
Insulation
Mixed composite materials
Vinyl fl ooring
Visqueen

BLUE LINE TRANSFER STATION
500 East Jamie Court
South San Francisco, CA 94080
650-589-4020
www.ssfscavenger.com

OX MOUNTAIN SANITARY LANDFILL
12310 San Mateo Road
Half Moon Bay, CA 94019
650-726-1819
www.republicservices.com

PESCADERO TRANSFER STATION
Bean Hollow Road at Artichoke
Pescadero, CA 94060
650-592-2411
(Open Friday - Sunday)

SHOREWAY ENVIRONMENTAL CENTER
(SAN CARLOS TRANSFER STATION)
333 Shoreway Road
San Carlos, CA 94070
650-802-8355
www.sbrecycling.net

DISPOSAL FACILITIES

COUNTY RECYCLING HOTLINES AND WEBSITES

COUNTY RECYCLING HOUSEHOLD HAZARDOUS

WASTE WEBSITE
Alameda 877-STOPWASTE 800-606-6606 www.stopwaste.org
Contra Costa 800-750-4096 800-750-4096 www.co.contra-costa.ca.us/ depart/cd/recycle
Marin 415-499-6647 415-485-6806 www.zerowastemarin.org
San Francisco 415-355-3700 415-330-1405 www.sfenvironment.org Santa Clara 408-282-3180 408-299-7300 www.reducewaste.org Santa Cruz 831-454-2160 831-454-2606 www.santacruzcountyrecycles.org

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1802
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

APPENDIX
C. C AND D WASTE MANAGEMENT AGREEMENT

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1803

City of San Carlos
Building Division
600 Elm St, San Carlos, CA 94070
Phone: 650-802-4261
Construction & Demolition Waste Management Plan Agreement Per the San Carlos Municipal Code Chapter 8.05 projects over $50,000 require a Construction & Demolition Waste Management Plan. Please fill out and initial the highlighted areas below. ____1. Applicant shall not perform any demolition, construction, or alteration at the address noted below without having an approved Waste Management Plan.
____2. Applicant shall ensure that all materials are hauled to the facility or facilities indicated on the Waste Management Plan. This may include overseeing the activity of contracted hauling companies, demolition contactors or debris box companies to ensure that those companies haul to the recognized facilities on the Waste Management Plan.
____3. Additional reductions in disposal of construction waste are a key goal for the City of San Carlos. Since construction industry practices encourage diversion of source separated inert materials, reviews of waste management plans and reports will focus on diversion of materials from the mixed waste stream, and limits have been set on the counting of inert materials towards recycling requirements. ____4. Applicant acknowledges and accepts that review and acceptance of all weight tags, salvage receipts and all other recycling documentation is required within 60 days of final inspection. Applicant shall ensure that receipts (such as weight tickets provided at scale houses) are properly coded to indicate whether material is recycled or disposed and the type of material recycled. For salvaged items, receipts shall indicate specific items and quantities salvaged and what companies and/or individuals received the materials (see page 4 for example). ____5. Applicant understands that recycling rates and recycling processes vary from facility to facility and that the Building Division will be available to assist in preparing a Waste Management Plan that ensures compliance with the City of San Carlos C&D Ordinance if needed.
____6. Applicant is responsible for ensuring that everyone involved in this project (contractors, subcontractors, haulers, dumpster companies, and their employees, etc.) understands and complies with the terms of this Waste Management Plan.
____7. If items are not taken to one of our recognized recycling facilities and / or sold and re-used, the applicant shall provide an itemized list of what was re-used or sold. ____8. Applicant acknowledges and accepts that if the recycling requirements noted in the City of San Carlos C&D Ordinance and in items 1-7 of this agreement are not met, the recycling deposit or a portion thereof will not be returned.

San Carlos City CouncilNovember 10, 2025

San Carlos City Council
November 10, 2025